Home

R&S FSH Operating Manual

1. ee ose ee 3 Description Measurement Font Instrument m GE 4 Encryption Enabled Settings Allow Variable Number of Sequence Steps O Allow to Skip Measurements and Finish Wizard Sequence Default Calibration Factory e Cable Definition for Antenna amp Cable Test e e Mods Cable Length Meter Prompt User to change Cable Settings SDataSets on PC 10 Measurements Current Folder Datasets ce EI EX v Name Size Time BB cdma2k2G dif set 53 9KB8 06 06 2012 12 06 cdma2k2G isolation set 53 9 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 cdma2k2G rl set 53 9 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 dtf_gsm1800 set 53 9 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 dtf_GSM900 set 51 2 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 isolation_gsm1800 set 53 9 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 isolation_GSM900 set 51 2KB 06 06 2012 12 06 r_gsm1800 set 53 9 KB 06 06 2012 12 06 _GSM300 set 51 2KB 06 06 2012 12 06 Name of the measurement set Description of the measurement task Font type for on screen instructions latin and some asian fonts are supported Measurement set password protection Measurement sequence control 0O PS Go h A R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options 6 Calibration method 7 Cable characteristics length and model 8 Control of cable characteristics model and length after individual measurements 9 List of datasets that are available via the PC 10 List of datasets that are currently part of the measurement
2. TD SCDMA Code Domain Analysis only Time Domain Power code Powe Sync ID Absolute Code Domain Power Relative to RF Channel Power Code Domain Channel Table Limits Result Summary Contents depend on result display Slot Number Code Channel esult Summary Mode Channel Search Off Fast Channel Search On Normal Scrambling Code Set code manually link Downlink Switch Point Switch Point manually aximum Users A Set K manually 9 carrier Freq Erre Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer EVM According to Standard Subframes to Analyze Connected to Tx1 Over the Ain Connected to Tx1 Connected to Tx Result Summary UT ke WI Over The Air Minimum T 2 Channel Bandwith ER UL DL Configuration Colors AGA Resource Allocations BTS Scanner ton ro Primary Sync Signal Power only available for TOD measurements 10 8 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram Crea pa feel pret iste 10 8 3 10 8 4 Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram 3GPP
3. Markers P1 to P4 are fix and always remain on the peak level of the corresponding subrange If you d like to analyze other locations on the trace use normal marker and deltamarker functionality For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 107 3 1 9 1 Defining the Channel Bandwidth Several frequency bands have been defined for 3GPP transmissions Depending on the frequency band you are testing you have to adjust the start and stop frequencies of the carriers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Carrier Start softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the lower frequency of the channel gt Press the Carrier Stop softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the upper frequency of the channel Note that the standard defines spurious emissions as transmission outside the frequency band 12 5 MHz below the first carrier and 12 5 MHz above the last carrier Keep these values in mind when defining the start and stop frequencies of the carrier 3 1 9 2 Viewing the Results in a Table You can add a table to the display that shows the measurement results in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key Wy oan Limit Line 3GPP BTS Category A gt Press the View List softkey di as i G Peak Freg Hz Peak Power 3 000 k 150 000 k 1k 3 933 k 43 54 dE m The R amp S FSH shows a list above 200M 1006 mok ween 2466 dBm 1 000 G 8 000 G IM 1 8110000 G 15 06 dBm the trace diagram
4. Pilot JLE dom 6 57 dB 0 00 dB 1 55 4 1 000 MAC 30 66 dBm 4 4 de 1 63 de Data JLH Em 3 38 dB 3 20 dB Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Global results 6 Channel results 7 CDMA2000 softkey menu AOON 9 6 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard PN Offset Shows the current Pseudo Noise PN Offset of the base station For more information see Changing the PN Offset on page 251 The PN Offset only takes effect in combination with an external or GPS trigger Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 248 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one frame Global results also contain information about the queliaty of the composite signal Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 1 23 MHz bandwidth around the center frequency Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Fr
5. R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 6 3 1 Measuring the Transmission The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two port filter The filter works in the frequency from of 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz Test setup gt Connect the input of the DUT to the tracking generator output port 2 gt Connect the output of the DUT to the RF input port 1 Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start vector measurements gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Vector menu item Select the type of transmission measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Transmission Fwd Port 1 2 menu item for transmission measurements in forward direction or Transmission Rev Port 1 2 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Enter a span
6. The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the display unit gt Select one of the available units The R amp S FSH adjusts the labels of the vertical axis accordingly Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 90 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 4 Setting a Reference Offset You can define a reference offset for the reference level With a reference offset you can increase the reference level by a certain amount This is useful for example if an attenuator or amplifier has been inserted before the RF input The R amp S FSH automatically takes the loss or gain into account when the level is displayed and no manual calculations are necessary A loss introduced at the RF input must be entered as a positive number and a gain as a negative number gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The R amp S FSH open an input field to gt Enter the offset you need The R amp S FSH includes the offset in the measurement To indicate an offset other than 0 the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the Ref hardware setting Ref 20 0 dBm 3 2 2 5 Setting the RF Attenuation RF attenuation adjusts the input range inside the analyzer It is coupled directly to the reference level If you have set a high reference level RF attenuation is turned on in 10 dB steps according to the table below so that the input mixer always remains in the linear range The R amp S FSH provides three attenu
7. You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or format see Selecting the Measurement Format without affecting the accuracy of the measurement 6 5 2 2 Performing Reflection Measurements Calibrate the measurement for reflection measurements gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the characteristics of the DUT magnitude and phase as numerical values You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or format see Selecting the Measurement Format without affecting the accuracy of the measurement Note that for calibration to remain valid frequency parameters bandwidth and attenuation have to remain the same Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 180 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 3 Evaluating the Results 6 5 3 1 Selecting the Measurement Format Depending on the result display reflection or transmission you can select one of several measurement formats Each of the measurement formats shows a different aspect of the measurement results For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 167 Vector Voltmeter In addition to the measurement formats also available for scalar and vector measurement the vector voltmeter provides the vector voltmete
8. gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Event Source menu item and select an event type from the dropdown menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 19 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Saving Events e Time interval Saves measurement data every lt x gt seconds You can define the duration of the time interval via the Time Interval menu item Single sweeps and sweep time Note that it is not possible to save measurement data every lt x gt seconds in single sweep mode because the R amp S FSH only performs one sweep and then stops Note also that the time interval must be longer than the sweep time If the time interval would be shorter the R amp S FSH would not be able to save data because a sweep has to be complete before the R amp S FSH is able to save the data e Limit failure Saves measurement data if a limit line is violated not supported by Geotagging mode yet The R amp S FSH provides different modes for handling limit check failures You can select one via the Limits Save Mode Start on failure starts to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Stop on failure stops to save measurement data if a limit line is violated Save only failure saves only the sweeps that actually fail a limit check e Distance interval Saves measurement data after you have covered a certain distance You can define the distance that must covered b
9. gt Select the Spectrogram Level Range menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the spectrogram level range In the example the level range of the signal is from about 60 dBm to about 100 dBm 01 04 10 16 46 e gt Therefore set the level range to Ref 29 df RBW 100 kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Clear Wike 40 dB to get the whole signal s Arc 0 dB VBW 1MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS As the level range is now adjusted MM the R amp S FSH is able to map its 890 by AP O ISO O SS A SS E range of the signal This means that signal parts with a low amplitude are in a shade of green while signal parts with a high amplitude are yellow Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz Playback Mode Settings Spectrog Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 78 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The best way to display a spectrogram is therefore to reduce the level range until the lowest signal part is mapped to the lower end of the color map and the highest signal part to the upper end of the color map In a last step you can configure the spectrogram in a way that it only shows signal peaks in color and the noise floor in black To get a result like that you have to reduce the level range until the noise floor is outside the displayed range gt Instead of entering a level range of 40 dB enter a level range of 35 dB or even 30 dB 01 04 10 16 50 D This will provide a high contrast Ref
10. 23 191 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SSS IAPS EENEG Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Start Freq or the Stop Freq softkey gt Enter the start frequency and stop frequency you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the frequency range according to your settings Note that the distance from start to stop frequency has to be equal to the span The R amp S FSH adjusts the values if you enter a frequency range that is not the same as the span 7 2 2 2 Selecting the Cable Length The R amp S FSH uses the cable length to determine the span for the measurement The longer the cable under test the smaller the span Together with the cable model the cable length is also the basis for the calculation of the cable attenuation The cable attenuation in turn is necessary for a correct calculation of the reflection magnitude at the cable fault The cable length also defines the scale of the horizontal axis In the default configuration the R amp S FSH shows the whole cable length If the cable length you have set is shorter than the actual cable length the R amp S FSH does not display the faults of the whole cable A reflection at the end of the cable will not be shown However deliberately entering a cable length that is too short is a good way to increase measurement accuracy for a fault that is near to the measurement plane If the entered cable length is greater than the actual lengt
11. 7 38 514 N Long 11 36 43 296 E Alt 584 8 m Center Shows the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For valid results the center frequency of the R amp S FSH and the signal have to be the same gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the frequency you need Channel Shows the number of the channel currently selected The number depends on the selected band class Band Shows the name of the band class you have selected gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Freq Mode softkey gt Select the Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a LTE channel table or band class gt Select the channel table you need with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH now applies the channel table to the measurement Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 207 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Transducer Shows the name of the transducer if one is in use For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 121 Ref Level Shows the current reference level of the R amp S FSH The reference level is the power level the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input If Auto Low Noise or Auto Low Distortion is on the R amp S FSH uses it to determine the attenuation and preamplification internally For more information see Setting the RF Attenuation on page 91 Keep in mind that the power level at the RF input is the pe
12. The list contains information for each frequency range that the measurement covers Thus the number of entries in the list depends on the overall frequency span you are using for the measurement The following ranges have been defined e 9kHz to 150 kHz with an RBW of 1 kHz e 150 kHz to 30 MHz with an RBW of 10 kHz e 30 MHz to 1 GHz with an RBW of 100 kHz Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 72 Performing Spectrum Measurements e gt 1 GHz with an RBW of 1 MHz The spurious list contains the following information for each range e Frequency range Start and stop frequencies of the range e RBW Resolution bandwidth that the R amp S FSH uses within that range e Peak Frequency Frequency at which the peak power has been measured in a particular range e Peak Power Peak power that has been measured in a particular range R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 Working with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 K15 With option R amp S FSH K14 or R amp S FSH K15 you can view measurement results in a spectrogram The spectrogram result display shows the spectral density of a signal in the frequency domain and over time simultaneously Like other result displays the horizontal axis represents the frequency span The vertical axis represents time Time in the spectrogram runs chronologically from top to bottom Therefore the top of the diagram is the present A third dimension s
13. WSING ISOUMDIC AMENNA EE 83 3 2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeenseeeseeeeneeeeeens 85 3 2 1 Configuring the Horizontal AXIS ccccoonnnccncccccnnccnnccononcnnnononancnnnononannnnnonnnancnnnonnnancnnnoss 85 322 COMIQuring le Vertical AXIS E 89 ee SISTING ANG VAGII EE 94 3 2 4 Configuring and Triggering the Gweenp 97 320 Working with Te 102 Sie Le EE 107 SEET 116 8 2 0 USMO CI d e 117 3 3 Working With Channel Table wvscscisiciecccssnccncccensncevesinssnevsetesetecencesssssanccuesmnecceveteeseree 120 3 4 Using Transducer Factors xsi tcescsnusircseccdsemerneucensacenoscenesevsunewsteccscesesseueceusssssecoscscesetves 121 3 4 1 Unit for Measurements with Transducerg nn 122 3 4 2 Setting the Reference Level 123 3 4 3 Frequency Range of Transducer 123 3 4 4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors oooocccccccnonccnncnononccnncnonancnnnononancnnnnnnnanennnnos 123 E POWEr CASOS util 124 41 Usmo a E eN EE 124 4 1 1 COnnecting a Power SONSOM E 126 4 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements sn00nnnennennnnnonennnnnsnnnnressnnrnensenrerenne 127 4 2 Using a Directional Power Sensor ccssssssscssnssesseccensnessecccnnnasseccennnasseceenansssas 130 4 2 1 Connecting a Directional Power Sensor ocoooocccnccnononccnccnnnanconcnnnnancnncnnnnancnnnnnnnancannnss 131 4 2 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements sna0nnnenneannnnonennnnnsnnnenessnnrnnnsenreren
14. You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 64 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 6 2 Optimizing Measurement Settings After selecting the standard and applying the signal to the R amp S FSH you can optimize measurement settings to avoid overloading the R amp S FSH gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level ans span 3 1 6 3 Viewing the Results in a Table You can add a table to the display that shows the measurement results in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the View List softkey Geier See ie SCH SS Power Abs Power Bel 12 750 M 8 500 M IM 669 828095 M 85 85 d m 95 35 dB The R amp S FSH shows a list above 750M 350M IMO gh emm em 3 500 M 2 500 M GERGEN 93 93 48m 70 43 dB the trace diagram If the list contains more than four entries you can scroll through the list with the rotary knob or the cursor keys to see the other results Note that scrolling works only if there is no active input field The list contains the following information e Tx
15. e dB CPICH 0 258 16 0 wre eee Active P CH x mm men Active 63 66 24 ACH mm a Active ap db P CLPCH 1306 168 00 eer ere Active 6 50 5 08 PICH 1236 15 0 0 Active 63 29 1 81 HSPOSCH 416 240 0 0 06 Active 41 52 20 10 HSPDSCH 516 240 0 0 8 Active 1 08 19 66 HSPOSCH 6 16 240 0 H 4 Artie FILA 13 2 a H S id Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Global results 6 Channel table 7 WCDMA softkey menu RON al 9 4 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 and The Result Summary on page 223 BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 230 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 3 2 Global Results The global results include information about the complete signal Channel Power Shows the power of the complete signal Active Channels Shows the number of the currently measured channels 9 4 3 3 Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns that show various information about each channel The number of rows depends on the number of channels that are currently active If a channel occupies more than one code the results correspond to all codes in the chan
16. the R amp S FSH automatically switches to a logarithmic scaling after you turn on the limit line After turning on a limit line the R amp S FSH checks if the signal violates the shape of the limit line If one or more signal levels exceed the limit value the R amp S FSH features several indicators that the limit check has failed e Ageneral message in the diagram header that indicates if the signal violates the limit line including the trace that violates the limit e An audio signal that sounds every time a limit is violated e The trace color turns red in areas of the spectrum that violate a limit You can create and edit limit lines with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH The number of limit lines you can store in the memory depends on other datasets available on the R amp S FSH or if you are using an external storage device e g memory stick the size of it For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 2 8 1 Selecting a Limit Line Before selecting a limit line you need to decide if you want to use it as an upper or lower limit line In case of upper limit lines the R amp S FSH checks if the signal is above the limit line In case of lower limit lines the R amp S FSH checks if the signal is below the limit line You also have to make sure that the limit line is compatible to the scale of the horizontal axis gt Press the LINES key gt
17. 23 130 R amp S FSH Power Sensors EE Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 1 Connecting a Directional Power Sensor The R amp S FSH controls and powers the directional power sensors via a special interface on the top of the instrument Connect the power sensor cable to the power sensor interface and screw it into position The power sensor itself is located between the source and the load of the test setup The figure below shows the way a test setup would look like The power sensors for the R amp S ZVH have an assymetrical design Hence you have to insert them into the test setup in such a way that the Forward arrow 152 on the sensor points toward the load in the direction of the power flux If the R amp S FSH recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the results It displays the type of the power sensor in the display header If an error occurs the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message For more information see Connecting a Power Sensor Directional Power Sensor R amp S FSH Z14 or Z44 Source Load Power sensor jack RON H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 131 R amp S FSH Power Sensors EE Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements After you have connected a power sensor the R amp S FSH immediately starts to measure the signal power When measuring high powers pay strict attention to the followin
18. Abs 44 08 dEm avg 80H Power Abs 43 52 dBm avg e Max Hold The results are based on the maximum values that have been measured The result is updated only if a higher value has been measured for a particular result If you are using the max hold mode the R amp S FSH adds the max label to numerical results e Min Hold The results are based on the minimum values that have been measured The result is updated only if a lower value has been measured for a particular result If you are using the min hold mode the R amp S FSH adds the min label to numerical results In the graphical results for example the Spectrum Overview the trace modes have the same effects as in Spectrum mode For more information on trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Carrier frequency error Note that the Carrier Frequency Error result supports the average trace mode only if you are using the Precision Reference Frequency R amp S FSH Z2114 Min Hold and Max Hold trace modes are not supported by the Carrier Frequency Error result e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 210 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trace mode gt Select the trace mode you want to work with If you have selected the average trace mode Average 10 menu item the R amp
19. All others are called Alternate Channels ALT1 to ALT11 By default the R amp S FSH assumes that the distance of the adjacent channels to each other is the same In that case you only have to enter the first spacing value The R amp S FSH then calculates all higher adjacent channels from that value If you change the spacing of one of the higher channels the R amp S FSH only updates the channel spacings above the one you have changed but not those below So for example if you set the first adjacent channel spacing ADJ to 20 kHz the following spacings are 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 120 kHz ALT5 and so on If you then change the spacing of the third alternate channel ALT3 to 100 kHz the R amp S FSH adjusts the alternate channels above the third one accordingly 125 kHz ALT4 150 KHz ALT5 and so on Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 59 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 3 Normalization of Measurement Results By default the power of the channels and adjacent channels is displayed in the unit dBm It is also possible to display the power density of the signal to for example measure the signal noise power density or obtain the signal to noise ratio gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Pwr Hz menu item The R amp S FSH activates normalization and switches the unit from dBm to dBm Hz The
20. Center Frequency 449375 MHz RF Channel Power RFC 25 5 dBm Channel Number 793 Sync Power Ral to ab e 12 97 dE Channel Band cdma ki JTACS CO 10 64 Rel to RFCP 7 02 dB Carrier Freg Error 11 2 Hz i i 8 Composite EVM 6 16 A 32 5 dBm pty Found N A h Start Code 0 Stop Gode 127 Bauer won Tay nnn sign a Display Settings Adjust Settings Settings Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Diagram header Diagram area CDMA2000 softkey menu OO P Go bi 9 5 2 1 Header Table and Diagram Header The header table and the diagram header contain an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 236 In addition they contain the following information Code Order Shows the currently selected code order The code order is either Hadamard or BitReverse For more information see Changing the Code Order on page 244 Pilot Power Shows the power of the pilot channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 239 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Sync Power Relative to lt Reference gt Shows the power of the synchronization channel SYNC in relation to the pilot channel or the RF channel power For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 245 C lt x gt Ch SF Relative to lt Reference gt Shows the power of the cu
21. Define the reference level that best fits the measurement In the default state the reference level corresponds to the level at the right of the bargraph The reference level position is shown by a triangle in the bargraph scale label IAN I L I I I I I E 33 0 23 0 130 30 70 170 270 mn 570 67 0 You can move the reference position to another position on the scale gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range Ref Pos softkey Select the Ref Position 10 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the reference position gt Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level at The range is from 0 to 10 0 corresponds to the left side of the bargraph 10 corresponds to right side of the bargraph You can also select the level range that the bargraph covers In the default state the bargraph covers 100 values of the unit you have selected e g 100 dBuV Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the level range gt Select the level range you need BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 199 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 selecting the Measurement Mode 8 1 2 Performing Frequency Scans Compared to single frequency measurements frequency scans perform a measurement on a particular set of receive frequencies The scan measures only those frequencies that are defined in the frequency range The space between the re
22. EVM in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Peak CDE Shows the Peak Code Domain Error of the signal in dB The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum code domain error power that was found in the measurement SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 254 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals The code domain error is the difference in power of the test signal and an ideal reference signal Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Avg RCDE Shows the Average Relative Code Domain Error of the signal Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on PCCPCH Symbol EVM Shows the EVM of the PCCPCH in rms for the time slot 0 Note that the R amp S FSH only calculates the EVM if the PCCPCH is actually transmitted PCCPCH Ec lo Shows the ratio of the power of the pilot channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal Scrambling Code Found Shows the number of the scrambling code if one has been found Active Channels Shows the number of active channels currently received Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on 9 7 1 3 Power Results Power results contain various results specific to one timeslot Th
23. It is not possible to save these in a data set however They are lost as soon as you change them or load another cable model gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Cable Config softkey gt Select the Define User Model menu item A submenu opens Select the Frequency menu item Enter the frequency of the cable you are testing Select the Velocity menu item Enter the cable velocity Select the Loss menu item vY vV V Y Y Yy Enter the cable loss You can now perform measurements on the temporary cable definition Note that as soon as you change any cable parameter or load another cable model the temporary data is lost and you have to define it again if you have to perform further measurements After you have defined the cable characteristics you still have to activate the use of the customized cable gt Press the Cable Config softkey gt Select the User Model menu item If the R amp S FSH uses the customized cable model it shows an X at the User Model menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 189 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 AA RE Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 1 3 Working with a DTF List The DTF list shows the results of the distance to fault measurement in numerical form gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the DTF Settings softkey gt Press the DIF List softkey The R amp S FSH opens a table that lists the peaks it has found dur
24. It triggers measurements on synchronization with the base station Base SF Shows the current Base Spreading factor Base SF For more information see Setting the Base Spreading Factor on page 244 9 5 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one Power Control Group PCG Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 1 23 MHz bandwidth around the center frequency Rho According to the CDMA2000 standard Rho is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal When you measure Rho the CDMA2000 standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude EVM in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 245 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Peak to Average Shows the difference between the peak power and the average power of the signal crest factor Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 237 R amp S FSH Digital Modu
25. Overall EWM EK Coll Identity Y 01 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Color map 4 Diagram area 5 General signal information 6 LTE softkey menu The resource allocations result display shows the power of each resource element in the signal Each row of the diagram corresponds to a resource block The columns represent a subframe each The resource allocation is thus a good way to measure the amount of traffic currently on the carrier based on the power levels of each resource block The power of the resource elements is represented by colors with a map showing the corresponding power levels next to the diagram By default the R amp S FSH automatically scales the color map according the signal powers it receives Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 274 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Customizing the color map Alternatively you can customize the color map and customize it for over the air measurements and cable connected measurements separately gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Over The Air Maximum or the Over The Air Minimum menu item to define a color map for over the air measurements gt Select the Cable Connected Maximum or the Cable Connected Minimum menu item to define a color map for cable connected measurements In both cases the Minimum menu item defines the lower threshold of the co
26. Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Offset Length Port 1 or Offset Length Port 2 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the electrical length of the accessory gt Enter the electrical length The R amp S FSH now includes the electrical length of the accessory for phase measurements Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 157 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements 6 2 Performing Scalar Measurements With scalar measurements you can measure the magnitude of both reflection and transmission characteristics of a device under test To calibrate the measurements only normalization is available 6 2 1 Measuring the Transmission The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two port filter The filter has a center frequency of 2060 MHz and a bandwidth of about 11 MHz Test setup gt Connect the input of the DUT to the tracking generator output port 2 gt Connect the output of the DUT to the RF input port 1 Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start scalar measurements Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Scalar menu item Select the type of transmission measurement Press the Re
27. The application shows the azimuth as a straight black line beginning at your location and pointing in the direction you are facing The azimuth line is always displayed when you are using the functionality of the R amp S FSH K15 even if you are just walking around without saving any data The R amp S FSH K15 allows you display three geotags at the same time If you want to display a different geotag you first have to remove one of those that are currently displayed If you are using functionality of the R amp S FSH K16 you can display as many geotags as you want gt Press the GPS Position softkey Select the GPS Position List menu item gt Select the geotag you want to remove and press the Include softkey The R amp S FSH unchecks the checkbox in the Include column of the list gt Select the geotag you want to display instead and press the Include softkey The R amp S FSH adds the geotag to the map display 5 2 4 2 Triangulation R amp S FSH K15 With option R amp S FSH K15 the R amp S FSH is able to locate the source of interference using the triangulation method To perform triangulation you have to create two or three geotags with azimuth information After creating the geotags display them on the map Based on these geotags the R amp S FSH calculates the point at which the azimuth lines of the geotags intersect This intersection point represents the source of the interference Press the GPS Position
28. gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Primary Code or Secondary Code menu item gt Enter the primary or secondary scrambling code of the base station you are testing In most cases the secondary scrambling code has the value 0 Performing a search for the scrambling code If you don t know the scrambling code the R amp S FSH is able to determine the scrambling code of one or more 3GPP base stations by itself Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the scrambling code If it finds the code the synchronization will be successful If not the synchronization fails The R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message Ne Codes found Comparing the power of multiple scrambling codes You can also view the scrambling codes and their power graphically EFEN gt Press the MEAS key Ref 30 0 d m RBW 100kHz Sweep Cont Trace Clear Write Arc 0 dB Freamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB Bar Prim Sac P CPICH dBm Bar Prim Sac P CPICH dBm gt Press the Result Display softkey 1 367 0 6456 um pn 117 gt Select the Scrambling Code menu item The R amp S FSH shows all primary and corresponding secondary scrambling codes that it has found during the search in descending order regarding the power level Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 232 R amp S F
29. gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the Save softkey gt Press the Quick Naming softkey gt Select one of the table cells with the cursor keys gt Press the Change Table Item softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a term for the cell gt Define a term with the number keys and confirm the term with ENTER The R amp S FSH adds the term to the table You can create and edit quick naming tables with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH gt Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Import softkey gt Select the Import Quick Naming Table menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a file to import The same way you can also export a quick naming table gt Inthe Quick Naming softkey menu press the Export softkey gt Select the Export Quick Naming Table menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 26 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 1 4 Converting Dataset File Types The functionality of the R amp S FSH4View software allows you to convert a dataset of the file type set into the csv format The conversion is possible with a command line option for the FSH4View exe file The general syntax you have to use is FSH4View exe csv lt InputDataset set gt lt DestinationFile csv gt Note that you have to use quotation marks for the file name if it contains blank spaces E
30. gt Select the dataset with the settings you want gt Select the Preset Mode menu item in the User Preferences dialog box gt Select the User Defined item from the dropdown menu The R amp S FSH now loads the settings of the dataset after you press PRESET 1 4 Configuring Measurements The Measurement Setup dialog box provides an overview of the current configuration of the R amp S FSH In addition you can also change the configuration in this dialog box gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the Measurement Setup softkey gt Select one of the menu items and change the settings as you like Note that the contents of the Measurement Setup dialog box are customized for each operating mode of the R amp S FSH Therefore the order and number of displayed settings is different in each mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 14 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Configuring the Instrument 1 5 Configuring the Instrument The Instrument Setup dialog box contains functionality that is independent of the operating mode For more information see the Quick Start Guide Protecting the R amp S FSH with a PIN The R amp S FSH features a PIN protection system that protects the R amp S FSH from unauthorized access If PIN protection is on you have to enter the PIN whenever you turn the R amp S FSH on The protection system provides three levels of security e PIN made up of four digits e Master PIN made up out o
31. softkey gt Select the trace style you prefer from the menu The R amp S FSH provides two trace styles in receiver mode e Lines The Lines trace style shows a vertical line for each receive frequency as described above e Polygon The Polygon trace style shows the trace as a continuous horizontal line The gaps between the actual measurement frequencies are interpolated 8 1 2 1 Defining the Scan Range The scan range defines the frequency range that the scan takes place in Therefore you have to define a start and stop frequency for the scan range and a scan step size The step size defines the equidistant soace between the receive frequencies and thus in combination with the start and stop frequency the number of receive frequencies considered in the scan Example If you define a scan range from 100 MHz to 200 MHz with a step size of 10 MHz the receive frequencies that are analyzed are 100 MHz 110 MHz 120 MHz 200 MHz Overall this scan range defines a set of 11 receive frequencies Press the SPAN key gt Press the Scan Start softkey Enter the frequency you want the scan to start at gt Press the Scan Stop softkey Enter the frequency you want the scan to stop at gt Press the Scan Step softkey Enter the step size you want to apply The R amp S FSH starts the scan as soon as you have finished defining the scan range Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 201 R amp S FSH Receiver Mod
32. the time it has been calibrated In that case you should repeat calibration e interp network analysis only The R amp S FSH interpolates the correction data between the reference points of the calibration Interpolation is used when you change one of the frequency parameters start stop or center frequency In that case the distribution of the measurement points is different to the distribution during calibration This could result in an increasing measurement uncertainty When calibration has become invalid for any reason or the calibration data has changed you can restore the most recent calibration that was valid gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Restore Calibration Settings menu item The R amp S FSH restores the calibration data and the frequency settings that were active BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 153 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements 6 1 1 2 Calibration Methods The available calibration methods depend on whether you perform scalar or vector measurements In addition calibration for reflection measurements is available only for models with an VSWR bridge Scalar measurements scalar measurements provide normalization of transmission and reflection only Normalization is a simple but effective way to calibrate the measurement using one calibration standard only The correction data is deducted from this measurement As only one calibration standard is
33. you can change the scale of the map to get a more detailed view or a more general overview gt Press the Zoom In softkey to decrease the scale of the map gt Press the Zoom Out softkey to increase the scale of the map 5 2 2 2 Aligning the Map The R amp S FSH provides several tools to align the map This is useful if you want your current location to be in the center of the display or if you have moved out of the visible map area Manual alignment gt Use the cursor keys to move the map in a particular direction You can move the maps until you reach the borders of the downloaded content Note that the borders of the maps might be different for different scales Automatic alignment For most automatic map alignment functions you have to establish a GPS connection gt Press the GPS Position softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains various functions to control and work with GPS data Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 140 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 SSS EES Working with Maps In this menu you can select from the following automatic alignment functions e Go To Current Position Moves your current position to the center of the display once e Trace Current Position Keeps your current position in the center of the display even if you move e Go To Triangulation Position Moves the location of the triangulation result to the center of the display 5 2 2 3 Selecting Color
34. 0 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Slot Number menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the slot gt Enter the number of the slot you want to analyze In the code domain power result display the numerical results that the R amp S FSH displays belong to one code channel only By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for the first code channel which is always the pilot channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 233 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Code Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the code channel gt Enter a number between 0 and 511 to select a particular code channel If you select a code that is part of a channel made up of more than one code results correspond to the channel not the one code 9 4 4 4 Changing the Code Power By default the application displays the absolute power of all code channels Alternatively you can display the power relative to the P CPICH gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey Select the Relative to CPICH menu item All power display now relate to the pilot channel 9 4 4 5 Performing Fast Measurements Faster measurements are possible if you skip the channel search during the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt
35. 1 MHz a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak detector After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the optimal reference level Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 44 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Chan BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered span 1 2 x channel bandwidth This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 KHz 3 1 2 4 Changing the Span Usually the soan the R amp S FSH sets yields optimal results But sometimes you also need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components that you need to include in the measurement Therefore you can adjust the span to up to ten times the channel bandwidth and hence still be able to see the spectrum outside the measurement channel gt Press the SPAN key In the default configuration Auto Span is active The R amp S FSH automatically sets the optimal span for the channel power measurement gt Press the
36. 17 10 gt Press the TRACE key Ref 10 0 dBm RBW 300 kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Art 30 dB VBW 300 kHz Trig Free Run Detect Max Peak_ gt Press the Trace Memory softkey Press the Show softkey gt Press the Trace Math softkey gt Select the Trace Memory or Memory Trace menu item The R amp S FSH calculates and shows the resulting trace Center 1 GHz Nant are Trigger SWP Time Sweep de gt To turn off trace mathematics select the Off menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 106 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 Using Markers The spectrum analyzer mode provides marker and deltamarker functionality In addition you can use several marker functions 3 2 6 1 Using Markers and Deltamarkers The R amp S FSH has six markers five of which can be used as either markers or delta markers The markers cannot leave the trace and indicate the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point they are positioned on The horizontal position of a marker is shown by a vertical line which extends from the top to the bottom of the measurement diagram The marker list above the diagram area shows the exact coordinates of all markers in use The position of a delta marker is indicated by a dashed line to distinguish it from a normal marker The delta marker level is always a relative to the main marker level and so the delta marker level unit i
37. 20 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Clear Write s Arc 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run Detect AMS between signal parts that are above the noise floor and the noise floor which is drawn in mae a E a To show details of the noise floor and exclude the peak levels you have to lower the spectrogram reference level until it is just Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz above the noise floor Mode Settings m Spectrog The R amp S FSH will then display the signal parts that are above the reference level in only one color which is the color at the upper border of the color map 3 1 10 4 Recording a Spectrogram You can save the data of the spectrogram for documentation or for further analysis of the recorded data gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Save Spectrogram softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box Save Spectrogram 26 04 10 14 30 to save the current spectrogram ERE Name Date_ Time D Cable Models gt Enter the name of the spectrogram amp ew S D Limit Lines with the alphanumeric keys m Screen Shots D Standards D Transducers i By default the R amp S FSH saves Spectrogram002 9pm ei 10 03 2010 16 03 the spectrogram as ER an 10 03 2010 16 32 S SpectrogramD0b spm 518 kB 10 03 2010 163 Spectrogram with ascending S pectrogramb06 spm 5418 kB 10703 23010 16 58 numbers gt Press the Save softkey to store the spectrogram So regen Show SD Card SpectrogramO0 1 Free 9 MB Now t
38. 3 Deleting RE EE 30 1 9 Updating the Firmware AA 31 1 10 Installing Firmware Options ccccceeeesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeoeesnseeeeeseeooensneeeeees 31 2 Working with the Measurement Wizard ccccescceeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 32 2 1 1 Preparing the Meaeurement 33 2 1 2 Using the Measurement Ward 36 Alo TEE e Le MoS E 41 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode cccscccccessecsenseseesseeeeseeseeseesenseeseneees 42 3 1 Performing Spectrum Measurements cccccceeeseeseeseeeeeesseeeeesseeseenseeseeenseeseensenees 42 3 1 1 Measuring Basic Signal Characteristics ooooooccccccnnnnnconccononnconcnnnnnnconcnnnnancnncnonanncinnnos 42 3 1 2 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals 43 A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 1 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 3 1 3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwicth 47 3 1 4 Power Measurements on TDMA SigNalS ooooonncnncccnncncnnccnnnocconcnonnnnconcnnnnanconononanacinnnos 51 3 1 5 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio AC 54 3 1 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission MASK oooooncccccccnnonconcconnnnconcnnnnancnncnnnnancnncnonanncinnnos 63 3 1 7 Measuring the Harmonic DIStortion ccoooccoccccnnnnocconnncononnnnononnnnnonanonconancnnononcannnnos 67 3 1 8 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth 69 3 1 9 Measuring Spurious EMISSIONS EE 71 3 1 10 Working with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 KI 74 gT
39. 7 Saving Events The R amp S FSH provides functionality that automatically saves measurement information if a certain situation or event occurs Saving events is possible in all operating modes gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Save on Event menu item gt Select On from the Save on Event dropdown menu The R amp S FSH turns on automatic event recognition You can select one of several events that trigger the storage of measurement data Data types You can select several data types to save when an event occurs e A screenshot of the sweep that contains the event png or jpg file e Adataset of the sweep that contains the event set file e The GPS coordinates of the location where the event happens gpx file a GPS receiver and option R amp S FSH K16 is required for this gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Screen Capture Dataset or Capture GPX menu item and turn it on or off If on the corresponding information is included in the saved data Timing of the data capture Note that the R amp S FSH evaluates the measured data after a sweep is done and thus detects and saves an event only after a sweep has been completed Event types To use the Save on Event functionality you have to select an event type that triggers the capture of the selected data The R amp S FSH supports several event types
40. Format You can select several measurement formats for each measurement The measurement format selects the way the results are displayed e Magnitude dB Mag This is the default format It shows the magnitude of the results in dB e SWR The VSWR shows the standing wave ratio in a cartesian diagram The VSWR is the ratio of the maximum voltage and the minimum voltage that occur in an electrical transmission line The VSWR format is available for DTF and reflection measurements e Reflection Coeffcient Shows the reflection coefficient of the DUT The reflection coefficient is the ratio of the amplitude of a reflected wave and that of the incidental wave that occur in an electrical transmission line e Cable Loss The cable loss measurement evaluates the power attenuation of a cable over a specified frequency range in dB The amount of power that gets absorbed depends on the frequency and the length of the cable The cable loss format is available for reflection measurements The following pictures show the results of a reflection measurement in Magnitude format left side and VSWR format right side 170970 13 18 00M Bet 00d8 BW 10 kHz i F a Att 5 di TG Power 10 dBm 44626564 GHz Center 4 48 GHz Matias to bi Fault Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 186 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 AAA AAA AAA AAA Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 5 Calibrating Measurements To get
41. Mathematics 177 6 5 Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 oooccccocccncccconccanncocononannnncnnnnannnrnnnnnnnnnrrnnannnnnrnnnnannnns 178 6 5 1 Calibrating Measurements nn00000nnnnnnonnennnnnnnnosrnnnnnnnnrnennnnrrrressnnnnrrrressnennne 179 6 5 2 Performing Measurements oo oooccccccoccnccccncnnconoconcnnnncnnononcnnconanononnnnrnnonnnnnncnnaneness 179 So Le gt eo O O adaneanhaoenenitent 181 7 Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 0oooooccoocccoocccoocccooncononnnnnanos 182 7 1 Performing Cable and Antenna Measurementts sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenennes 184 7 1 1 Reflection Measurements ooccccccconnccnncnonnnccnncnonanccnncnnnnnccnnnnonnnrrnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrinrrnnnnnncess 184 7 1 2 Distance to Fault Measurements nnne 185 7 1 3 Spectrum MeasureMentS ooooccccnccccnonoonncnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnnnanrrnnnnrrnnnnnaneneninns 185 H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 3 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 7 1 4 Selecting the Measurement Format 186 TAS Calibrating MCASUreMeC INS E 187 7 2 Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenseeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeons 188 7 2 1 selecting the Gable MOC EE 188 72 2 Contliguring the Tell E EE 191 7 2 3 Configuring the Vertical Avis 193 7 3 Analyzing Measurement ReSUItS cccccsssseecseesseeeeenseeeeenseeeeenseeeeesseesoeaseesoensees 195 Sl Working with RE E 195 fa 2 ICING Wat EE 195 73 5 Using Display and
42. Measurements Defining absolute limits gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Limit Absolute menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to define the absolute limits for each adjacent channel gt The procedure of defining absolute limits is analogous to that of defining relative limits Performing a limit check gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Check Channel Limits menu item The R amp S FSH automatically ACh Elm a Upper Adj Chu Lower ee Ad 0 7 dB Al performs limit checks i The results of the limit check are displayed in the table above the trace If a result fails the limit check it turns red and has a star in front of its power level ae eS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 62 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement is a method to detect spurious emissions or intermodulation products of a signal When performing a SEM measurement the R amp S FSH checks the signal against a spectral mask to see whether the signal complies with a specific standard or not Therefore the R amp S FSH provides predefined spectrum emission masks for various telecomunications standards However you can define your own spectral masks with the R amp S FSH4View software to perform measuremenis in frequency ranges other than the predefined ones To learn how t
43. Power Power level of the transmission channel e Tx Bandwidth Bandwidth of the transmission channel e PASS FAIL information If the signal is within the limits of the spectral mask the R amp S FSH shows bss if not it shows SAA e Range HZ Frequency range The first number is the start frequency the second number the stop frequency of each defined frequency range The character following the number indicates the unit k kHz M MHz G GHz e RBW HZ Resolution bandwidth the corresponding frequency range is measured with e Peak Number of the peak marker Px e Freq Hz Frequency of the peak level that has been measured in each frequency range Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 65 Performing Spectrum Measurements e Power Abs Absolute peak power in the corresponding frequency range e Power Rel Relative peak power in relation to the channel power of the reference channel e ALimit Minimum distance from the limit line to the trace in the corresponding frequency range Negative values or a zero indicate a passed SEM limit check positive values indicate a violation of the limit check R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 7 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion The Harmonic Distortion measurement is an easy way to identify the harmonics of a DUT In addition to the graphic display of the harmonics this measurement mode also calculates the Total Harmonic Distortion THD a
44. Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Search Off menu item The R amp S FSH stops performing a channel search If the channel search is off measurements are faster However some results like the Composite EVM can not be calculated if the channels are not known Thus turning the channel search off is useful if you are interested in signal powers only The channel search is always on for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Channel Table result displays All other result displays work both ways e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 234 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K46 you can perform measurements on downlink CDMA2000 signals according to the 3GPP2 standard with your R amp S FSH You can expand the functionality by adding the R amp S FSH K46E firmware application This application performs code domain power measurements on downlink CDMA2000 signals according to the standard gt Press the MODE key Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the CDMA2000 BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis When starting a measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts approximately 27 ms or about 1 Sync Frame Period If the instrument is in a triggered mode external or GPS trigger it searches for the start of the PN code
45. R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay gt Adjust the trigger delay until the burst is visible inside the vertical lines that show the measurement range BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 53 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR The Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR measurement is a method to measure the power over more than one transmission channel and also evaluate the power of the adjacent or alternate channels of the transmission channel The ACLR performs measurements according to a specific channel configuration e g a particular radio communications standard gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the ACLR menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the adjacent channel leakage ratio In principle the ACLR measurement works like the channel power measurement in that it determines the spectrum within the channel using a resolution bandwidth that is small compared to the channel bandwidth In addition to the channel bandwidth the ACLR measurement is also defined by the channel spacing the bandwidth of adjacent channels and the adjacent channel spacing The R amp S FSH supports measurements on up to 12 carrier channels and 12 adjacent channels to either side of the carrier When measuring more than one carrier or adjacent chann
46. RON Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 22 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets The folder structure shows all available data storage devices Possible storage devices are the internal memory of the R amp S FSH an SD card or a memory stick The default storage device depends on which devices are connected to the R amp S FSH e f an SD card is connected datasets are always stored there first lf a memory stick is connected datasets are stored there only if no SD card is connected e The internal memory is used only if neither SD card or memory stick are connected The internal memory provides approximately 20 MB of data therefore the number of datasets you save on the R amp S FSH is limited Each dataset needs about 100 kB of memory but this value can vary If you are using an external storage device the number of datasets you can save is limited only by the size of the storage device The R amp S FSH shows the remaining memory on the storage device in the dialog box gt Select the storage device you want to save the data to gt Select the folder you want to save the data to gt Entera file name in the corresponding input field The default file name for datasets is Dataset set with a new number in ascending order for each new dataset The file extension for datasets is set If you enter another name the R amp S FSH uses that name and assigns a new number to the file name if you save
47. Select the Tx Channels menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the number of transmission channels gt Enter the number of transmission channels you need for the measurement Setting the number of adjacent channels gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Adj Channels menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the number of adjacent channels gt Enter the number of adjacent alternate channels you need for the measurement The borders of Tx channels are displayed red in the trace diagram the borders of adjacent and alternate channels are displayed green BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 57 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Setting the channel bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement gt Press the MEAS key TX ACP Channel Bandwidth x gt Press the Channel BW softkey Adj us Ab 14kH2 The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box E cea to specify the channel bandwidth Ge o for all channels Alte 14 kHz Alt 14kHz gt Select the channel you want to ae Ice change the bandwidth for Arte D gt Activate the input by pressing the ENTER key gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered according to the criteria desribed above
48. Shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth For more information see Setting the Resolution Bandwidth on page 94 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 227 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals Trace mode Shows the currently selected trace mode Clear Write and Max Hold are available for 3GPP measurements For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 9 4 2 2 Diagram Header The diagram header shows the results for individual code channels Code channel Shows the number of the code channel the results are displayed for For more information see Selecting the Slot and Code Channel on page 233 Slot Shows the slot number For more information see Selecting the Slot and Code Channel on page 233 Symbol rate Shows the symbol rate of the currently selected code channel Channel power Shows the power of the complete signal Power Shows the power of the currently selected code channel The result is either in absolute values or relative to the P CPICH channel If more than one code belongs to a channel the R amp S FSH shows the power of the complete channel For more information see Changing the Code Power on page 234 Composite EVM Shows the EVM of the complete signal Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 228 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 2 3 Diagram Area The Code Domain Power result display co
49. The Burst Power result display shows the power of the signal over a single 1xEV DO frame 26 66 ms This measurement is necessary to check if the power and timing of the bursted signals meets the requirements of the standard In order to capture a complete frame you can apply a trigger from a GPS device or another external trigger O eT Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 250 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer ee Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 4 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 6 4 1 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 KHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected 9 6 4 2 Changing the PN Offset The standard uses the PN Offset to distinguish between base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multiples of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Each signal is spread with a Walsh code of a length of 6
50. The number of bits that carry the training sequence depend on the modulation They are transmitted in the center of the GSM burst The standard defines eight training sequences numbered 0 to 7 The R amp S FSH is able to determine the training sequence in a burst automatically Alternatively you can select the training sequence manually Manual selection of the training sequence may become necessary if two base stations operate on the same frequency for example In that case you can select to measure one base station rather than the other gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select either the TSC Manual or TSC Auto menu item In case you have selected the Manual menu item the R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a particular training sequence 9 3 3 2 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 221 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K44 you can perform measurements on WCDMA signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with
51. Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 7 Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 Equipped with firmware option R amp S FSH K41 order no 1304 5612 02 you can perform distance to fault measurements with your R amp S FSH The distance to fault DTF mode provides functionality to measure cables for mechanical defects in the system that cause a deterioration of the transmission quality The figure below shows some typical defects in a transmission system including defects on the cable x Antenna Segments Hell Corrosion Broken Amplifier If Signal Flow gt EE 1 K Broken K Partial Loose N Cable Cable Reflections Connector The R amp S FSH provides the necessary functionality to test the system equipment for its characteristics and identify faults when it is being installed or maintained e Reflection Measurements on page 184 e Distance to Fault Measurements on page 185 e Spectrum Measurements on page 185 Test setup A typical test setup to test cables and antennas includes the R amp S FSH an RF cable e g R amp S FSH Z320 order no 1309 6600 00 a calibration standard R amp S FSH Z28 or R amp S FSH Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 and the cable under test Cable and antenna tests also require a tracking generator and VSWR bridge The tracking generator transmits a reference signal through the internal VSWR bridge to the test port gt Connect the RF cable to the RF input port 1 or 2
52. WCDMA TD SCDMA and LTE FDD TDD Man 0 dB Auto Low Noise GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO Preamp On Preamp Off Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep 3GPP WCDMA TD SCDMA and LTE FDD TDD ll a a GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO eelere Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 5 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces 3GPP WCDMA and LTE Spectrum Overview and Isotropic Antenna only Clear Write Memory Max Hold GSM CDMA2000 and 1xEV DO Spectrum Overview only Max Hold Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold 3GPP WCDMA BTS Scanner only m kel bel en kel Fe Clear Write Average 10 Max Hold TD SCDMA Sync ID only P kel bel en kel Fe Clear Write R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 11 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Basically it is possible to measure and analyze RF signals either in the time domain or the frequency domain Measurements in the time domain show signal variations over time You can perform these with an oscilloscope for example Measurements in the frequency domain show the frequency components of a signal To perform measurements in the frequency domain you can use a spectrum analyzer Both mode
53. a full calibration but yields pretty accurate results nonetheless In addition normalization needs one calibration standard only and therefore is faster than a full calibration gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Normalize Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Write Transmission Rev Port 1 2 Art 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample menu item gt Perform normalization For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of the scalar transmission Center 2 08 GH Span 50MH measurement on the filter Sa WE z Format y e e m Calibrate Display You can change the measurement configuration e g select another sweep time or detector without affecting the accuracy of the measurement except the frequency parameters and attenuation BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 159 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements 6 2 2 Measuring the Reflection The example included here is based on a reflection measurement of the same two port filter used for the transmission measurement The filter has a center frequency of 2060 MHz and a bandwidth of about 11 MHz You can skip the preset scalar measurement selection and frequency settings if you have already set up the R amp S FSH for the measurement You can also skip the calibration if you have performed the appropriate calibration already Prese
54. a particular point in time and display the corresponding spectrum you can use two time lines When entering the playback mode the R amp S FSH displays two time lines in the spectrogram The first time line T1 corresponds to an absolute time value the second T2 is a time relative to the first time line Both time lines are positioned on the most recent spectrogram line at Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz Meas Spectrogram m SET TREE ele the top of the result display Mode Settings Upd Spectrogram Spectrog You can now select a specific spectrogram frame that is in the memory of the R amp S FSH Press the Select Time Line softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the position of the first time line T1 BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 80 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements gt Position the time line by entering a number or moving it with the rotary knob Entering O sets the time line marker on the most recent frame The maximum value that you can enter is 1024 the maximum number of frames the R amp S FSH can store in its memory Note that not all frames are visible on the screen If a frame is part of the history outside the visible area the time line is also not visible and you have to scroll through the spectrogram to be able to see it again The upper window will display the spectrum of the frame at the time line position By moving the time line you c
55. amp S FSH includes one frame in the signal analysis The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements based on the composite signal of one slot as well as measurements based on the special parts of the slot It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input 9 7 1 The Result Summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table hes Center 1 00001 GHE Rel Level 310 dim Bweeg Com EN Chanset Ret Offset 0 0 dp Sw Fat 0 Bamd E Ate 0 0 dE Slot Nember Trani Preamp On Max Users 16 Ser Code Aube Global Results 4 SYNC NOT FOUND AF Channel Power 1044 dEm PCCPCH Symbol EVM aoe Z nms Slot 0 Carrier Freg Error He Absolute Power Rel to RF Chan Piw Data Power aos dim aos S Data 1 Power dEm dB Dita 2 Power dEm del Midamble Power es dim dB Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 252 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization O
56. and display the power flux density For example to compensate for the cable loss between the transducer and the RF input the R amp S FSH can use two transducers at the same time One of them must have the unit dB however Le it must correspond to one loss or gain value gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Transducer softkey Transducer factor availability Transducer factors are not available for measurements with the tracking generator or the Power Sensors The Transducer softkey is therefore inactive You can select two transducer factors a primary transducer and a secondary transducer If a transducer factor is active the menu item has an X in front of it Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 121 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using Transducer Factors gt Select the Select Primary Transducer menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the transducer factor gt Select the transducer factor you need gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH shows the name of the active transducer on the display An example would be the transducer factor of the R amp S HL223 antenna that is defined between 200 MHz and 1300 MHz The R amp S FSH therefore displays the noise in this frequency range as a function of frequency incremented by the transducer factor Outside the transducer range the R amp S FSH sets the transducer factor at zero Le measurements in this range do not yie
57. bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence In its default state the video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth and is the same as the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH adjusts the video bandwidth accordingly The effects of the video bandwidth on measurements are as follows e if you are performing measurements on modulated signals the video bandwidth must be sufficiently large so that significant modulation components are not rejected 2 RBW e if you want to keep signals free of noise you should select the smallest video bandwidth possible lt 0 1 x RBW e if you are performing measurements on pulsed signals the video bandwidth should be at least three times greater than the resolution bandwidth so that the pulse edges are not distorted Like the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth has an effect on sweep speed Before each measurement the video filter has to settle Press the BW key gt Press the Manual VBW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the video bandwidth gt Enter the video bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH uses the video bandwidth you have entered for the measurement If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the VBW hardware setting VBW 300 kHz gt Press the Auto VBW softkey to again couple the video bandwidth to the RBW Operating Manual 1173
58. channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log10 channel bandwidth 3 1 5 4 Displaying Absolute and Relative Results You can set up the result display to either show the absolute power of the adjacent channels or the power relative to one of the transmission channels gt Press the MEAS key Press the Power Display softkey gt Select either the Absolute menu item to display the absolute results or the Relative menu item to display the power relative to one of the transmission channels 3 1 5 5 Selecting the Reference Channel When determining relative power values for the adjacent channels you can set a specific transmission channel as the reference channel gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the ACLR Ref Setting menu item The R amp S FSH opens a another submenu to select the reference channel gt Select the method of determining the reference channel The following methods are available Tx Channel Select a specific transmission channel by entering its number as the reference Min Power Tx Channel The channel with the lowest power level is the reference channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 60 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Max Power Tx Channel The channel with the highest power level is the reference channe
59. channels the R amp S FSH measures the power level The 3GPP option provides several result displays to display the measurement results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 222 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table Availability of measurement results Note that some results and support of HSDPA and HSPA channels are available only with option R amp S FSH K44E For more information see the data sheet Win Center 21672 GHz Rei Level 210 dm Swoop Cont VW Chanel Bei D ser op dp Antenna Div None Band aan Att d P CPICH Slot 8 Tras Preamp On Ch Search On Ser Code Date AF Channel Powar F 55 00 dom Active Chansela d Carrior Heg Error ma HE Ser Code Fomnd ser 0 1 0 Offset KA Peak CDE 15 kage 2278 d Gain imbalance KE Avg RODE 64 04M ons dB Composite EVM H P P CPICH 15 kaps Ges 0 P CCPCH 15 kapa Code 1 Power p146 dBm Power Aba 6539 d m Ecla A Ap de Bele 8 39 di Symbel EWA rms EK Symbol EWM rma 200 P SCH Power Abs 6138 d m e feu Display Le 5 Adi ACH Power Abaj 6170 d m Disslay Current t
60. composite EVM of each time slot in Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 262 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer eege Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 6 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 7 6 1 Using the Channel Search The R amp S FSH K48E supports the analysis of the code domain power of all channels Thus it needs to detect active and inactive channels in the code domain automatically For a quick and basic analysis of the signal you can turn off the channel search The R amp S FSH in that case evaluates several basic parameters in the Result Summary If you turn the channel search on the l Q data is also analyzed in the code domain Thus the measurement consumes slightly more time but yields more results gt Press the MEAS key Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Search On Normal menu item The R amp S FSH turns the channel search on Note that the R amp S FSH automatically turns on the channel search when you are using the Code Domain Power result display or the Code Domain Channel Table Measurements without channel search Measurements without channel search are only possible for result displays that do not analyze the code domain In the Result Summary only results that do not require analysis in the code domain are displayed 9 7 6 2 Specifying the Scrambling Code To demodulate a 3GPP signal you have to kn
61. correctly e When measurements are made on sine signals the level display does not depend on the detector However if you use the RMS detector or the sample detector ensure that the span is not too great Otherwise the displayed levels of sine signals may be lower than their true value BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 310 R amp S FSH Index Index O cee o 247 e o A 118 carrier frequency error EE 251 EENEG geed geg 244 eee ene Oe ene ee eee erent reer he nema reer 250 A PPP E A EE AEEA A E 218 FOROR O oa E gata tauetounael 251 BE SCG a 273 Siet 249 GA Le E 52 EES HEH swrsecsssncte axis nisasseecieasasscnsieecineu sealed eects 248 BUIST ele EE 220 19 eer ere tee een dio 250 Cable length E 192 AA E E A E A AT 249 Cable measurement 6 0B bandwidths sssini ar EAR 204 A E 182 ACLR GDE une E 188 absolute resul iii 60 Cable lesion 182 adjacent e 57 ET ele 8 NEE 152 179 187 channel bandwidth EE 58 H orane E e E OE 152 channel epachmg 58 CGalbrationkt 152 156 187 MURR Me gio ce ERE yn oa 61 Calibration method 154 measurement Configuraion 57 Calibration procecdure 155 measurement settnge 55 Carrier frequency error Wielt VE O Misas 60 PEV DO triste ete eae 251 reference channel 60 CONA2D00O senen n tat meee emer eerste 245 relative E H 60 A rn A 221 o A A T ET EEA AETA AIE T A 57 Meco 278 transmission Channel eococonoonininioicicnccnicaccanicicccnnicinna 57 TEE SODA oro E E a 266 Adjacent channel egsen
62. de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1175 6590 17 02 Page ii R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante referente a la situaci n y posici n de funcionamient R amp S FSH est protegido contra roci n y polvo modo de protecci n IP 51 Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde 4 Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo modo de protecci n IP 2X grado de suciedad 2 categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 4600 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 12000 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a segurida
63. either Short Normal or Long e Ashort measurement time provides stable and accurate results for stationary sine signals with high levels gt 40 dBm It is also appropriate for measurements that require a high repition rate e Anormal measurement time increases the stability of results for signals with low levels or modulated signals e Along measurement time is appropriate for signals with very low power levels lt 50 dBm To eliminate noise and the effects of noise on the measurement effectively use the R amp S FSH Z1 power sensor gt Press the Meas Time softkey gt Select the measurement time most suitable for your test setup Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 128 R amp S FSH Power Sensors Using a Power Sensor Taking additional loss or gain into account At high powers that cause the power sensor maximum input level to be exceeded or at very low levels that are below the R amp S FSH minimum sensitivity the R amp S FSH can take additional loss or gain between the DUT and the power sensor into account These are defined in terms of an offset in dB relative to the measured level A positive offset corresponds to a loss and a negative offset to a gain The R amp S FSH shows the current offset in the diagram header gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The value entry box for the reference offset opens gt Enter the required offset The offset is taken into account in the power o
64. for these models is done by a second local oscillator The frequency of the local oscillator determines the input frequency at which the spectrum analyzer performs measurements fin flo fir The first mixer produces the sum frequency fio fin image frequency fimage as well as the difference frequency fo fin The image frequency is rejected by the bandpass at the IF so that it does not interfere with the subsequent frequency conversions Input frequency range Hz Input Intermediate Local Image frequency frequency oscillator frequency fin fr flo fimage Frequency Figure 11 3 Mixing process Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 307 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The first local oscillator is tuned with a sawtooth which simultaneously acts as the x deflection voltage for the display In practice synthesizer technology is used to generate the frequency of the first local oscillator and for a digital display The instantaneous sawtooth voltage therefore determines the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer The bandwidth of the IF filter at the IF determines the bandwidth that is used for measurements Pure sine signals are passed by the IF filter characteristics This means that signals closer together than the bandwidth of the IF filter cannot be resolved This is why the bandwidth of the IF filter in a soectrum analyzer is referred to as the
65. gt Connect the test cable to the RF cable Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 182 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SSDS AAA AAA AAN ATA AAA Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 gt For measurement on DUTs that need an external voltage supply e g power amplifiers you can connect the supply voltage from a suitable AC power supply to the BIAS Port 1 or use the internal bias By default the R amp S FSH is in spectrum analyzer mode after you have turned it on To switch to the DIF mode from another operating mode proceed as follows gt Press the MODE key Press the Distance to Fault softkey The R amp S FSH starts the DIF mode By default the R amp S FSH performs measurements on port 1 It however also supports measurements on port 2 but you have to configure those first Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the DTF Refl Measurement Port menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select either Port 1 or Port 2 Screen layout of the cable and antenna analyzer 17 08 10 13 15 Trig Free Run TG Power 10 dBm 130 0 49 0 SA A 70 0 8 0 30 0 Start om ee 20 m renter 1 18053 GHz Span 238087 GHz as KL LP OTF List Cable foes Cable model Hardware settings Marker information Status line S matrix Calibration status Measurement format Trace window Marker blue line Cable length information Cable frequency information Cable test softke
66. in the vicinity of the PN offset you have entered If you are using the automatic PN Offset the R amp S FSH performs a full search for the PN offset and reports the PN found In a free run situation the R amp S FSH searches for the start of the PN sequence over the entire signal length The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements over one PCG power control group as well as measurements on specific channels It then shows the results in one of three formats e tabular form in the Result Summary display e scrollable table form in the Code Domain Channel Table or e graphical form in the Code Domain Power result display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or with an optional GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 235 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table d E 1 01 11 11 27 ot 21 Center 1 93 GHz Rel Level 200 dBm Sweep Coat W Channel 0 Ref Ofteet O08 dE Trigger Free Run Band cdmazk 1900 Att E Base SF 13 Preamp of PN Offset Aut
67. incendios y o lesiones graves con possible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o baterias no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y baterias deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio 1175 6590 17 02 Page v R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad Las celdas o baterias no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Mantener bater as y celdas fuera del alcance de los ni os En caso de ingesti n de una celda o bater a avisar inmediatamente a un m dico Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej l
68. item for manual selection of the RF attenuation The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the RF attenuation You can set the attenuation from O dB to 40 dB in 5 dB steps To indicate a manual attenuation the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the Att hardware setting Att 10 dB BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 92 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Se Ee EE Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 6 Using the Preamplifier To increase the input sensitivity the R amp S FSH provides an integrated 20 dB preamplifier after the input mixer In the default state of the R amp S FSH the preamplifer is turned off If you want to measure signals with low powers you can turn it on gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select either the Preamp On or Preamp Off menu item The R amp S FSH turns the preamplifier on and off 3 2 2 7 Setting the Input Impedance In the default state the input impedance is 50 Q The R amp S FSH can also handle 75 Q systems The R amp S FSH does not select a 75 Q RF input per se Instead it selects a 75 Q matching pad connected at the RF input The 50 75 Q matching pad R amp S RAZ is recommended for 75 Q matching see recommended accessories The R amp S FSH automatically considers the conversion factor when a value of 75 Q is set Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select the impedance you need You can also
69. its entire frequency range gt Press the Last Span softkey The R amp S FSH restores the span that you have set just before displaying the entire frequency range Time domain measurements You can also activate time domain measurements without having to enter the value manually When measuring in the time domain the span is O Hz In that state the R amp S FSH measures the signal at the current center frequency only Instead of displaying the spectrum the R amp S FSH shows the signal power over a certain time period The horizontal axis becomes the time axis The display always starts at 0 s and stops after the currently set sweep time gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the Zero Span softkey The R amp S FSH sets a span of 0 Hz and performs the measurement in the time domain BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 88 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis All relevant settings to configure the vertical axis are available in the amplitude menu You can access it via the AMPT key 3 2 2 1 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is represented graphically by the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference level sets the input signal gain up to the display stage If the reference level is low the gain is high That means that even weak signals are displayed clearly If you are measuring strong signals you have to set a high reference
70. later on for example with the R amp S FSH4View software Note that datasets also contain calibration data if calibration has been performed Templates The R amp S FSH also supports various other types of datasets or templates Such templates mainly contain additional requirements for a particular measurement like limit lines or channel tables Creating and editing these templates is only possible with the functionality provided by the R amp S FSH4View software package Note that the file extension depends on the application of the template For example a template containing a channel table has the extension chntab For more information on working with templates refer to the documentation of the R amp S FSH4View software package Data synchronization The R amp S FSH4View features a data synchronization that matches the data available on the R amp S FSH and that on the computer with the R amp S FSH4View installation gt Press the Synchronization Control E button The software opens another dialog box to control synchronization By default the software synchronizes a selected set of data depending on the synchronization direction e Synchronization from PC to R amp S FSH lt lt Templates button Updates all files on the R amp S FSH that have been created or edited with the R amp S FSH4View software package cable models limit lines transducers channel tables etc Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 21 R
71. monitor the characteristics of a signal The horizontal axis shows the time the vertical axis shows the signal levels To perform a time domain measurement you have to set the span to zero manually BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 42 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals The channel power measurement selectively measures the power of modulated signals Unlike a power meter that performs measurements over its entire frequency range the channel power measurement measures the power of a specific transmission channel Other signals in the frequency spectrum don t show in the results When measuring the spectrum within a channel the R amp S FSH uses a resolution bandwidth that is small compared to the channel bandwidth It then determines the total power of the channel by integrating the results on the trace The R amp S FSH takes the following parameters into account e display mode absolute or relative e detector e resolution bandwidth That means that you can compare the result to the result that would have been obtained from a thermal power meter The small resolution bandwidth acts like a narrow Channel filter and so prevents out of channel emissions from affecting the result gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Channel Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the c
72. on page 222 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals on page 235 Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals on page 247 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals on page 252 Measurements on LTE Signals on page 267 Each option of the digital modulation analyzer comes with a result summary This result display summarizes the most relevant results that you will need for successful base station tests For some options there is also an extended version that features additional functionality like graphic results BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 206 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 1 General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Several settings and numerical results are available for all mobile radio standards supported by the digital modulation analyzer e General Settings in the Result Summary on page 207 e Trace Mode Selection on page 210 9 1 1 General Settings in the Result Summary The result summary includes some basic settings of the analyzer The contents are similar to those of the Hardware Settings in the spectrum analyzer Most of these settings are available for every application This chapter provides a reference for those general settings that are available for all applications of the digital modulation analyzer amp Center 870 MHz Ref Level 30 0 dBm Sweep Continuous Channel 1023 Ref Offset 0 0 dB Band cdma2k 800 Att 0 0 dB Preamp Off GPS Lat 48
73. or less than the sweep time gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Burst Length softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the burst length gt Enter the length of the burst you need The R amp S FSH performs the measurement over the time you have entered If the measurement time you have entered was greater than the sweep time the R amp S FSH sets a burst length equal to the sweep time To work with a greater burst length you have to increase the sweep time first The minimum burst length is the time corresponding to one trace pixel sweep time 631 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 52 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 4 3 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level Because the resolution bandwidths of the R amp S FSH are implemented digitally after the A D converter the signal level at the A D converter can be higher than the level indicated by the trace depending on the selected resolution bandwidth To prevent the A D converter from being overloaded the signal must be measured at the widest resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth with the peak detector The trace maximum then determines the best reference level To simplify operation and
74. rule of thumb it is recommended to set it to about 1 to 4 of the channel bandwidth You can select a larger resolution bandwidth if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard cdmaOne at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level For standard NADC IS136 this would not be not possible for example since the spectrum of the transmit signal penetrates into the adjacent channels and a too large resolution bandwidth causes a too low selection of the channel filter The adjacent channel power would thus be measured too high E Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 55 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements If the RBW is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto RBW function the RBW is calculated as follows RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The R amp S FSH then selects the maximum possible resolution bandwidth resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 e Setting the video bandwidth To obtain correct power measurements the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidt
75. set 11 File management options 12 Preview dataset button gt Set up the measurement set as you like by adding or removing datasets The editor also allows you to add comments to each measurement that is part of the measurement set You can also rename the measurement gt Select one of the datasets and click on the je button The R amp S FSH opens another dialog box Measurement cdma2k2G dif set Measurement Name Instructions Instruction Picture Browse Clear Hardware Settings BNC 1 Trigger Input z BNC 2 IF Qut NA Internal DC Bias Off Z Internal DC Bias Level Volt 12 y Set To default Calibration Settings Specific Calibration Factory Zi Ok Cancel In this dialog box you can see the name of the selected dataset define a name for the corresponding measurement include instructions verbal or graphical about performing the measurement define several hardware settings as described in the Quick Start Guide select a calibration method specific for that measurement You can add instructions for every measurement that you include in the set to avoid handling measurements incorrectly The R amp S FSH shows these instructions before the measurement starts Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 34 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA E AAA AA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA Installing Firmware Options lt is
76. situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or moderate injury indicates the possibility of incorrect operation which can result in damage to the product In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of tags in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 The R amp S FSH is protected against dripping water and dust IP degree 51 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schw
77. spectrogram reference level to a level near the maximum power level that has been measured first Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Reference Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the spectrogram reference level The reference level should be near the maximum level that has been measured while the spectrogram was running In the example the reference level should be at about 60 dBm gt Enter the reference level you need The R amp S FSH now shifts the reference level of the spectrogram to the value you have entered Note that the spectrogram reference level does not affect the spectrum result display as well as the spectrum reference level Amplitude menu does not affect the spectrogram In the screenshot the spectrum trace is therefore exactly the same as in the previous picture 3 01 04 10 16 16 MN The result however still does not Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Clear Wrie YB W Miz Trig Free Run Detect RMS show signal differences in detail The only thing that happened is that the colors have shifted in the example to yellow because the color that corresponds to the reference level has shifted from green to yellow All other colors that are part of the color scheme are still unused because the spectrogram level range is still the Pa same 150 dB Mode Settings PaVBsck S Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey
78. starts to play The squelch level is variable gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Squelch Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the squelch level gt Enter a squelch level in dBm as required The R amp S FSH displays the squelch level graphically in the power bar element of the user interface Defining the threshold of the audio signal The audio signal has a specific frequency that is coupled to a specific signal level the threshold As the signal you are receiving during a measurement becomes stronger or weaker the audio signal changes its frequency e When the signal becomes stronger the frequency of the audio signal gets higher e When the signal becomes weaker the frequency of the audio signal gets lower You can define the threshold of the base tone as necessary gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Threshold menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the threshold Enter a threshold level in dBm as required Note that it may be possible that the audio signal frequency becomes so high or low that it is no longer audible A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 144 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 AAA AAA A AAA A AAA Working with Maps Defining the gain of the audio signal The change of frequency of the audio signal is a constant change of frequency lt is either one octave per 20 dB or one octave per 40 dB gt Pres
79. testing of the antenna elements of a phase controlled antenna array relative to a reference antenna with a transmission measurement Press the MODE key Press the Network Analyzer softkey Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey vY YV vV yY Yy Select the Vector Voltmeter menu item The R amp S FSH starts the vector voltmeter mode It turns on the tracking generator and the zero span mode Screen layout of the vector voltmeter 110909 13 18 ie SWT 20 ms Trace Clear Write Trg Free Run Detect Sample d Ref 4 35 dB Ref 30 80 Canter 2 06 GHz Span ero Span 5 Mews Calibrate re Format Option Mode Result display Hardware settings Results magnitude Results phase Vector voltmeter softkey menu oak Go M Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 178 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 1 Calibrating Measurements To get the best and most accurate results you have to calibrate the measurement The reflection and transmission measurement of the vector voltmeter each have their own calibration procedures To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect one or more calibration standards at the reference plane The process of calibration including the selection of a calibration kit works like that for scalar or vector measurement For more information see Calibrating Measurements on page 152 6 5 2 Performing Measurements With t
80. that are part of the measurement set The sequence of measurements is as defined with R amp S FSH4View R amp S FSH shows a message box d 45deq Please connect ZVH Port 1 with antenna 45 The message box contains the information and instructions on how to prepare and perform the measurement that you have defined with the R amp S FSH4View software Make the necessary preparations like connecting the cable gt Press the Confirm softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 38 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA E AAA AA AA AAA AAA AAA AAA Installing Firmware Options The R amp S FSH performs the measurement as defined in the dataset and measurement set When finished it shows the measurement results and says Measurement Done Note that it is not possible to change any measurement parameters while using the measurement wizard Marker functionality and scaling parameters are however available _ Changing cable characteristics If necessary you can define different cable characteristics cable model and length after each individual measurement This is useful for example if you want to do the same measurements on different cables at one go This feature is available when you turn on Prompt User to Change Cable Settings in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software When this function is on the R amp S FSH asks you to select new cable characteristics during the preparation of a measur
81. the Allow Variable Number of Sequence Steps in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 36 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA EE Installing Firmware Options e Site Name Location of the measurement This field is available on the R amp S FSH only e Comments Comments about the measurement e g the external conditions during the measurement e GPS Position Shows the GPS position if you have connected a GPS receiver Pressing the ENTER key on this field results in an update of the GPS coordinates e Use Wizard Cable Settings Determines if you want to use the cable characteristics as defined in the measurement set or if you want to be able change cable characteristics on site Select Yes to use the predefined cable characteristics In That case the parameters below will be locked e Cable Model Cable model that you perform the measurement on You can define a cable model with the R amp S FSH4View software but can also change the cable model on short notice if necessary e Clear Cable Model Deactivates the currently active cable model e Cable Length Length of the cable that you perform the measurement on e Calibration Calibration method to use before the measurement starts This is a read only field the calibration method has to be defined with R amp S FSH4View You have to calibrate the R amp S FSH before you can begin with the measurement
82. the data sheet Sync Signal Power Shows the power of the synchronization signal For more information see Selecting the Synchronization Signal on page 278 OSTP Shows the OSTP of the signal RSRP 3GPP TS 36 214 Shows the Reference Signal Received Power RSRP The RSRP is the average power of the cell specific reference signals It is calculated over all subcarriers and the complete channel bandwidth Note that the R amp S FSH bases its calculation of the RSRP on the channel bandwidth you have selected for measurement not the channel bandwidth it actually receives AAA AAA A eet Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 269 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Cell Identity Grp ID Shows the cell identity cell group and cell ID the current results correspond to For more information see Selecting the Cell Identity on page 276 Cyclic Prefix Shows the cyclic prefix the current results correspond to For more information see Selecting the Cyclic Prefix on page 276 Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data SINR Shows the Signal to Interference and Noise ratio The SINR is the ratio of the signal power and the sum of interference and noise power RSSI 3GPP TS 36 214 Shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI The RSSI is the complete signal power of the channel that has been measured regardless of the origin of the signal RSRQ 3GPP TS 36 214 S
83. the data set the next time This function allows you to assign consecutive dataset file names without entering a new name every time you want to save a dataset You can enter the file name with the alphanumeric keypad Each key covers more than one character To get the character you want press the key in question the appropiate number of times Instead of entering a file name character by character you can also put aname together using the quick naming feature For more information see Quick Naming of Datasets on page 25 gt Press the Save softkey The R amp S FSH saves the dataset Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 23 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 1 1 Alternative Ways to Save Datasets The R amp S FSH provides alternative and more comfortable ways to save datasets Using the gy key You can configure the y key to take a screenshot as well as saving a dataset gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Dataset item and turn it on If on pressing the y key saves a dataset of the current measurement gt Select the Capture Mode item e Select Screen to capture only the screenshot e Select Dataset to capture only the dataset e Select Screen Dataset to capture both screenshot and dataset Pressing the HCOPY key saves the selected data of the current measurement Saving events You can configure the R amp S FSH to save a data
84. the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 KHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter UO Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 224 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals UO Imbalance Shows the IO Imbalance of the signal in This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Composite EVM Shows the Error Vector Magnitude in The EVM is defined as the ratio of the mean error power of the signal to the power of an ideal reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Active Channels Shows the number of active channels in the signal Scr Code Found Shows the number of the primary and secondary scrambling code regardless if it has been found automatically or entered manually Peak CDE 15 ksps Shows the Peak Code Domain Error of the signal in dB The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum code domain error power that occurs in the measurement The code domain error is the difference in power of the test s
85. the vertical position of the line gt Enter the level value you need The R amp S FSH positions the display line accordingly Alternatively you can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor keys H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 116 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 8 Using Limit Lines Limit lines help you to identify if a signal complies with certain level characteristics A limit line is made up out of two or more points that are connected to a line Each of the points that define the shape of the limit line consists of two coordinates One coordinate defines the horizontal position e g frequency the other one the vertical position With the R amp S FSH you can build limit lines that consist of up to 1000 points Values that define the horizontal characteristics of the limit line can be either absolute values e g frequency in MHz or relative values whose reference is the center of the measurement trace e g the center frequency Relative values are of advantage if you for example measure modulated output signals and you change the center frequency but need the limit line to remain the same Absolute limit lines have the file extension abslim while relative limit lines have the file extension rellim Values that define the vertical characteristsics are always level values in dB If the scaling of the vertical axis is currently a linear one units V or W
86. these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the attached EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required
87. to analyze The R amp S FSH adjusts the results accordingly The bar of the currently selected code channel is highlighted in red 9 7 6 8 Selecting the Phase Characteristics of the Code Channels The phase of the code channels is either fixed or arbitrary gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Fixed or the Arbitrary menu item In Fixed mode the phase of all code channels has to be the same In Arbitrary mode the phase of the code channels is allowed to rotate 9 7 6 9 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or pom gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected 9 7 6 10 Selecting the Unit for EVM Results EVM results are usually calculated either in or in dB gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either the or dB menu item The R amp S FSH shows the EVM in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 266 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 Measurements on LTE Signals O 9 8 1 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K50 and R amp S FS
88. to calculate the frequency spacing dashes are displayed instead of a value Upon entering a negative value the function turns into a n dB up function You can use an dB up function for example for measurements on notch filters gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the n dB Down menu item The R amp S FSH displays two temporary markers on the left and on the right of the reference marker M1 It also shows the bandwidth between the n dB down markers You can then adjust the distance of the temporary markers gt Press the Marker Function A Bet 20 0 dom RBW 300kHz SWT 20 ma Traca Clear Write F At 0 dB VEW 3 MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS softkey 1 GHz 571 dBm 9 048 ALF gt Select the n dB Down menu item 30 0 T The R amp S FSH opens an input field hu DT gt Enter a different distance in this ai case 6 dB at The R amp S FSH again shows the Ges temporary markers this time with 110 0 a broader bandwidth Canter GHz i Spar20 MHz Marker Marker Marker Function Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 114 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Demodulating Signals The R amp S FSH features an AM and FM demodulator to demodulate and monitor audio signals It demodulates the signal at the marker frequency You can listen to the demodulated signal with the internal soeaker or headphones that you can connect t
89. to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level It uses a resolution bandwidth of 3 MHz a video bandwidth of 3 MHz and the peak detector After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the ideal reference level 3 1 4 4 Using a Trigger Usually you will apply a trigger when measuring bursts If a trigger is active the R amp S FSH uses the video trigger for TDMA measurements by default The video trigger level is at 50 of the range of the vertical axis but is variable This means the R amp S FSH triggers a measurement if the rising edge of the burst exceeds this 50 line If the DUT features some sort of trigger equipment you can also use an external trigger to trigger measurements gt Connect the DUT trigger output to the R amp S FSH trigger input gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select either the External Rise or External Fall menu item rising or falling edge The R amp S FSH activates the trigger and shows the results of the measurement It may be that the burst is not completely visible on the display To correct that and make the whole burst visible you can set a trigger delay gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trigger Delay menu item The
90. use other matching pads e g R amp S RAM or R amp S FSH Z38 by activating transducer factors 3 2 2 8 Using Transducer Factors For more information see Using Transducer Factors Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 93 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 3 Setting Bandwidths The bandwidth menu contains all settings to set up filter bandwidths available in the R amp S FSH You can access it with the BW key 3 2 3 1 Setting the Resolution Bandwidth The resolution bandwidth in a spectrum analyzer determines the frequency resolution for frequency domain measurements and therefore determines how well it can separate adjacent frequencies The results as you see them on the display depend on the passband of a resolution filter The resolution bandwidth RBW has several effects on measurements e Tobe able to display two or more signals whose frequencies are close together separately you need a resolution filter whose bandwidth is small enough The frequency difference between two sinusoidal carriers can not be less than the selected resolution bandwidth if the carriers are to be resolved for example e The bandwidth of the resolution filter also affects the noise that is displayed by the R amp S FSH The smaller the bandwidth the less noisy the results are The rule is that if you increase or decrease the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the noise goes down or up by 5 dB If you change the bandwid
91. used the accuracy is lower than that of a full calibration available for vector measurements Vector measurements Vector measurements provide several calibration methods that correct the magnitude and the phase e Full 2 Port Both test ports are calibrated for both reflection and transmission measurements on either port or direction The calibration routine therefore requires the connection of the standards load open and short to both test ports and a through connection of the test ports The influences of the test setup and of the isolation between the test ports are thereby determined and taken into account in the subsequent measurement of the device under test While this method is the most time consuming during calibration it does provide the greatest accuracy for all measurements at both test ports without recalibration and is thus the most flexible e Full 2 Port High Accuracy Both test ports are calibrated like the full 2 port calibration In addition the load match is taken into account more accurately and correction data is applied in both directions forward and reverse This method provides even more accurate results than the normal full 2 port calibration but takes a while longer to finish e Reflection Port 1 2 Test port 1 or 2 is calibrated for reflection measurements on that port S11 or S22 The calibration routine requires the calibration standards open short and load to be connected one after another e
92. via the USB interface R amp S FSH Z1 power sensor port R amp S FSH Z18 power sensor port R amp S NRP Z11 USB R amp S NRP Z21 USB R amp S NRP Z22 USB R amp S NRP Z23 USB R amp S NRP Z24 USB R amp S NRP Z31 USB R amp S NRP Z51 USB R amp S NRP Z55 USB R amp S NRP Z56 USB R amp S NRP Z57 USB R amp S NRP Z81 USB R amp S NRP Z91 USB R amp S NRP Z92 USB R amp S NRP Z211 USB R amp S NRP Z221 USB If you are using one of the NRP power sensors you also need a passive USB adapter R amp S NRP 24 to connect the power sensor to the R amp S FSH For more information on the characteristics of the supported power sensors see e the datasheet of the R amp S FSH e the website for R amp S power sensors htto www2 rohde schwarz com en products test and measurement power volt meter NRPZ html The power sensor function turns the R amp S FSH into a wideband power meter It then always measures the power of the whole signal in the frequency range of the power sensor In most cases the signal shape has no effect on the measurement gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S FSH activates the mode for power measurements Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 124 R amp S FSH Power Sensors Using a Power Sensor Screen layout of the power meter mode 070110 1105 Se QE ret 0 0 dBm E offset 0 0 dB 2 MeasTime Normal viii GA LU LU i T E E NEE WE Connected pow
93. your R amp S FSH You can expand the functionality by adding the R amp S FSH K44E firmware application This application performs code domain power measurements on downlink WCDMA signals according to the standard gt Press the MODE key Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select 3GPP WCDMA BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis When starting a measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts 20 ms or 2 WCDMA frames From this information it gets all necessary information for further analysis of the WCDMA signal The R amp S FSH performs various measurements on a WCDMA slot in general as well as measurements on specific channels Measurements on slot level include the power level error vector magnitude EVM the code domain error and the frequency error To get sufficient measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the base station and the R amp S FSH via the EXT REF IN input In addition you can analyze the following channel types in more detail e Common Pilot Channel CPICH Note This channel is required by the channel configuration without it synchronization is not possible e Primary Common Control Physical Channel P CCPCH e Primary Synchronization Channel P SCH e Secondary Synchronization Channel S SCH For the CPICH and P CCPCH channels the R amp S FSH measures the power level and the Ec lo For the P SCH and S SCH
94. 11 The results of measurements with an Ref 30 0 dBm RBW 100kHz Sweep Cont Trace Clear Write s Att 0 dB Freamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB 73 17 Pr 5 isotropic antenna are based on data from the three axes of the antenna P CPICH dBm RF Channel dE m 65 69 57 16 60 35 Scrambling Code 411 0 411 0 47170 When performing measurements with an isotropic antenna the R amp S FSH performs a measurement on each of the three antenna axes and then averages the results to draw the trace Measurement speed will decrease because of the multiple measurements You can see the results for each antenna axis x y and z and for the channels that are part of the signal in a table above the diagram area Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Isotropic Antenna menu item For more information on isotropic antennas see Using Isotropic Antennas on page 83 While using the isotropic antenna result display you can set up the measurement as usual Limits A limit check tests the actual results against a set of predefined values to see if the measurement results are inside a specified boundary In the Limits result display the R amp S FSH shows the results of the limit check If the results are in the allowed range of values the limit check has passed The results are highlighted green If the results violate one of the limits Center 2 1672 GHz RefLevel 30 0 dBm Sweep Cont the limit check h
95. 23 15 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Configuring the Instrument Firmware update If the R amp S FSH is protected with a PIN a firmware update is only possible after you have entered the correct PIN In the initial state after delivery PIN protection is turned off So if you want to protect the R amp S FSH you have to turn it on manually gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the Instrument Settings softkey The R amp S FSH shows the Instrument Settings dialog box PIN Code Protection PIN Code Protection Off Master PIN Code OEM Master New User Master PIN Code gt Select the PIN Code Protection menu item gt Press ENTER The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a new PIN PIN Code Protection NewPIN Enter a 4 digit PIN The R amp S FSH opens an input field to confirm the PIN PIN Code Protection SEIT gt Enter the A dot PIN again If the PIN confirmation was successful the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message and activates PIN protection In that case you have to enter the PIN every time the R amp S FSH boots If the PIN confirmation was not successful the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding message and does not activate PIN protection In that case repeat the last steps You can change the PIN any time you want gt Select the New PIN Code menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a new PIN New PIN Code PIN Code gt Enter the new PIN gt Confir
96. 248 A o E A 54 AM modulation det 69 CIO EE 236 SNE giele TEE 43 code domain channel table 230 241 258 code domain POWOT cooccccccnnccnnccnoncnncononcnnonanos 227 239 256 Constellation diagraM oooooooccccconncccnccnnccnnnnnnacincnnnncincnnns 272 DIF MOUE E 183 TIS E e E 22 GS OLA CIN AA AA ET 139 Troi AAA 216 harmonic distortion occccocccccocncccononocononononononanononanoss 67 E T E E cine E EEEE A EE EE 268 measurement wizard cccooccccccncccccccnccnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanonnnns 36 occupied bandwidth ccccccccoocconnccnnnnonconnccnnnnnaconnnons 47 power meter eegene 125 power meter directional cccsssecneeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeees 130 Grille ECH el 41 resource allocatiONS ccooncccocnnococococonocononaroconarononor 274 Temo ME 75 spectrum EMISSION MASK 0oooccccconccncononccncnnnnccnnncnnanennnnanos 63 SOUMOUS Cms Mesas eE Ei 71 TOMA DOW scort 51 RRE E cenorias E AAE 253 time domain POWET ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeaesseeeeeeeeaes 261 Le AOU APR No 139 W active markerg 107 W CDMA secuelas 197 223 Wizard Set TE 33 EE 18 Search ln 111 Secondary Iranschucer rt eeeereeennsrrr rnnr ereenn 121 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 314 R amp S FSH Index Signal power E E DO enero ene A 249 COMA Z000 anno seo 237 o eee cca E loto decae 217 LTE e 269 TDS ODIA rasta N EN 254 A a sane ate ctienenisensaesecncnseeeee eee 224
97. 39 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA EE Installing Firmware Options Skip a measurement Skip Meas softkey Skips a single measurement and initiates the subsequent measurement Skipping individual measurements is possible when you turn on Allow to skip measurements and finish wizard sequence in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software End the measurement sequence Finish Wizard softkey Ends the measurement sequence and returns to the Measurement Wizard dialog box The results of the measurements you have already finished are kept in the memory of the R amp S FSH Ending the sequence is possible when you turn on Allow to skip measurements and finish wizard sequence in the Wizard Set Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software Abort the measurement sequence Cancel softkey Aborts the measurement and returns to the Measurement Wizard dialog box The results of the measurements you have already finished are lost When you have finished all measurements that are part of the measurement set the R amp S FSH asks you if you want to save the measurement results gt Press the Save Meas Results softkey The R amp S ZVH saves the results on the selected storage device Limited internal memory If you have to store the results on the internal memory make sure that it has enough space left to store them Else the results might get lost If the space is not enough you can
98. 4 or 128 and a pseudo random noise code PN code of a length of 215 Each BTS sector in the network is assigned a PN offset in steps of 64 chips If you use an external or GPS sync trigger you have to adjust the PN Offset according to the base station sector you are measuring gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the PN OFFSET menu gt Enter the PN Offset you need between 0 and 511 9 6 4 3 Synchronizing to a Base Station Using a GPS Receiver If you use a GPS receiver while performing measurements on a base station you can synchronize the sweep via the GPS receiver gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select GPS Sync menu item The R amp S FSH now synchronizes the sweep to the signal using the GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 251 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K48 you can perform measurements on downlink TD SCDMA signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the TD SCDMA BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts at least two frames When it has found the beginning of a frame the R
99. 48 52 57 64 SOMOS MISA EE 84 spectrum EMISSION MASK 0occcconccccconocccncnnnncononnnnncinonnncnnos 63 Radio COMIQUA MOM uses 242 A oe ee eee ae mee ene nana ee eee ere er ere tee 94 Eege EE 196 Record spectrogram ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 79 Reference channel 60 Reference Treouency E 113 Reference impedance cccooocccncccccnnooccnnncnnonannconncononanarennos 172 Reference level ooocccconcccococococococonococonacononacononcnconacononanoss 89 CHARCO TE 44 digital modular rara 208 directional power Sensor 133 occupied bandwidth cccccooooncconcccccnonccnnnccnonnancnnnnnnnos 49 OMS ti 91 209 so APP 128 EES II AA 78 TEMA DOWO irene una 53 E E 123 Reference position 89 175 194 Reference POWED AER 245 Reference SIGMA miss dada 271 Heterencevalue c ccccccccccccecceseeseeseeeeeeueeueeeeeesaeeaes 174 193 PROTO CU NN EE 184 Resolution bandwicth conan 94 97 Result summary DEDO E 248 CDMA 2000 E 236 E A E N 216 A A A 252 W CDMA e 223 Result table spectrum EMISSION MASK ANE 65 SOUNOUS EMISSION riendas 72 RF attenuation A 91 Rho DEDI S encata 250 CGDMA2000 E 237 PN A oa 104 AMS TlIASISCION sisi cea 203 PROTA VINOD osoni 12 o o A 104 SAVE DN EVEN ee eee ee nee ee 19 Scalar measurement cc ceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeesaeees 150 SCI DE 90 175 193 horizontal avis 85 Ee EI elle COAG asesinato 232 263 GRADING CISD y EE 232 Screen la OU EE 10 ET ooo
100. 5 12 23 253 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot The global results also contain information about the quality of the measured signal Note that some results are only evaluated if the channel search has been turned on For more information see Using the Channel Search on page 263 RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the currently measured TD SCDMA signal Note that the RF Channel Power shown in the Result Summary is measured over one time slot The RF Channel Power shown in the Spectrum Overview is measured over one complete subframe In case of over the air measurements the total power includes all received signals in the channel bandwidth Carrier Freq Error Shows the frequency error in related to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 266 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet UO Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Gain Imbalance Shows the gain Imbalance of the signal in Displayed only if the channel search has been turned on Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude
101. 6275 12 23 96 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 4 Configuring and Triggering the Sweep You can find all necessary settings to configure the sweep itself in the sweep menu To access it press the SWEEP key 3 2 4 1 Setting the Sweep Time The sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S FSH to get the results that are contained in one trace In the frequency domain span gt 0 the sweep time is the time it takes the R amp S FSH to measure the spectrum in the specified span To avoid the display of spurs in the spectrum the sweep time has to meet some conditions e The sweep time depends on the resolution bandwidth If the sweep time is too short the resolution filter has no time to settle In that case the displayed levels will be too low For more information see Setting the Resolution Bandwidth e The sweep depends on the span If you increase the span you also have to increase the sweep time In its default state the R amp S FSH couples the sweep time to the span and the resolution bandwidth to avoid invalid settings If the coupling is active the R amp S FSH always sets the shortest possible sweep time to make sure that the display of the spectrum is correct and valid The R amp S FSH requires a minimum sweep time of 20 ms for every 600 MHz of span If you increase the span the R amp S FSH will also increase the sweep time In the time domain span 0 the R amp S FSH shows
102. 713 gt Press the MARKER Key 288 RBW 200 Vis SWT 20 mg Trace Clears Write j r E Phi H Trig Free Run Detect RS gt Press the Marker Function softkey ES Ve de gt Select the Frequency Count menu item 10 0 The R amp S FSH displays the TE counted marker frequency with a E resolution of 1 Hz Ifthe frequency counter is on the marker symbol changes from M1 to C 110 0 en Center GHz Marker Precision Frequency Reference For even more precise measurements with the frequency counter you can use the R amp S FSH Z114 Precision Frequency Reference order no 1304 5935 02 For more information refer to the documentation available for the R amp S FSH Z114 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 113 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode ee Configuring Spectrum Measurements Measuring the Signal Bandwidth The n dB Down marker function places two temporary markers to the left and to the right of the reference marker and measures the bandwidth between the two temporary markers The function therefore is a good way to measure the bandwidth of a signal or the bandwidth of a filter for example The temporary markers are represented as two vertical lines The distance to the reference marker is by default 3 dB below the reference marker You can also adjust this value manually Entering a positive value sets the temporary markers below the reference marker If it is for any reason not possible
103. 729 02 R amp S FSH K46E 1304 5764 02 R amp S FSH K47 1304 5787 02 R amp S FSH K47E 1304 5806 02 R amp S FSH K48 1304 5887 02 R amp S FSH K48E 1304 5858 02 R amp S FSH K50 1304 5735 02 R amp S FSH K50E 1304 5793 02 R amp S FSH K51 1304 5812 02 R amp S FSH K51E 1304 5829 02 The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 2 40 or higher 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muehldorfstr 15 81671 Munich Germany Phone 49 89 4129 0 Fax 49 89 4129 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http www rohde schwarz com 81671 Munich Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R8S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH 8 Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSH4 8 13 20 are abbreviated as R amp S FSH RSSPFSH4View is abbreviated as R amp S FSH4View R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with
104. 8 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S FSH Table of Contents Table of Contents Documentation OVer Vie Wonnnccccccoccccnnnnronnnnncnnanrrnnanrenannrenannrnnannrnnans 8 Conventions Used in the DocumentatiON oooccconnncccononnnnnnannnnnnannnss 9 o R amp S ostesese cesses usesesececesscasedadaceswcuseewcucudscaSececeoudeautes 10 1 1 Screen Layout and Eet mvuoccicoinsciccnasocinananeci cone cidaala cade nic ina andate cia daa nnna 10 MZ Means o NPU eege 11 1 2 1 Using the Alphanumeric key 11 1 2 2 Confirming and Cancelling Entries ooonncnncccconncnnccnnonncnnonononncnnnnononncnnnnonanncnnnnnnnns 12 1 2 3 Using the ROLALY A e EE 12 1 2 4 UemgheCGursorkeys 13 1 2 5 Remote OD Cl UM eetgieg agefeiert eege liada 13 13 Pres ltino ine R amp S oN resect cseecc ccweemsecevsccseasexsnuecionsiexnnecsussensstesessiesesescucacneucescesxetoueestae 14 1 4 Configuring Measurements ssecceeeeeeeseceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeennseeeeeesecoeensneeeeeseeeooeenes 14 1 5 Configuring the Instrument cccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnseeeeeseeooeassseeeseseeoeoonenees 15 1 6 Taking AMA 18 Mol SAVNO EVEN ii E E ii 19 18 Ma ging Dalat Se tS enonse aaa aa 21 1 9 1 OVDA E 22 1 8 2 Restoring Datasets E 28 1 8
105. A AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 306 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Input Mixer IF filter Ee EES Detector attenuator detector filter RF inpute Local oscillator x deflection sawtooth generator for sweep Figure 11 2 Block diagram showing the basic functionality of a spectrum analyzer The precision attenuator at the R amp S FSH input attenuates the signal to a level that the mixer can handle without overdriving the mixer The attenuator is directly coupled to the reference level You can attenuate the signal in the range from 0 dB to 40 dB in steps of 5 dB The mixer converts the RF signal to a fixed intermediate frequency IF This process usually involves several stages It lasts until you get an IF for which good narrowband filters are available The R amp S FSH needs three mixing stages to get an IF that the filter can handle Figure 11 3 graphically shows the mixing process For models with a frequency limit of 3 6 GHz the IFs are 4892 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from a specific input frequency to the first IF is done by a local oscillator LO This LO can be tuned from 4 8 GHz to 8 4 GHz All other conversions are handled by single frequency oscillators In case of models with a frequency limit of 8 GHz the IFs are 8924 8 MHz 860 8 MHz and 54 4 MHz The conversion from the first to the second IF
106. A Signals The switching point is represented by a red vertical line All time slots after the switching point are considered as downlink slots Because the R amp S FSH K48 only allows measurements on the downlink it evaluates the results EVM or C I only for the time slots that carry downlink information So if a time slot contains power but does not show EVM or C I results the switching point is probably set in a way that this time slot is considered as an uplink slot For each time slot 0 to 6 and the two pilot time slots DwPTS and UpPTS the result display shows the following results Slot number Shows the time slot type The normal time slots are numbered from O to 6 Time slot O is always reserved for the downlink and time slot 1 always reserved for the uplink The remaining time slots can either carry uplink or downlink information depending on the switching point you have set The special time slots are labeled DwPTS and UpPTS They are shorter than normal time slots and carry the pilot information for uplink UpPTS and downlink DWPTS Note that the UpPTS is not analyzed by the R amp S FSH K48 Thus the software does not display results for this time slot Power Shows the absolute power level of each time slot C I Shows the carrier to interference ratio The C I is the usable signal power in relation to the error power difference between the measured signal and the reference signal Composite EVM Shows the
107. Ab 57 1 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Channel table 6 TD SCDMA softkey menu 9 7 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 252 9 7 3 2 Global Results The global results contain various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 252 ES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 258 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 3 3 The Code Domain Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns and a number of rows that depend on the number of channels The columns show the following information Code SF Number of the code channel and its spreading factor Status Status of the code channel Modulation Type Modulation type of the code channel Code Symbol EVM EVM of the corresponding code channel Power Abs olute dBm Absolute power of the corresponding code channel in dBm Power Rel ative to RF Channel Power dB Relative power of the corresponding code channel in dB The power value is relative to the RF channel power Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 259 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements o
108. Average Coverage Level or Bad Coverage Level menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the signal level associated with the coverage conditions Superimposed geotags If one or more geotags superimpose each other you can define rules which geotag or its color is actually displayed gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Default Indicator menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the geotag that shall be displayed e Best the geotag with the best signal level is displayed e Average the geotag with the average level is displayed e Worst the geotag with the lowest signal level is displayed BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 142 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps 5 2 3 Measuring Interference Interference measurements usually require an antenna to localize the source of those interferers The R amp S FSH supports several antenna models e R amp S HL300 Connected to the R amp S FSH at the AUX port and the RF input e R amp S HE300 Connected to the R amp S FSH at the power sensor jack and the RF input You can control the antenna functionality in several ways in the general setup of the R amp S FSH For more information see the Quick Start Guide of the R amp S FSH 5 2 3 1 Selecting an Antenna Model For easy access the R amp S FSH allows you to select the antenna model directly in the interference analyzer or geotagging appli
109. Calibration on page 155 BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 187 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 AE IPSS AAA AA AAA Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests For valid measurement results you need to specify the characteristics of the cable under test like model or frequency range 7 2 1 Selecting the Cable Model To determine the speed of propagation and therefore the precise distance to any faults you have to specify the cable model that you want to test The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of predefined cable models that you can use without doing anything lf you want to test a cable that is not listed you can also define cable models manually either directly on the R S FSH or with the Cable Model Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH 7 2 1 1 Selecting a Predefined Cable Model gt Press the MEAS key Press the Cable Config softkey Cable Model 06 08 10 18 13 Stat Name Size Date Time Select the Select Cable Model A menu item 5082 HLFR cblmod us emm en 5128 HLFA chimod 1 kB 3105 2010 15 21 i B168 HLFR cblnod 1 kB 31 06 2010 16 21 6228 HUFR cblmod 1kB 31 06 2010 16 21 The R amp S FSH opens the file SE ia EE manager to select the cable 5620 MEN chimed IKB 31 08 2010 15 21 FLG114 50J_chlmod 1 kB 3105 2010 15 21 model FLC12 60J cblmod 1kB 31 06 2010 16 21 FLC169 50 c
110. D card the names correspond to the folder names for J F if J Vi Let A elt E Greet E AN Auto Salact every area you have downloaded NE mu Ki 5 2 Somewhere gt Select the maps of the area you Was GEN OA need Mode Position Gg dic us P The Auto Select menu item automatically selects the map that is most fitting for your current location Using the automatic selection requires an GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 138 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 Working with Maps Screen layout of the map display The screen layout in Maps mode is variable You can customize the screen contents and add only information that you need gt Press the Settings softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains functions to configure the map display If no screen element has been selected the R amp S FSH shows the map only The following list contains all settings that define the screen contents THE 100 0 dBm RBW 3 MHz CWT 100 ma Lo 0 dB Preamp Off Detect RMS as Ade 739472 E 11 36 38 438 4h 5733 m Comp 305 Sats 12 i Fre 1 84 GHz GK A de EI d eh At i al Gen 14 E A i GC L KE eg ad We e De eg en in oo Lele Settings Mode Position 1 Current type of result display 2 Connected device green color GPS connection established red color GPS connection not established 3 Hardware settings 4 GPS information including compa
111. Depending on the application press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the limit line gt Select the Load From File menu item gt Press the Sort Show softkey BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 117 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Select the Show Compatible menu item The R amp S FSH shows all limit lines that are compatible to the current settings gt Select one of the available limit lines gt Press the Select softkey The R amp S FSH activates the limit line In the diagram the limit line is displayed as a red line If you have already selected a limit line you can turn the limit line on and off with the Limits On Off softkey Alternatively you can define a threshold that works like a limit line A threshold is a simple horizontal limit line Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey Select the Threshold menu item The R amp S FSH opens a input field to define the threshold gt Enter the threshold you need The R amp S FSH displays the line and performs a limit check for that threshold Threshold line and display line Like the display line a threshold line is a straight horizontal line The difference is that the R amp S FSH performs a limit check for threshold lines but not for display lines A failed limit check may be an issue if you want to create a measurement report be
112. ESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 105 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 5 4 Working with Memory Traces You can save the image of both traces to the memory of the R amp S FSH and later restore it and compare it to a live trace The memory trace is always colored white to distinguish it from the live trace Measurement settings Because the memory trace is just a bitmap any modifications to measurement settings like span or reference level are nor reflected in the memory trace When you save a data set the R amp S FSH also stores the associated trace in the trace memory If you restore it at a later time you can display the memory trace as if itis a normal memory trace Press the TRACE key gt Select the trace you want to store Ref 200 dBm RBW 300kHz SWT 20ms Trace Clear Wrte WBW 300 kHz Trig Free Run Detect Max Peak in the trace memory with the Select Trace softkey gt Press the Trace Memory softkey The R amp S FSH saves the active trace gt Press the Show softkey gt Select the Memory lt x gt menu Center 1 GHz H men H Tei PEPA item Mode Detector The R amp S FSH shows the corresponding memory trace If active it labels the Memory lt x gt menu item with an X 3 2 5 5 Using Trace Mathematics Trace mathematics substract the memory trace from the live trace and vice versa and then display the results 18 11 10
113. H K51 you can perform measurements on downlink LTE FDD R amp S FSH K50 and TDD R amp S FSH K51 signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH Bandwidth of LTE signals Because of the bandwidth of LTE signals measurements are possible only with instruments that support a bandwidth of 20 MHz serial numbers 105000 and higher Press the MODE key Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey Select the LTE FDD BTS menu item for FDD measurements vY vV vV Yy Select the TD LTE BTS menu item for TDD measurements The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input The Result Summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form 0 2 Aah Cemer 1 8015 GHz Rel levet 600 dBm Sweep chanel Rel Offset HD ep Cell Grp ID Auto and wee Aa 0 0 46 Cyclic Prefix Auto Transd Preamp On Antenna M 22 OTA Ch BW 10 MHz 50 RB Sublramex j 5 BECH Results RF Channel Power 54 56 dim Cell identity GrpTD 340 1131 Overall EWM EK Cyclic Prefix Normal Carrier Freq Error 347 Hz Traffic Activity sg al Sync Signal Power 2213 dom SINR 077 del OSTP 77 4 dim RSSI 441 dim REAP 54 01 des RSRO 760 dB ieterence Signal Overview ntenma Power EWM Time Ali
114. H Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 6 4 5 Using Limit Lines When working with the magnitude format in the network analyzer you can use limit lines to set limits for level characteristics on the display that must not be exceeded You can create and edit limit lines with the R amp S FSH4View software and load them into the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of limit lines the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 und Using Limit Lines on page 117 6 4 6 Using Trace Mathematics Trace mathematics that subtract one trace from another are available for most measurement formats in the network analyzer mode For more information see Using Trace Mathematics on page 106 H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 177 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 With firmware option R amp S FSH K45 order no 1304 5658 02 you can use a R amp S FSH with tracking generator and VSWR bridge as a vector voltmeter A vector voltmeter performs reflection S11 and transmission measurements 21 The tracking generator provides the signal source that generates an unmodulated sinewave signal on a single frequency Typical applications for a vector voltmeter are adjustment of the electrical length of cables with a reflection measurement
115. H opens an input field gt Enter the reference value you need to see the trace completely The R amp S FSH moves the trace accordingly relabels the vertical axis and shows the new 0 dB reference in the hardware settings display 04 01 11 1413 e 04 01 11 15 31 e Det 0 0 dB REW 10 kHz SWT 38 ms Trace Clear Write Ret 20 0 dB REW 10 kHz SWT 28 ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample e Art 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample I ll l l I I ll L l I Center 1 95 GHz Span 30 MHz Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Calibration Format rg Raf Orit Raf Pos as i E tpU Mode Amp Im Attenuation Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 174 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Changing the reference position Changing the reference position moves the position of the reference value up or down The reference position also moves the trace up or down The levels and the reference value however remain the same The default reference position is the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference position is indicated by a triangle at the vertical axis AAR The reference position is a number between 0 and 10 with O being the grid line at the bottom and 10 being the grid line at the top of the diagram gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter the new position of the reference value The R amp S FSH moves the trace accord
116. H shows some basic information about the geotag Number number of the location as displayed on the map Include checkbox to include the geotag on the map display Latitude longitude and azimuth GPS information of the location Name name of the location However a geotag consists of more information than the information displayed in the list gt Select one of the geotags available in the list gt Press the View softkey The R amp S FSH displays the complete information of the geotag In addition to the geographic information the details of the geotag also contain information about the measurement This information includes for example the frequency measured level or measurement bandwidth The R amp S FSH allows you to change the name and description anytime you want All other geotag information is unchangeable after it has been saved gt Inthe geotag information overview press the Edit softkey The R amp S FSH opens input fields to change the name and description of the location BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 147 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps Displaying geotags A geotag is represented by a dot and a number on the map The R amp S FSH K15 also displays an azimuth line The azimuth is the deviation from the direction you are facing and the north It is a number in degrees For example if you are looking east the azimuth would be 90
117. Hz i TX8 9 20 kHz change the spacing for TX9 10 20kHz TA10 11 0kHz gt Activate the input by pressing the Se er A d zZ ENTER key Akl 20kHz Alt2 20 kHz Al 20 kHz gt Enter the channel spacing you Se at The R amp S FSH now takes the new values into account for future measurements When performing measurements on multi carrier signals you can define the spacing of the transmission Tx channels to one another By default the R amp S FSH assumes equal spacing between all Tx channels in the system Therefore the spacing you enter for the first two Tx channels is automatically applied to all other Tx channels If you do measurements on systems with a different channel spacing for each Tx channel you can also set the channel spacing for each Tx channel separately by entering the respective number in the fields If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows e Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency e Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency Adjacent or alternate channel spacing is also available for single carrier measurements The R amp S FSH can perform measurements on up to 12 adjacent channels Usually the first adjacent channel to the Tx channel is referred to as the Adjacent Channel ADJ
118. Identity Center GHz 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Color map 4 Diagram area 5 Currently selected allocation 6 LTE softkey menu The constellation diagram shows the location of the transmitted symbols in the complex plane It is therefore an indicator of the quality of the modulation of the signal By default the result display shows the symbol locations over all allocations In that case the R amp S FSH distinguishes modulation schemes used in the transmission of data channels by using different colors e QPSK modulation 16QAM modulation e 64QAM modulation For easy identification of the pilot synchronization and control channels in the diagram the R amp S FSH also uses different colors e PSYNC e SSYNC D Control channels with QPSK modulation Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 272 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals In addition to an overview of all allocations you can also view the constellations of particular channels or modulation schemes gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Constell Settings softkey gt Select the channel type you want to see the results for The R amp S FSH adjusts the contents of the diagram and shows the channel you have selected to the right of the diagram 9 8 3 The BTS Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the BTS scanner becomes available If you are measur
119. K red font synchronization failed 5 Global results fora TD SCDMA time slot 6 Power results for a TD SCDMA time slot 7 TD SCDMA softkey menu ROWDY 9 7 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard Scrambling Code Shows the scrambling code of the base station The scrambling code is a number between 0 and 127 If you have selected automatic detection of the code the R amp S FSH shows the label Auto Automatic detection is the default method to find the scrambling code For more information see Specifying the Scrambling Code on page 263 Switching Point Shows the switching point in a subframe that separates uplink and downlink For more information see Defining the Switching Point on page 265 Slot Number Shows the time slot 0 to 6 of the TD SCDMA subframe that is currently analyzed For more information see Selecting a Time Slot on page 265 Max Users Shows the maximum number of midamble shifts in a cell Because each midamble is user specific the midamble shifts also define the number of users that can be served in one cell Channel Phases Shows the phase characteristics of the code channels For more information see Selecting the Phase Characteristics of the Code Channels on page 266 AAA AAA A A A a A SESS SSNS A TR y Operating Manual 1173 627
120. L signal level BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 98 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements e Gated Trigger When the gated trigger is active a gate signal that is applied to the R amp S FSH trigger input controls the sweep The R amp S FSH starts measuring when the applied gate signal becomes active and the set gate delay has expired and it interrupts the measurement as soon as the defined gate length is reached With the gate signal becoming active the next time the measurement is resumed etc Pulsed signals can be measured by this method if the gate delay and gate length are selected in a way that the measurement is only performed while the pulse is active Gated measurements are possible in the frequency domain span gt 0 and the time domain span 0 but it is available only in combination with an external gate signal gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trigger source gt Select the trigger source you need The R amp S FSH activates the trigger Including a Delay Time When you are using a video trigger in the time domain or an external trigger you can delay the start of the measurement with respect to the trigger event by entering a delay time In this way you can include time differences between the trigger event and the measurement The range of the trigger delay is from O us to 100 s The resolution de
121. Limit le EE 195 8 Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 c ccssccesssseeeceeeseessenseceeeseneeoes 196 8 1 Selecting the Measurement MOdEC ccccccceecsssseeeeeeeeeseceesnneeeeeseeeoeesneeeeeeseaoes 197 8 1 1 Performing Single Frequency Measurements ccoooncncccoccnncconcnnconononcnnnncnnnnnanononnanenoos 197 8 1 2 Performing Frequency SCANS coooocccncccnnoccnncccnnoncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnrnnnnnonancnnnnnnnannannns 200 8 2 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode sscccssssssseeeseeesseeeseeeenseees 203 8 2 1 Selecting Detectors for EMI Measurements occccoooncncccoccnnccnnnnncnnononcnnoncnnnonanononnanenoos 203 8 2 2 Selecting the Measurement Bandwidths for EMI Measuremente 204 8 2 3 Defining the Measurement Tume 205 8 2 4 Working With Traces ccccccccccsssceccesseeeceseeeceeeeecseuseeeseuseeessagseeesageeeesseeeeessegeeesss 205 020 Usmo ER Te Ee Dios lt EN 205 8 20 Usmo EE 205 9 Digital Modulation ANalyZer cooncconncconncicnccconncconanconancnnanonnannenanos 206 9 1 General Settings of the Digital Modulation AnalyzZer ooncccccnnnnnccccnnccancnnnnnnannons 207 9 1 1 General Settings in the Result Summary ooooccccnnncccncccnonncnnnnncnnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnanncnnnnnnnss 207 9 1 2 Trace Mode Gelechon 210 9 2 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer cccccnnnnnccneoommmmo 212 9 3 Measurements on GSM Signals cccceeeeeeeceesnseeeeeeeeeeeeens
122. Manual Span softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the soan manually gt Enter the span you need The largest possible span for the channel power measurement Is ten times the channel bandwidth At larger spans the result of the channel power measurement would be increasingly imprecise because too few points of the trace would be in the channel you are measuring gt Press the Auto Span softkey The R amp S FSH again calculates the span automatically BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 45 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 5 Measuring the Maximum Channel Power If signal levels fluctuate significantly you can define the maximum channel power with the Max Hold function gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Display softkey gt Select the Max Hold menu item The power display switches from Power to Max Power If you want to deactivate the Max Hold function and return to the normal power display activate Clear Write gt To deactivate the Max Hold function press the Power Display softkey gt Select the Clear Write menu item The power display returns to Power display 3 1 2 6 Unit for Power Display The R amp S FSH can apply different units to the power output The default unit is dBm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Unit softkey gt Select the unit you want from the submenu The R amp S FSH displays the pow
123. NC or SSYNC signals or synchronize to the reference signal gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the PSYNC SSYNC menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the PSYNC or SSYNC gt Select the Reference Signal menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the reference signal For more information see Reference Signal Overview on page 271 9 8 5 6 Selecting the MIMO Configuration You can perform measurements on equipment with 1 2 or 4 transmission antennas For measurements on base stations with one or two transmit antennas it is possible to perform detailed measurements on single antennas via cable connection Because the reference signals of the different antennas are orthogonal it is possible to determine and display their power and EVM during over the air measurements gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Antenna Settings softkey gt Select the menu item that corresponds to the setup of the equipment you are measuring If you want to measure a specific antenna select the antenna number Note that selecting a specific antenna in multiple antenna systems is available only for 2 antenna systems If you want to measure all antennas of the system select the Over the air menu item 9 8 5 7 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 KHz the R amp
124. OdB reference 4 Status line S matrix Calibration status Measurement format 5 Trace window 6 Network analyzer softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 151 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements 6 1 Calibrating Measurements In its default state the R amp S FSH uses factory calibration Factory calibration is a full 2 port calibration over the current frequency range i e span of the R amp S FSH When factory calibration is active the status line reads EH In many cases this calibration already provides accurate results To get the best and most accurate results however you have to calibrate the measurement manually because factory calibration does not take the actual test setup into account e g cables The R amp S FSH provides several calibration methods You will need one of the available calibration standards R amp S FSH Z28 Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 or R amp S ZV Z121 order no 1164 0496 02 03 Alternatively you can create customized calibration kits with the functionality of the R amp S FSH4View software package and transfer those to the R amp S FSH Before you calibrate the R amp S FSH for the current measurement you should set the frequency parameters reference level and attenuation levels If you change one of these parameters after a successful calibration it may become invalid To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect the calibrat
125. R amp S FSH4 8 13 20 Spectrum Analyzer Operating Manual eg eg FSA SPECTRUM ANALNITER ZA 29 04 98 CONS o Trace Cleat NNwe INS REN INN NBA BOO WAT NS Genter 22 GUZ Measure Standard 1173 6275 12 23 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement Operating Manual The Operating Manual describes the following R amp S FSH models R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 04 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 14 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 24 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 08 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 18 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 28 R amp S FSH13 1314 2000 13 R amp S FSH20 1314 2000 20 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 54 equivalent to 1309 6000 04 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 64 equivalent to 1309 6000 14 R amp S FSH4 1309 6000 74 equivalent to 1309 6000 24 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 58 equivalent to 1309 6000 08 Le gt O E R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 68 equivalent to 1309 6000 18 R amp S FSH8 1309 6000 78 equivalent to 1309 6000 28 R amp S FSH13 1314 2000 63 equivalent to 1314 2000 13 R amp S FSH20 1314 2000 70 equivalent to 1314 2000 20 The manual also covers the following options R amp S FSH K10 1304 5864 02 R amp S FSH K14 1304 5770 02 R amp S FSH K15 1309 7488 02 R amp S FSH K16 1309 7494 02 R amp S FSH K41 1304 5612 02 R amp S FSH K42 1309 5629 02 R amp S FSH K43 1304 5635 02 R amp S FSH K44 1309 5658 02 R amp S FSH K44E 1304 5758 02 R amp S FSH K45 1309 5641 02 R amp S FSH K46 1304 5
126. R amp S FSH includes in the averaging gt Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging In continuous sweep mode the R amp S FSH now calculates the moving average over the number of sweeps you have specified In single sweep mode it stops the measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces 3 2 5 2 Selecting the Detector The number of measurement results collected in a single sweep usually is very high especially if the span is large However the display of the R amp S FSH can display only 631 results in horizontal direction as it is limited by the number of pixels that are available on the display Therefore it has to combine measurement results to fit them on the display In that case one pixel represents a frequency range span 631 The detector determines the way the R amp S FSH combines and displays the results for one pixel The data base is the video voltage of the analyzer The R amp S FSH provides several types of detectors e Auto Peak If the auto peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays both the maximum and the minimum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel Therefore the auto peak detector loses no information If a signal power level fluctuates e g noise the width of the trace depends on the magnitude of the signal fluctuation The auto peak detector is the default detector e Max Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH
127. S FSH opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the R amp S FSH includes in the averaging gt Enter the number of sweeps to include in the averaging In continuous sweep mode the R amp S FSH now calculates the moving average over the number of sweeps you have specified In single sweep mode it stops the measurement after finishing the sweeps and averages the traces BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 211 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 2 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The R amp S FSH provides several result displays that are available for all digital modulation options There are two methods to view and analyze the spectrum of the signal you are currently measuring the spectrum overview and the isotropic antenna result displays Both result displays are integrated into the digital modulation options so you do not have to switch modes if you want to have a quick glance at the spectrum For a detailed analysis of the signal however you should still use the spectrum analyzer operating mode The screen layout and contents of the spectrum result displays are the same as those of the spectrum analyzer mode The Spectrum Overview The Spectrum Overview provides an overview of the frequency spectrum with limited functionality D D mesmo 14 25 The Spectrum Overview is meant for Ref 30 0dBm RBW 100 kHz Sweep Cont
128. S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 278 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 5 8 Configuring EVM Results In case of the EVM you can define the unit of the EVM and EVM calculation method To obtain EVM values according to standard the channel estimation and EVM windowing methods defined in 3GPP TS 36 141 are used Prerequisites for a standard compliant measurement are signals according to the enhanced test models defined in 36 141 and an external frequency reference delivered via the Ref In connector or via GPS The EVM according to standard measurement is mainly useful for high accuracy signal quality measurements with cable connected eNodeB antenna ports The measurement takes longer but the EVM value incorporates more signal errors like inter symbol interference If the EVM is not measured with the EVM According to Standard option enabled optimum channel estimation and EVM calculation methods are used Especially for over the air measurements this setting is useful since influences of the air interface like inter symbol interferen
129. S detector is best for measurements on digitally modulated signals because it provides stable and true power readings In combination with a high sweep time you can increase the display stability even more because the measurement time for each pixel increases Noise measurements also provide stable results if you apply the RMS detector in combination with a high sweep time However the bandwidth occupied by the signal to be measured should at least equal the frequency covered by a trace pixel or the selected resolution bandwidth whichever is larger Otherwise the power the R amp S FSH shows is too low because there are spectral components within the frequency range covered by the pixel that do not originate from the signal you want to observe e g noise To get the true power the video bandwidth VBW should also be greater than the resolution bandwidth RBW Otherwise an averaging effect caused by video bandlimiting comes into play before the RMS value is calculated The R amp S FSH provides automatic selection of the detector In that case the R amp S FSH selects the detector that is most suitable for the current trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Average Sample Max Hold Max Peak Min Hold Min Peak Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 104 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If you select the detector manually the detector is independent of the trace mode and wil
130. SH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals In addition the R amp S FSH shows the power of the common pilot channels CPICH belonging to the scrambling code You can see the power in numerical form in a table above the diagram area and in graphical form Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the scrambling codes may turn grey A grey color indicates time periods during which no scrambling codes can be found For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 9 4 4 2 Setting the Antenna Diversity By default the R amp S FSH does measurements on base stations with one antenna For base stations with two antennas you have to specify the antenna to synchronize to gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Antenna Settings menu item The R amp S FSH opens another submenu gt Inthe submenu select the Antenna 1 menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes to the CPICH of antenna 1 The procedure to select antenna 2 is the same gt To measure base stations with one antenna select the menu item Antenna Diversity Off 9 4 4 3 Selecting the Slot and Code Channel The code domain power and code domain channel table result displays show the power of each code channel contained in one slot By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for slot
131. SiNgle SWEEP E 98 SANEA E E o Eu 169 Softkey Weu siiis aaRS 108 DONKEYS A oo O 280 DTU todabia 293 301 E E 280 EDV PP 299 NETWOTK MAN Z OM E 288 power cipal 292 KEE 296 spectrum analysis ainia di 282 o eee nee ee eee eee 87 191 channel DOWGT inn 45 occupied Dan e VE 50 SEENEN 74 e 75 display configuration oooccccccnnnncccnncconnnnnnccnnnnnnonancnnnnnnnos 77 display TANS vicosrisonca tia 78 PP E E E 75 1 e e eect waren eer EE EE ET 80 GENEE e o 80 FOC ON aora 79 reference level 78 UME TNS A PA 80 Spectrogram Col Sussie 77 Spectrogram HISTORY E 76 SERGE 42 Spectrum EMISSION MaSK sssessssssnnnneeereeesseessrrrrnn rr reeeeee 63 adjust SCTING Sivcseccarivacevepivaveccasncasieninsaricarscasiaomicenieasversinad 65 Cs rrisnin ERARE RETARA RE 65 SANG e E E EE 64 Spectrum Oovervlew Sek 212 A EE 172 opreading Ac EE 244 Spurious emission cl aa a 72 Spurious EMISSION E 71 A E 225 LE 270 Standard e RE 57 channel pOWwer A ue 44 directional power Sensor 133 occupied BE Oe BEE 48 DONET EE 133 spectrum EMISSION MASK AEN 64 TOMA POWE intensas 52 Start stop freQUENCY sesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeess 87 191 PP 85 Subframe configuratiON ooooconcconocccncccccnocccncnananannnns 277 o a ee E E ee rete eee eee eee 97 103 Sweep mode 98 209 Sweep NUMDeT coooccccnnccnnncccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnannnnnos 98 102 Sweep TMG ruca 97 gt A N E se seen E A E ects 238 Sy
132. Standard softkey A menu to select a standard opens gt Select the required standard The R amp S FSH takes the selected standard into account The currently active standard is displayed in the display header Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 133 R amp S FSH Power Sensors EE Using a Directional Power Sensor Taking additional attenuation into account When the directional power sensor is connected to a test point not directly but via a cable the influence of cable attenuation can be taken into account For this purpose the cable attenuation for the measurement frequency in question is to be entered i e as a positive dB value if the power and matching are to be measured at the source and the cable is connected between the source and the power sensor and as a negative dB value if the power and matching are to be measured at the load and the cable is connected between the load and the power sensor The directional power sensor then corrects the power and matching values to produce the results that would have been obtained if it had been directly connected to the test point gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Offset softkey The input field to enter the reference offset opens gt Enter the offset you need The selected offset is displayed in the diagram header and is taken into account in the power level and matching results If high powers are applied that exceed the maximum input level of the R amp S FSH Z14 o
133. This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 833 Hz at a span of 1 kHz Setting the channel spacing In case of the R amp S FSH the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the transmission channel and the center frequency to the next transmission channel or the distance between the center frequency of the transmission channel and the center frequency of the adjacent channel Specific channel spacing definitions Note that some some radio communication standards e g CDMA2000 DS MC1 MCs and IS95 B C IS97 B C IS98 B C define the channel spacing differently namely the distance from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel The R amp S FSH does not consider these specifics It always regards the channel spacing as the distance between the center of a channel and the center of its neighboring channel gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Spacing menu item Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 58 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box TX ACP Channel Spacing to define the spacings for all i TX2 3 Z0kHz transmission channels and 1X3 4 20 kHa i TX4 5 20kHz adjacent alternate channels SE Srel TX6 7 20 kHz gt Select the channel you want to TX7 8 20k
134. Trace Clear Write fast measurements that give you a oeren Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB RF Channel Power Power within Span rough idea about the signal s 51 7 d n 50 9 dp Chan Bu 3 84 MHz Span 20 MHz frequency and level characteristics To maintain high measurement speed the 40 0 50 0 R amp S FSH analyzes one FFT and 50 0 shows the results of the signal and its em surrounding frequencies Thus you ag 100 0 should use this result display for De situations when measurement speed is KI an issue not accuracy Center 2 1672 GHz Span 20 MHz A ee eSignal e FEN Display Settings E Setting In addition to the RF Channel Power and the Power Within Span results the Spectrum Overview shows the Occupied Bandwidth The channel bandwidth depends on the selected mobile standard While using the spectrum overview you can only set the resolution bandwidth and the span gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Spectrum Overview menu item Note that the Spectrum Overview also features miscellaneous trace modes to display different aspects of the measurement results For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 212 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer The Isotropic Antenna Result Display The isotropic antenna result display also provides an overview of the spectrum 7
135. Transmission Fwd Port 12 and Transmission Rev Port 2 1 Test port 1 or 2 is calibrated for transmission measurements S12 or S21 For measurements in forward direction this method calibrates port 1 in case of measurements in the reverse direction it calibrates port 2 The calibration requires a through connection and the calibration standards open and short BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 154 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements e Normalize Normalization is a simple way to calibrate the measurement using one calibration standard only The correction data is deducted from this measurement As only one calibration standard is used the isolation between the test ports is ignored A possible cross talk between the test ports is therefore not eliminated and the accuracy is lower than that of a full calibration 6 1 1 3 Performing Calibration The procedure below shows a full 2 port calibration routine All other calibration methods basically work the same way except for the type and number of calibration standards you are going to need gt Disconnect the DUT from the RF cable After disconnecting the DUT the R amp S FSH is ready for calibration gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Full 2 Port menu item th e curre nt y Se ected cal b ratio n The The following calibration kit is selected for this calibration calibration kit ra sel
136. a displayed code power where no power would be if the spreading factor was correct 9 5 5 2 Changing the Code Order The code order defines the order the codes are displayed Hadamard order means that there s no distinction between channels The R amp S FSH shows codes in ascending order regardless of the channel that it belongs to BitReverse order means that the R amp S FSH combines codes of a channel if a channel consists of more than one code When using BitReverse order the codes of a channel are next to one another In this way you can see the total power of a concentrated channel Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 244 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either the Hadamard or the BitReverse menu item The R amp S FSH adjusts the code display accordingly TOT WU es E PN D ser Base SF Cancer Frequency GHz Pilot Power Rel te Dien Channel Humber Sync Poner Rel to Pilot Channel Band Page Power Rel to Pilos Carrier Freg Erro ITT 124 CE mg DCL mg Eres Run Base St 138 Center Frequency GH Pilot Power Bei te Pilot LE Channel Number Sept Poner Ael ta Pilot 575 a Channel Band Page Power Rel 10 Pin 0 30 dl Carrer Freg Error Bro Wee 124 HIT eg KT B a 88 KC KR 55 KI KE 9 5 5 3 Changing the Reference Power The y axis represents the power of the signal The power of t
137. a Ee 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Diagram header 5 Diagram area 6 TD SCDMA softkey menu Spreading factor 0 Note that the Code Domain Analyzer result display does not display the code domain power for code channels with a spreading factor of 0 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 256 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 2 1 Header Table and Diagram Header The header table and the diagram header contain an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 252 In addition they contain the following information Code SF Shows the currently selected code and its spreading factor The first value is the code number the second value is the spreading factor The spreading factor for the codes is variable in the range between 0 and 16 Mod ulation Type Shows the modulation type of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 266 Symbol EVM Shows the EVM of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 266 Code Power Shows the power level of the currently selected code For more information see Selecting a Code Channel on page 266 Slot Number Shows the number of the time slot that the code domain is analyzed for For more information
138. a clase de da os Eliminaci n 1 Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar da os para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos 1175 6590 17 02 Page vi Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 798
139. able softkey CE le Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 10 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input 1 2 Means of Input The user interface of the R amp S FSH provides several elements for you to input data 1 Alphanumeric keys 2 Unit keys 3 Rotary knob 4 Cursor keys 5 Enter key 6 Cancel key 7 Back key 1 2 1 Using the Alphanumeric Keys Using the alphanumeric keys you can enter numeric values or characters The alphanumeric keys include the numbers from 0 to 9 the alphabet a minus sign and dot If you have to enter a numeric value press the corresponding key In case of numeric values each key covers just the number that s printed on it You can enter negative values with the minus sign key and enter values that contain decimal places with the dot key If the R amp S FSH asks you to enter a character or you need to enter a character e g file names the key assignment changes Each key covers one number and more than one character with the first choice being a character If you need to enter a character press the key several times until the character you require is selected The following table shows an overview of character assignment You can correct entries with the BACK key The BACK key moves the cursor one position backwards and deletes the character that was in that place Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 11 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input 1 2 2 Confirmin
140. ak enevelope power in case of signals with a high crest factor like LTE To get the best dynamic range you have to set the reference level as low as possible At the same time make sure that the maximum signal level does not exceed the reference level If it does it will overload the A D converter regardless of the signal power Measurement results may deteriorate e g EVM This applies especially for measurements with more than one active channel near the one you are trying to measure 6 MHz Note that the signal level at the A D converter may be stronger than the level the R amp S FSH displays depending on the current resolution bandwidth This is because the resolution bandwidths are implemented digitally after the A D converter In case of an IF overload the R amp S FSH shows a corresponding warning in the diagram area ED If you are not sure about the signal strength you can avoid an IF overload and determine the maximum level manually or perform an automatic level adjustment gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a series of measurements to determine the ideal reference level for the current signal Note that the current signal level does not necessarily have to correspond to the reference level after an automatic adjustment This is because the R amp S FSH measures a frequency range that is larger than current span and adjusts the reference level to the measured peak whi
141. al Length Offset Length Port 1 Offset Length Port 2 User Calibration Restore Calibration Settings 10 3 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram 0 1 x Span Select Uplink Manual Select Downlink Center Set to Uplink Get to Downlink Set to Uplink Downlink BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 288 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 Functions of the Network Analyzer Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span p Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram Depends on measurement format Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Ser suite V A A Loser Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths Gm rf es kend kel bd Functions of the Network Analyzer 10 3 7 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Auto Detector PEA ee SS o ooo Clear Write Average 10 MaxHold Suppression On suppression Off Aperture Manual 10 3 8 Limit Lines The LINES key opens a menu that contains t
142. al time when you change its angle Alternatively create a geotag of an arbitrary location gt Select the Save Manual Position menu item gt Enter the GPS data and location information The R amp S FSH creates a geotag with the geographic data you have entered Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 146 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps Creating geotags automatically The R amp S FSH is able to save geographic information automatically if you are using the Save on Event functionality For more information see Saving Events on page 19 The R amp S FSH adds all geotags that you create to the GPS Position List If you are using the Geotagging application R amp S FSH K16 you can turn on the Save on Event functionality in the application itself Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey Select the Geotagging menu item Press the MEAS key Press the Settings softkey Select the Save on Event menu item vY YV vV TT Y Y Select the Event Source menu item to select the event that triggers data storage Managing geotags The application features a GPS Position List that allows you to manage and edit geotags The GPS Position List contains all geotags that you have created Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the GPS Position List menu item The R amp S FSH opens a list of geotags that you have saved In this list the R amp S FS
143. amp S FSH Menu and Softkey Overview ee Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode 10 5 Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in distance to fault mode Distance to fault functionality is available with option R amp S FSH K41 10 5 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Reflection Spectrum DTF Refl Measurement Port Reflection Coefficient Cable Loss Select Cable Model Define User Model User Model Calibrate Restore Calibration bel ben ben en eeng 10 5 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram 10 5 3 Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains functionality to set the span DTF measurements bel ke kel kd Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 293 Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode Reflection and spectrum measurements a eg 10 5 4 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram 3 150 dB 15 0 dB Div Manual 0 dB Auto Low Noise 130 dB 13 0 dB Div e 50 48 6 0 d8 DW 10 dB 1 0 dB Div i i kel kel kel only available fo
144. amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets e Synchronization from R amp S FSH to PC Resuts gt gt button Updates all files on the PC that have been created on the R amp S FSH datasets screenshots and wizard results Removing outdated files When you turn on Remove Orphans the software removes all files from the R amp S FSH that it cannot find on the PC Alternatively you can synchronize all files at the same time gy Synchronize templates and datasets in one direction PC to R amp S FSH e or R amp S FSH to PC regardless of the file type FSH lt PC gt Turn on Synchronize All FSH gt PC gt Press either the FSH PC button to update all files on the R amp S FSH based on the data available on the PC or the FSH PC button to update the files on the PC based on the data available on the R amp S FSH 1 8 1 Saving Datasets The R amp S FSH allows you to save the data that is currently analyzed at any time gt Press the SAVE RECALL key The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt Press the Save softkey The R amp S FSH opens the Save Dataset dialog box Save Dataset 010200 2212 Stat Nama Si Date Time wW ataseti l set E kit nea 211 atasetf t set E WE 0102 2000 22412 Datasetb l set DR 0102 2000 2212 O RR Available datasets and folder structure Dataset name input field Remaining memory on selected data storage device File manager softkey menu
145. an thus browse through the history of spectra stored in memory In the marker information field the R amp S FSH shows the time stamp of the time line 26 04 10 15 50 The time stamp of the first time line T1 Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Clear Write is always referred to the top most CR a SS frame e g a time stamp of 00 00 50 000 means that the data was measured 50 seconds prior to the top most frame gt Press the Select Time Line softkey again The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the position of the Center 952 MHz Span 3 84 MHz second time line 12 Mode settings Update spectrogram Spectrogram Time Line gt Enter a number with the number keys the rotary knob or the cursor keys The R amp S FSH positions the second time line on the selected frame Again it shows the time stamp of the time line in the marker information field AT value For the second time line T2 the information is relative to the first one T1 This means that the time stamp of the second time line can be negative if you have set it on a frame above the first time line If you scroll the time line through the frames of the spectrogram with the rotary knob or the cursor keys the R amp S FSH will show the spectrum corresponding to the selected frame in the upper window of the display You can use the spectrogram playback for a detailed analysis of the signal levels over time and compare signal details in th
146. analista 282 NYG nl 255 NUM EE 278 Min ne e BE 102 210 Vlog e 103 is AA 105 AN a en meme E mr Oe AMET ernest Snr Pen Dennen neo 114 Network analysis AANEREN 150 Klee 112 Normalization NA 152 Normalization SA ME 60 Number Of hammonce nano nanoncnoncnnnos 68 Occupied e ne De un essential ticos 47 A e 49 channel bandwidth occcoccccocnccocnconcnconnncncnccnrnconcnnnnnnnos 49 power percentage NENNEN ENNER ENEE 50 Cerco A 49 O 50 standard rr 48 Offset lo Vale AE E EEN 86 Ceci A ee PREY Oper ome ee me 91 Operating mode digital modulatiON ME 206 distance to fault ooccconcionncconncconnconnnconcncnonccnrncononconnnonons 182 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 313 R amp S FSH Index Wale 150 Ke 196 spectrum analyzer ENEE 42 A A 31 PO ene ee ee 270 EE gg AO li O A 225 PORI A 270 A ste E E E 238 249 Eegeregie 80 PN offset DEV DO recodo E eons aneenenassaee 251 Egeter 246 PN scanner DEVON bend eat 250 ODMA ODO EE 243 POWer MOIO cesena a erp sites 124 Power Dercentage AANEREN 50 EE Eeer 126 lte 134 averaging time EEN 128 direcional sraoin isa 130 COIS sssini Eaa TSD 126 reference level 128 EE 133 DEE 128 133 WEIONIING MOJO ER 133 A o A 127 EISES euni Suerge Eege 93 209 A A o A 14 Preview E 28 Primary trans Ee iii 121 A A 225 le O IA A e sansa PRE ES EE een sceeaceevic 270 Quasi Eege 203 R amp S FSH4View A BE 55 CANDINO E 156 creating Standarde occccooccnncccoccnnconononnnos 44
147. anual 1173 6275 12 23 242 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 4 The PN Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E the PN scanner becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the PN scanner to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its PN offset The PN Scanner shows the PN offset for every base station it has detected For every base Station it also shows the its power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram Note that a GPS trigger is necessary to detect the PN offset of the base stations you are scanning GPS trigger is available with the R amp S FSH GPS receiver for example Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the PN offset may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 243 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer ee E Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 5 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 5 5 1 Setting the Base Spreading Factor The number of cod
148. arker on the lowest value of the trace gt Press the MKR gt key gt Press the Set to Peak Set to Next Peak or Set to Minimum softkey The R amp S FSH positions the marker accordingly Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 109 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 6 Removing Markers Remove markers any time you want Removing selected markers gt Select the marker you want to delete with the Select Marker softkey The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens Press the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey Select the Delete Selected menu item vY vV vV Y Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes the marker Deactivating markers If you delete marker 1 M1 all delta markers that are relative to that marker are also deleted Removing delta markers only gt Press the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey gt Select the Delete All Delta menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes all delta markers Removing all markers at the same time gt Press the MARKER key Press the Delete Marker softkey gt Select the Delete All menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH deletes all markers and delta markers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 110 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Mea
149. arz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X pollution severity 2 overvoltage category 2 use only in enclosed spaces max operation altitude 4600 m above sea level max transport altitude 12000 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and of 5 to the nominal frequency 1175 6590 12 02 Page ii R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions 2 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Electrical Safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the power supply matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network 2 If the product does not have a power switch for disconnection from the AC supply network the plug of the connecting cable is regarded as the disconnecting device In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times corresponding to the length of connecting cable approx 2m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable f
150. as celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde amp Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no esta permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otr
151. as failed The results ee Ze Artena Dar Mape are highlighted red Trand aoe e er A complete limit check usually consists of the limit definition of several results LIMITS FAILED The complete limit check only passes MATL oe if every individual limit check also carrier ed Errar eme gege passed In that case the R amp S FSH gheet een shows LIMITS PASSED in the result F tcFch Power ans I display If even one limit has failed the P ccrcH symbol evm I EK P 3CH Power Aba R amp S FSH shows LIMITS FAILED Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 213 General Result Displays of the Digital Modulation Analyzer By default the R amp S FSH tests against default limits These limits have been defined according to the standard gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Limits menu item You can create and edit digital modulation limits with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 Measurements on GSM Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K10 you can perform measurements on downlink GSM signals in accordance to the 3GPP standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the GSM EDGE BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the sig
152. asurements BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 82 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 11 Using Isotropic Antennas The R amp S FSH supports measurements with an isotropic antenna You can use any isotropic antenna available with the R amp S TS EMF system order no 1158 9295 05 Each of those antennas supports a different frequency range between 9 kHz and 6 GHz Test setup The test setup consists of an R amp S FSH and one of the isotropic antennas The necessary cables are provided with the antennas gt Connect the RF cable with the N coaxial connector to the RF input port 1 gt Connect the control cable to the power sensor interface 9 pin D Sub connector with the adapter cable that comes with the antenna If necessary you can connect an additional extension cable R amp S TS EMFZ2 order no 1166 5708 02 Starting the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Isotropic Antenna menu item After you have turned the isotropic antenna on the R amp S FSH uses the isotropic antenna for all measurements Note that when you turn the isotropic antenna on without having selected a transducer factor first the R amp S FSH asks you to select a transducer factor Using transducer factors The isotropic antenna is in effect a transducer Because it has a characteristic frequency response it is necessary to correct the measurement
153. asures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn EeEeEeEeEeEeEeyeyyyeEeEeEey 1175 6590 12 02 Page iv R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 2 Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection PE conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and r
154. ation modes e Auto Low Distortion If this mode is active the R amp S FSH sets the RF attenuation 10 dB higher according to the table below making the stress of the input mixer 10 dB less at the specified reference level If the spectrum is densely occupied with signals e g in a television cable network the input mixer reduces the R amp S FSH inherent spurious products However the inherent noise display of the R amp S FSH increases due to the increased attenuation in front of the input mixer e Auto Low Noise If this mode is active the R amp S FSH sets the RF attenuation 10 dB lower This increases the sensitivity of the R amp S FSH which means that the inherent noise display decreases due to the lower attenuation in front of the input mixer e Manual Manual selection of the attenuation Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 91 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements You can check the status of the RF attenuation and the preamplifier in the measurement setup dialog and the hardware settings area of the display Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON Reference Level RF Attenuation RF Attenuation Low Noise Low Distortion Low Noise Low Distortion gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp softkey gt Select either the Auto Low Distortion or the Auto Low Noise menu item The R amp S FSH sets the attenuation according to the table above gt Select the Manual 0 dB menu
155. blmod 1kB 31 06 2010 16 21 POTERE chimed 1kB 21 08 2010 15 21 gt Select the cable model that you wO at the 31 06 200 15 21 ACC0300 50 cblmod 1 kB 31 06 2010 15 21 are testing HOC78 50J cblmod 1kB 31 05 2010 15 21 HCF12 60 cblmod 1kB 21 06 2010 16 21 H J12 50 cblmod 1 21 08 2010 16 21 gt Confirm the selection with the Free 15 MB WE PE A a RER Select softkey ci The R amp S FSH shows the currently selected cable model in the diagram header gt Select the Deselect Cable Model item from the Cable Config menu if you want to perform measurements without using a particular cable model Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 188 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SS PSSST AL A AAA AAA Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 1 2 Creating a Cable Model The R amp S FSH provides two ways to define customized cable models The first way is to define a cable model with the Cable Model Editor that is part of the R amp S FSH4View software package The R amp S FSH4View is delivered with the R amp S FSH With this software you can define a cable model on a PC and then transfer it to the R amp S FSH Then you can select it just like any other predefined cable model For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 If you do not have access to a PC but still need a cable model that is not stored on the R amp S FSH you can also define the characteristics of a cable temporarily on the R amp S FSH itself
156. cation gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Antenna menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select or disable the antenna gt Select the antenna type you are using or turn using the antenna off Disabled Disables the use of an antenna HL800 Side Selects an antenna connected to the AUX port on the left side of the R amp S FSH for example R amp S HL300 HE300 Top Selects an antenna connected to the power sensor jack on the top of the R amp S FSH for example R amp S HE300 The currently selected antenna model is displayed in the title bar The color of the label indicates the state of the satellite lock of the the GPS receiver of the antenna model For more information on the GPS receiver states see the Quick Start Guide AAA a A A SEN SENSES SESS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 143 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps 5 2 3 2 Using an Audio Signal to Locate Interferers You can configure the R amp S FSH to play back an audio signal when it receives a signal The audio signal changes its volume and frequency depending on the strength of the received signal gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone menu item The R amp S FSH turns the audio signal on The R amp S FSH allows you to define various aspects of this audio signal Defining a squelch level The squelch level defines the signal level above which the audio signal
157. cause measurements with failed limits are not included in this report Using a display line you can use a line and are able to create a measurement report at the same time regardless if any limits have been violated or not The process of turning off a limit line completely is similar to that of selecting a line gt Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey gt Select the Unselect Limit menu item The R amp S FSH deactivates the limit line 3 2 8 2 Performing Limit Checks If limit lines are active the R amp S FSH automatically checks the trace for limit violations after each frequency sweep As long as the signal does not violate the limit line the R amp S FSH shows a Pass message in the measurement diagram As soon as one single value i e one pixel is outside of the limits the R amp S FSH displays a Fail message in the diagram area and in addition sounds a beep A limit checks relates only to the frequency range defined by the limit line not the span Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 118 Configuring Spectrum Measurements Audio signal You can turn the acoustic signal that sounds in case of a limit violation on and off gt Press the Options softkey gt Select the Audio Beep menu item An X in front of the Audio Beep menu item indicates that the beeper is active If the audio beep is active the R amp S FSH beeps each time a limit is violated Limit violation Note that a limit check fail
158. ce are compensated Additionally this mode is faster Selecting the unit of the EVM gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select either the or dB menu item The R amp S FSH shows the EVM in the unit you have selected Displaying the EVM according to standard gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Settings softkey gt Select the EVM According to Standard menu item If the R amp S FSH displays the EVM according to standard the menu item is marked by an X Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 279 R amp S FSH Menu and Softkey Overview General Functions 10 Menu and Softkey Overview This chapter shows an overview of all instrument functions in the form of softkey and menu overviews 10 1 General Functions General functions are those that are available for all operating modes 10 1 1 General R amp S FSH Setup The SETUP key opens the setup menu that contains functionality to set up the R amp S FSH in general and functionality to set up the measurement Detected Accessory BNC 1 measurement and operating mode HL300 Antenna Compass show Compass Info Assign Antenna Switch Magnetic Declination Anten na Service Menu GPS GPS Show GPS Information Coordinate Format GPS Receiver Connected Position Fix of Tracked Satellites signal Quality LAN Port MAC Address Date Time Regional Display Backlight D
159. ce to Fault Mode ccccccceseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 293 Measurement CONNQUIALION EE 293 Frequency en 293 A 293 Ampltude e EE 294 Wes CONO sel 294 Bana e EL BEE 294 Tace FUNCIONA Y EE 295 ELLE E PONE o E A 295 Functions of the Receiver Mode cccccoooocconccccoccnnonononoconoconnnnnannnconnnnnnnnannnnrnrrrnnnnaanas 296 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 6 R amp S FSH 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 3 10 6 4 10 6 5 10 6 6 10 6 7 10 6 8 10 7 10 7 1 10 7 2 10 7 3 10 7 4 10 7 5 10 7 6 10 8 10 8 1 10 8 2 10 8 3 10 8 4 10 8 5 11 Table of Contents Measurement Configuration occccccnccccccconnccnnnoconononnncnonnnononnnannnnnnnnnonononnnennnnnnnnnnnnos 296 Frequency en 296 Sien SOC el EE 296 Ampltude e EE 297 WES COON de e EE 297 Bandwidth Selection minar nas awesardedvadvanceninnd tds 297 ace FUNCIONA E 297 ELE AAA e o O ME RO PORO PO PO POE qt adind Ghatseavomiapab ae teaninesatolaiateivs 298 Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode coocnccconccionccconncccconncconnnonos 299 Measurement CONTQUEAION NEE 299 Frequency Parameters E 299 Ampltude e EE 299 WES COMO AU ON EE 300 Bandwidth Selection ccccccccceeeseessscccccsssssssseeeeceeeeeseeeeesssccccoasessssesseeseeeereceeees 300 Trace leie Te EE 300 Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer ccscccssssssseesseeenseeeseeeenneees 301 Measurement CONNQUIALION EE 301 Frequency en 303 Amplitude Pa
160. ceive frequencies is not considered in the measurement The R amp S FSH shows the results for a frequency scan in a graphical result display The horizontal axis in that display represents the frequency spectrum covered by the scan The vertical axis represents the power levels The power levels for each frequency contained in the scan are represented by a vertical line at the receive frequencies that have been measured This type of display emphasizes the fact that the scan measures single receive frequencies only and not the frequencies between those receive frequencies Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq Scan softkey The R amp S FSH shows the scan result display Screen layout of the scan result display 1 2 08 03 12 16 36 MN Ref 47 0 dBypy eRBW 120 kHz MT 100 ms Trace Clear Write Tmgc Free Hun Detect AMS 100 1 MHz 3 6 dBuV 8 Start 100 kHz Step 10 M z 8 8 8 gt Stop 1 GHz i Le Freg Measurement mode Operating mode Header table Marker Scan results Receiver softkey menu OO P Go h While scanning the R amp S FSH indicates the frequency it is currently measuring with a triangle at the bottom of the diagram SEENEN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 200 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 ANA AN Seno r selecting the Measurement Mode Selecting the trace style The trace style defines the way the trace looks gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Style
161. ch may be outside the visible span An automatic level adjustment will set the attenuation mode to Manual if it has been set to Auto Low Noise or Auto Low Distortion previously You can also determine the reference level manually gt Perform a measurement in spectrum mode with the largest resolution bandwidth 3 MHz and video bandwidth 3 MHz gt Activate the peak detector The trace maximum corresponds to the ideal reference level For more information see Setting the Reference Level on page 89 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 208 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Ref Offset Shows the current reference level offset For more information see Setting a Reference Offset on page 91 Att enuation Shows the current RF attenuation of the R amp S FSH For more information see Setting the RF Attenuation on page 91 Preamp lification Shows the current state of the preamplifier For more information see Using the Preamplifier on page 93 Sweep Shows the current sweep mode You can select from e Single data is captured and results are displayed one at a time e Continuous data is captured and results are displayed continuously For more information see Selecting the Sweep Mode on page 98 Sync Not Found Sync OK Indicates whether synchronization was successful or not To successfully synchronize the R amp S FSH to the signal you ha
162. channel Rho is specified in the CDMA2000 standard It is the normalized correlated power between the measured signal and an ideal reference signal The standard requires that only the pilot channel is measured to get the results for Rho 9 6 2 The PN Scanner If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K47E the PN scanner becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the PN scanner to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its PN offset The PN Scanner shows the PN offset for every base station it has detected For every base Station it also shows the its power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram Note that a GPS trigger is necessary to detect the PN offset of the base stations you are scanning GPS trigger is available with the R amp S FSH GPS receiver for example Trace modes Note that the PN Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the PN offset may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 9 6 3 The Burst Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K47E the Burst Power result display becomes available
163. come available The R amp S FSH also must feature an VSWR bridge in addition to the tracking generator Unlike scalar measurements vector measurements also measure the phase characteristics of a DUT Vector measurements also have a higher dynamic range and accuracy because of the advanced calibration methods that vector measurements provide In addition to normalization vector measurements feature full calibration methods that require a 50 Q termination in addition to an open or short circuit Instead of the characteristics of the VSWR bridge the decisive factor of the quality of results is the quality of the calibration standards Because of the higher dynamic range vector measurements allow more accurate measurements of well matched DUTs at a higher display resolution Vector measurements also unlock more measurement formats and therefore provide more information from different perspectives about the DUT Supplying DC voltage to active DUTs If you are performing measurements on active DUTs e g amplifiers you can supply them with DC voltage by connecting an RF cable to the BIAS ports The DC voltage is fed in from a suitable external power supply max 600 mA max 50 V To measure the antenna coupling of mobile radio base stations the DC voltage must be supplied to two tower mounted amplifiers TMA This is done by applying a suitable voltage at the BIAS 1 and BIAS 2 BNC ports BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 162
164. cts wk es ceed ce acta A 267 de E 207 EE 209 deed 252 Eege 222 Directional power sensor 130 Display configuration Lepechrogram 77 Display elements sisas ies inciso 10 ER Eegeregie 116 DIS OIA An E E A E E 46 Display TANG C vevesstsscnnstvaecicnssventcnedasernenduedeaedanendes 90 175 193 EE Eege 78 Distance Parameters ENEE 191 Distance to taula ai 185 Dual acen in 172 Error vector magnitude O A e e a 250 GOMA2000 suministra 237 254 A e in A 279 A e o O ia sdacatadeGdianGdeeuesa eG esee 19 EVM LTE te 269 Gd le 98 Factory Callbr ON sssini 152 File management 21 A A 31 FM demodulator sssini 115 Forward power display vocaciones 133 Cl DU Red el BE 80 PSS cepa ge Dees tee ascites cues eestor eee es 98 Frequency SOU A r 113 A geese ce T PRE jac AA TEA 120 OW SCI Po ES OO A A IA ET 86 Elle 87 191 SENGS siaa aS 85 127 132 191 Sa SOD ersa E eee 87 191 e HIE e E 88 Gale Se WINGS raspa ippo 100 Gated A asses cseaneetcce aioe eens tx asenessdensetnastsnebsdantes 98 100 GPS ge en E 209 GPS SYMCMONIZ ALON E 246 251 EE 215 DUST DOWN eienenn R ENE 220 carrier frequency error E 221 EVN E 219 EE i E EAE EA E EAA A A E A 219 gq 217 result SUMMAry aaa 216 AA DEN 244 Harmonic distortion E 67 adist SENOS coria iia 68 NATMONICS csi 68 Narmonics Istria 68 he E 68 a EE 76 Hold spectrogram cccccseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeseeeeeeeeeaeneeeeseeees 75 Horizontal avis 85 191 Ir eier 93 A 172 Input cancclla ON un
165. d by the same distance relative to the normal marker Note that this happens only if you move delta marker 2 D2 When moving delta marker 3 D3 only this marker is repositioned Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 69 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements From the values of the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the AM modulation depth The AM modulation depth is the ratio between the power values at the reference marker and at the delta markers When the powers of the two AM side bands are not the same the R amp S FSH uses the mean value of the two sideband values If the R amp S FSH is unable to find any AM modulated a carriers it shows the message No AM modulated carrier found 3 1 8 1 Setting a Threshold You can set a threshold that defines the minimum power level the signal must have If the power of the signal is below the threshold the R amp S FSH will not set the markers and therefore will not calculate the modulation depth gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Threshold softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the threshold gt Enter the threshold value you need The threshold is represented as a horizontal blue line in the diagram area 3 1 8 2 Optimizing the Settings In order to get the best results you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH perf
166. d el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tension preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red se deber considerer el enchufe del cable de conexi n como interruptor En estos casos se deber asegurar que el enchufe siempre sea de f cil acceso de acuerdo con la longitud del cable de conexi n aproximadamente 2 m Los interruptores de funci n o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el ctrica Si los productos sin interruptor est n integrados en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz Nunca conecte e
167. d or it is not connected appropriately the R amp S FSH shows nothing If there are communication problems between the R amp S FSH and the power sensor the R amp S FSH displays one of the following error messages that indicate the possible Cause Error in zeroing signal at sensor A signal was present at the power sensor Unscrew the power sensor from the device when zeroing was performed under test and repeat zeroing Warning Input overloaded The power at the input of the power sensor Reduce the power at the sensor input exceeds the permitted power 23 dBm 200 mW Power sensor hardware error Communication error between the R amp S FSH Unscrew the sensor from the R amp S FSH and and the power sensor check the connectors If the problem persists contact a Rohde amp Schwarz service center Power sensor error The power sensor signals an error to the Contact a Rohde amp Schwarz service center R amp S FSH Unknown power sensor model TheR amp S FSH cannot identify the device connected connected to the power sensor interface Ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 126 R amp S FSH Power Sensors AAA AAA AA TA Using a Power Sensor 4 1 2 Performing and Configuring Measurements After you have connected a power sensor the R amp S FSH immediately starts to measure the signal power Defining the center frequency Power sensors have a memory containing correction values that are dependent on the frequency Hence measur
168. default the most recently saved dataset is highlighted If you need another dataset navigate to the folder or storage device that contains the dataset you need 1 8 2 1 Previewing a Dataset The R amp S FSH provides a preview of datasets The preview is like a screenshot and lets you take a quick look at that measurement and its settings The R amp S FSH does not yet activate the measurement settings of that dataset gt Browse through the available datasets and select the one you want gt Press the Recall softkey The R amp S FSH shows a preview of the measurement contained in the selected dataset The preview shows the measurement results as well as the measurement settings gt Use the rotary knob to browse the previews of all datasets available in the selected folder gt Press the Exit softkey to return to the Recall Dataset dialog box 1 8 2 2 Loading a Dataset If you find a dataset whose settings you need for your current measurement task you can load it gt Press the Activate softkey The R amp S FSH loads the dataset in question and adjusts its measurement settings to those of the dataset e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 28 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 2 3 Quick Recall of Instrument Settings For regular measurement tasks the R amp S FSH allows quick access to previously saved datasets by linking a particular dataset to one of the softkeys Assigning a dataset t
169. define the demodulation volume gt Enter the volume you are comfortable with The demodulation volume is a percentage 0 to 100 with 100 being full volume For more information on general volume control see the Quick Start Guide Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 115 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 7 Using Display Lines Like markers display lines help you to determine the level of the signal A display line is a straight line that runs horizontally and corresponds to a certain level value You can move the display line to each pixel in the display This means that the accuracy and exact vertical position of the display line depends on the resolution of the vertical axis With a display range of 100 dB for example each pixel corresponds to 0 3 dB In that case the accuracy of the display line is 0 3 dB If you enter a value with a higher resolution the R amp S FSH rounds that value You can also move the display line with the rotary knob or the cursor keys The step size for movement with the rotary knob is one pixel The step size for the cursor keys is 10 of the display range gt Press the LINES key gt Press the Display Line softkey The R amp S FSH displays the display line as a blue horizontal line It shows the vertical position of the line in a table above the diagram area When you activate the display line the R amp S FSH also opens an input field to define
170. delete old data with the file manager For more information see Deleting Datasets on page 30 The results for a measurement set consist of a number of files each file corresponding to one of the performed measurements For easy evaluation the R amp S FSH includes the name of the measurement as defined in the wizard dialog or R amp S FSH4View in the file name All result files that belong to a measurement set are stored in the same directory The directory is named after the measurement name and site The syntax is sitename_measurement_ The R amp S FSH adds numbers in ascending order to files as well as directories if you perform a measurement or measurement set more than once BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 40 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard Installing Firmware Options 2 1 3 Evaluating Results The R amp S FSH4View software provides functionality to evaluate results and compile measurement reports However before you can start to evaluate the results you have to download the results to your computer gt Select the Wizard Result Control function with the Et button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the measurement set s to download gt Select the measurement set you want to upload gt Copy the files with the gt gt button Now that the results are available you can start to compile a measurement report with the R amp S FSH4View gt Select the Report Gene
171. displays only the maximum power levels that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The max peak detector is useful for measurements on pulse or FM signals for example e Min Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays only the minimum power level that were measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The min peak detector displays sine signals with the correct level and suppresses noise Therefore it is useful to find sine signals in the vicinity of noise Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 103 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements e Sample If the sample detector is active the R amp S FSH shows one random power level that was measured in the frequency range covered by a pixel The sample detector is useful for measurements in the time domain span O Hz as it provides the only way to represent the timing of the video signal correctly In the frequency domain the sample detector is a good way to measure noise power because noise usually has a uniform spectrum with a normal amplitude distribution Signals may get lost if you are using the sample detector for measurements with a span that is greater than RBW 631 e RMS If the RMS detector is active the R amp S FSH measures the spectral power over one pixel In case of power measurements the RMS detector always shows the true power of a signal regardless of the shape of the signal The RM
172. e R amp S FSH K43 selecting the Measurement Mode Performing a channel scan Instead of a frequency scan you can also perform a channel scan A channel scan is based on the contents of a channel table In case of measurements based on a channel table the set of receive frequencies or channels is defined in a channel table 08 03 12 11 25 In a channel table you can define the Ref 47 0 dBpV cRBW 120kHz MT 100ms Trace Clear Write receive frequencies as you wish The number of receive frequencies depends on the number of channels included in the channel table and there may even be gaps between the receive frequencies gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Channel Mode softkey Start 911 3 MHz Stop 959 9 MHz or Marker gt Press the Channel Table softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the channel table For more information on working with channel tables see Working with Channel Tables on page 120 8 1 2 2 Using Markers The scan measurement in receiver mode features the same marker functionality as that in Spectrum mode For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 107 E Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 202 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode In addition to the single frequency measurement and the scan measurement the receiver mode al
173. e slot By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for slot 0 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Slot Number menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the slot gt Enter the number of the timeslot you want to analyze The R amp S FSH adjusts the results accordingly Note that you can select only slots that are assigned to the downlink The location of downlink slots is defined by the switching point 9 7 6 6 Changing the Code Power By default the application displays the absolute power of the code channels in the Code Domain Power result display Alternatively you can display the power relative to the RF channel power gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey gt Select the Relative to RF Channel Power menu item The code domain power values are now relative to the RF channel power Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 265 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer eege Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 6 7 Selecting a Code Channel The Code Domain Analyzer contains results for a particular code channel By default the R amp S FSH shows the results for the first active code channel in the analyzed time slot gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Code Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a code channel Enter the number of the code channel you want
174. e alocada 225 Vector measurement NEEN 150 SCLAMDIING COJO E 232 VOCA E 89 174 spreading Tac anida 244 Video bandwidth E 95 Weighting mode AA 133 ils ele CEET 98 A nn A 85 191 A 102 ValS aorta ceo 89 174 nn 115 ZENO Ee E o A E A E A E T 88 WO DMA E 222 ZOOO EE 127 Antenna diversity escorias 233 AOO A o E 170 carrier frequency error E 224 ZVHView hanne Sorteamos donde eco 225 cable MONA vna ainda vean 189 code domain asta 225 Channel table oooccocccccncccncnncnncnnnnnnnn cnn nana conan 120 176 a 225 iaa Ua oe edn eve E es lt a 117 177 De klot Ee 225 Measurement wizard occccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininnninineninonoss 33 e 224
175. e lines 5 Occupied bandwidth measurement softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 47 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 If you make changes to the settings or create datasets note that e the span is always coupled to the channel bandwidth Changes to either of those automatically adjust the other 5 x channel bandwidth e the resolution bandwidth should be betwe
176. e mechanical drawings Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided on the internet Internet Site The internet site at http www rohde schwarz com product fsh htm provides the most up to date information on the R amp S FSH The most recent manuals are available as printable PDF files in the download area Also provided for download are firmware updates including the corresponding release notes instrument drivers current data sheets application notes and image versions BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 8 R amp S FSH Conventions Used in the Documentation Conventions Used in the Documentation The following conventions are used throughout the R amp S R amp S FSH Operating Manual Typographical conventions Convention Description Graphical user interface elements All names of graphical user interface elements both on the screen and on the front and rear panels such as dialog boxes softkeys menus options buttons etc are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters and enclosed by quotation marks Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics File names commands File names commands coding samples a
177. e period of the gate length After the gate has closed the R amp S FSH waits with the measurement until the next gate signal happens The delay time and gate length are represented by vertical red lines in the diagram area gt After setting the gate delay and gate length exit the gate settings menu with the Exit softkey The R amp S FSH returns to the frequency domain provided it was active before setting up the gated trigger The original span is restored The R amp S FSH is ready to perform measurements with an accurately set gate H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 101 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 5 Working with Traces The trace menu contains all functions available to customize the trace display 3 2 5 1 Selecting the Trace Mode The R amp S FSH provides several trace modes The trace mode defines the way the R amp S FSH writes the trace e Clear Write In its default state the R amp S FSH overwrites the trace after each sweep You can apply all detectors in this mode e Average The trace is the result of the moving average over several sweeps The R amp S FSH calculates the moving average of the power levels for each pixel over a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999 Averaging reduces the effects of noise but has no effects on sine signals Using the trace averaging therefore is a good way to detect signals in the vicinity of noise You can apply a
178. e span automatically BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 50 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 4 Power Measurements on TDMA Signals When TDMA time division multiple access methods are used e g for GSM several users share a channel Each user is assigned a period of time or timeslot With the TDMA power measurement you can determine the power over one of the timeslots The TDMA power measurement is a measurement in the time domain span 0 Hz You can start it on an external or video trigger and specify the power measurement time To prevent incorrect power measurements in the time domain make sure that the whole signal is within the selected resolution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is too small the displayed power will be lower than the actual power gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the TDMA Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the TDMA power Two vertical lines define the measurement range Screen layout for TDMA power measurements Oo 18 11 10 16 45 EH Ref 50 dBm ABW 300 kHz SWT 1 me Trace Clears Write Att 25 de eVEW 1MHz Trig Video Detect Sample Burst Length Burst Length GED Spanc ero Span Tr Standard lt A CC CT Burst emm Mode Adjust SWWP Tirma Length Center GHz Standard TDMA power Measurement limits Trigger delay Trigger level M
179. e spectrum result display e g with the help of markers In addition to the time line horizontal marker you can also use vertical markers in the spectrogram With the help of the marker and the time line you are able to find the exact moment when a specific event has occurred in the spectrum BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 81 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Press the MARKER key CE Ee Art 0 dB VBW 1 MHz Trig Free Run Detect RMS The R amp S FSH activates a marker aoe eech hp 00 00 57 811 and sets H on the peak level of the currently displayed spectrum CT gt Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to move the marker on the horizontal axis to the frequency you want to analyze or enter the frequency directly with the number keys Span 3 94 MHz gram Time Line gt Press the Select Time Line softkey and browse through the spectrums using the rotary knob or the cursor keys until the spectrum of interest is displayed in the upper window The time stamp of the selected time line gives you a precise indication on when the event shown in the spectrum occurred For more information on marker functionality see e Using Markers on page 195 Switching back to active spectrogram recording To resume recording of a new spectrogram Press the Live Update softkey at any time you are in playback mode The R amp S FSH switches back to performing live me
180. e timeslot consist of two data fields a midamble and a guard period The table contains e the absolute channel power in dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB of the data parts and midamble parts of a timeslot Data Power Power of the data parts in the timeslot you have selected The R amp S FSH shows the power of both data parts together and the power of each individual data part Data 1 Power and Data 2 Power Midamble Power Power of the midamble part in the timeslot you have selected AA AA A O a A A AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AA AAA AAA AAA A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 255 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer ee Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout of the code domain power result display Ref 30 0 dBm Am 5 dB Sweep Cort wen Ref Of 0 0 dB Preamp On scrCode 0 Trace Clear Wire EN h Phases Fixed Code Por Abs Switch Point 3 Max Users 16 Center Frequency 1 GHz Code SF 8 16 MadTypa Urkr un Slot 4 Symbol EVM 099 Y RF Channel Power 308 dBm i Composite E 0 67 amp Code Power dBm d Start Code 1 i a Stop Code 16 NN em hay 7 I Im a g
181. ease notes for each new firmware version The release notes include instructions on how to perform a firmware update 1 10 Installing Firmware Options You can equip the R amp S FSH with several firmware options to enable additional operating modes or special measurements For more information see the Quick Start Guide Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 31 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard SSS E Installing Firmware Options 2 Working with the Measurement Wizard When testing antennas and cables it is often necessary to perform a sequence of standardized and recurring measurements often in an environment that is not easily accessible To make sure that measurements are performed as required and to avoid a constant adjustment of parameters the R amp S FSH features a measurement wizard The measurement wizard combines several measurement configurations to a sequence of measurements or measurement set Because all relevant parameters have been set prior to the actual measurement and cannot be changed once the measurement procedure has begun the wizard is a good way to avoid mistakes and save time when setting up measurements This chapter describes the functionality of the measurement wizard For details on the individual measurements you can perform with the wizard refer to the corresponding chapters Spectrum Analyzer Mode on page 42 Power Sensors on page 124 Network Analyzer Mode on page 135 Distance to Fau
182. easurement time TDMA power measurement softkey menu NN OO OO P WD BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 51 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 4 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory When starting the measurement in the default configuration the R amp S FSH automatically activates the GSM EDGE standard However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal settings for the selected standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 4 2 Setting the Burst Length The burst length is the measurement time that the R amp S FSH performs measurements with The burst length can be equal
183. echargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed 2 Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth 3 Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used 4 Keep cells and batteries out of the hands of children If a cell or a battery has been swallowed seek medical aid immediately 5 Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted 6 Ifa cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid 7 Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries tha
184. ected for this calibration kit FSH Z28 l Press Continue to start the calibration If you are using another calibration kit cancel the process and select the right one For more information see Selecting a calibration kit on page 156 gt Else press the Continue softkey an Open first to port 1 5 then to For calibration please connect an OPEN to Port 1 port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration gt Firmly connect the Open of the calibration standard to the ports P You can abort the calibration any time by pressing the Cancel softkey start calibration Calibrating OPEN The R amp S FSH calibrates the open Please wait gt Disconnect the Open con nect a Short fi rst to po rt 1 j For calibration please connect a SHORT to Port 1 then to port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration gt Firmly connect the Short of the calibration standard to the ports Press the Continue softkey to start calibration The R amp S FSH calibrates the Short Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 155 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode AAA AAA AAA AAA ee Calibrating Measurements gt Disconnect the Short Next the R amp S FSH asks you to connect a Load 50 Q termination For calibration please connect a LOAD to Port 1 first to port 1 then to port 2 l Press Continue to start the calibration gt Firmly connect the Load of the calibration standard to port 1 Pre
185. ection su iiiinccvoijusenieespracirsdaccatindpeadyaisacantivanneivauaiuantendnactsedaneeniaboveniinds 282 E Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 5 R amp S FSH 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 2 6 10 2 7 10 2 8 10 2 9 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 3 8 10 3 9 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 5 10 5 1 10 5 2 10 5 3 10 5 4 10 5 5 10 5 6 10 5 7 10 5 8 10 6 Table of Contents Frequency Parameters siii da id 284 e 284 Amplitude Parameters ccccccccsssesececceeeseceecceeeeeceeseaeseeeeeseuaaseeeeseeaaeeeeessaageeessessaaaes 285 MEP CO e O EE 285 Bana WIGS le CHO EE 285 Trace FUNCION Inrena il iia iq 286 Display and Lmt LIMES usaran EEEE 286 Eege 286 Functions of the Network Anal yZet ccccssssseecsesseeesenseeeeensseeeeenseeeeenseeseenseessoeas 288 Measurement CONNQUIATION NEE 288 Frequency Parameters E 288 Spas CIS CUO dar set 289 Ampltude e EE 289 Sweep Configuration ccccccooccnnnccnnncccccnonnncconnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnanas 289 Bandwidth Selection vasisincasssseosivedvarcucericanuntveretawasiavsivadiandeaasiaanenteoassawesasiedevesaaduadend cans 289 Trace Functionally EE 290 Big BE 290 ELE E 290 Functions of the Power Meter scccccsssesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeaseeeeeeneaseeseneneaneees 292 Power Meter Measuremente AANEREN 292 Frequency en 292 Ampltude e E 292 WES Om ION UI OM EE 292 Functions of the Distan
186. ed in the channel table and is the frequency corresponding to the selected channel Selecting a channel Entering a center start or stop frequency is not possible anymore Instead you select a channel The R amp S FSH then adjusts the center start and stop frequency according to the channel table gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Frequency softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the channel Enter the channel you want to perform measurements on The R amp S FSH changes the channel according to the channel table Channel numbers are assigned to frequencies as follows The first channel is assigned a channel number and a frequency All subsequent channels have ascending numbers The frequency spacing between channels is fixed It can also be negative Le the center frequency of the R amp S FSH decreases with ascending channel number In transmission systems containing gaps in the frequency range as in the case of television for example a channel table can comprise multiple ranges Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 120 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using Transducer Factors 3 4 Using Transducer Factors The frequency dependent transducer factor of transducers and antennas can be directly considered in the measurement result A transducer factor consists of a numeric value and a unit The R amp S FSH corrects the level values of the trace by the values of the transducer At the sa
187. een 50 and 50 to shift the window horizontally Entering negative values moves the rectangle to the left positive values move it to the right gt Press the Move Y softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter a value between 50 and 50 to shift the window vertically Entering negative values moves the rectangle up positive values move it down Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 170 R amp S FSH gt Press the Zoom Active softkey Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 04 01 11 15 03 ES REW 10kHz SWT 38 ms Trace Clear Write Att 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample The R amp S FSH now zooms in on the area covered by the zoom window You can position the zoom window more accurately with the Move X and Move Y softkeys as described To deactivate the zoom functionality press the Zoom E Active softkey again Center 1 95 GHz Move X Move Factor Using markers In addition to the standard marker functionality the Smith chart also features several marker output formats dB Magnitude Phase Shows the magnitude in dB and the phase at the current marker position Lin Magnitude Phase Rho Shows the converted magnitude in and the phase in rho at the current marker position Real Imag Rho Shows the real and imaginary components at the current marker position R jX Shows the real and imaginary components of the impedance at the marker positi
188. efines the amplitude of the reference line The unit of the reference is dB The R amp S FSH indicates the position of the reference value with a yellow triangle at the vertical axis if When you change the reference value the R amp S FSH adjusts the labels of the vertical axis Changing the reference value changes the vertical position of the trace lt does not change the position of the reference line gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref softkey gt Enter the reference value you want or move the reference with the rotary knob The R amp S FSH sets up the display accordingly Defining the display range The display range defines the scale of the vertical axis and therefore the amplitude between two horizontal grid lines The unit depends on the measurement format When you change the display range you can increase or decrease the amplitude the R amp S FSH displays and e g include signal parts that are outside the displayed screen area The position of the reference value and the trace do not change gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select one of the menu items to select the display range you want Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 193 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SSS PSSST AAA AAA AAA Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests Adjusting the vertical axis automatically The R amp S FSH provides an automatic scaling routine that scales the vertical axis in a
189. efore data is saved via the Distance Interval menu item e Every sweep Saves the data of all measurement sweeps that are performed Storage device To use the Save on Event functionality you need an SD card or USB stick to store the data on The internal memory would probably not be sufficient gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Recording Storage menu item gt From the dropdown menu select the storage device you prefer SD card or USB device Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 20 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 Managing Datasets The R amp S FSH provides functionality to manage save restore etc datasets available in its internal memory or an external storage device The USB interface that supports the use of memory sticks is available for models with serial numbers 105000 and higher Datasets Basically the R amp S FSH supports various types of datasets The instructions below primarily describe managing datasets that you create on the R amp S FSH during measurements for example measurement results and configurations Note that these datasets have the file extension set Datasets with the file extension set are an image of measurement results and configurations Thus you can subsequently reproduce the context of the measurement You can use datasets for documentation for example or use them for a more detailed analysis
190. el readout the R amp S FSH provides several more complex marker functions in spectrum analyzer mode Deactivating marker functions Selecting a marker function again while it is still active turns that marker function off Measuring the Noise Power Density The marker noise function calculates the noise power density at the marker position in dBm Hz The R amp S FSH includes several variables in the calculation of the noise power density including the trace pixel values the resolution bandwidth the detector and the level display mode absolute or relative To stabilize the noise power display the R amp S FSH uses the pixel the marker is on and four pixels to the right and four pixels to the left of the marker pixel Noise power density can provide useful information when you are measuring noise or digitally modulated signals However you will get valid results only if the spectrum in the vicinity of the marker has a flat frequency response When measuring the noise power density on discrete signals results are not valid ais 10 17 12 gt Press the MARKER Key A Bet 210 dBm RBW 200 Vis SWT 20me Trace Clears Write F Att 0 de VEN 3 MHz Trig Free Run Detect RS 881 dBenu H gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the Noise menu item The R amp S FSH shows the level at the marker frequency in dBm Hz If you are using a delta marker for the measurement the results have MAMI the uni
191. elow show a weak sine signal In the first picture it is measured with a large video bandwidth and in the second with a narrow video bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 308 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer Spectrum 28 05 08 07 38 lt Spectrum 28 05 08 07 39 T 200ms Trace Clear Write amp Ref 60 0 dBm RBW 100 kHz SWT 200ms_ Trace Clear Write rig Free Run Detect Auto Peak Art 0 dB VBW Tri Free Run Detect Auto Peak 33333333 AE QS Center 97 3 MHz Span 800 kHz Center 97 3 MHz Span 800 kHz RBW RBW VBW VBW RBW VBW VBW Limiting the video bandwidth smoothes the trace considerably This makes it much easier to determine the level of the measured signal The detector comes after the video filter The detector combines the measured spectrum so that it can be represented as one pixel in the trace The R amp S FSH uses 631 pixels to form the trace Le the whole measured spectrum has to be represented using just 631 pixels Common types of spectrum analyzer detectors are the peak detector PEAK the sample detector SAMPLE and the RMS detector RMS An Auto Peak detector which simultaneously displays the maximum peak and the minimum peak is usually also provided The Fig below explains how these detectors work Level Maximum RMS Sample Minimum The figure above shows 30
192. els the R amp S FSH shows the powers of each channel in a list below the marker list The channel itself is marked by red transmission channels or green adjacent channels vertical lines Screen Layout for ACLR measurements Ret 20 0 dam RAW 30kHz SVVT 100 ms Trace Clear Write Art 0 de WBW 300 kHz Trg Free Hun Detect AMS 01040835 GHz 530 dBm La iar AN den Adj Ch L rgeeg Upper Adj Cha 4 3490 49 4 de Alti Adj 30 0 A0 D 50 0 50 0 70 0 80 0 30 0 DT LES Center 1 GHz l l a SL eae oe E E wie EP Ren Standard Span 26 224 MHz Adjust setings Unst Standard Marker information Limit check information Channel information TX channel red line Adjacent channel green line Alternate channels green lines Marker blue line ACLR softkey menu OO OD JO Om PS ON Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 54 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements The predefined standards are the same as for channel power measurements 3GPP WCDMA cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1x systems However you can also customize the settings to set up the R amp S FSH for other radio communication standards You can define the settings directly on the R amp S FSH or define and manage them using the R amp S FSH4View software When customizing settings make sure to consider the following points to get valid and accurate measurement results e Reference level Make sure not to ove
193. ement gt Press the Yes softkey if changes are required and select new cable characteristics before proceeding with the measurement gt Press the No softkey if changes are not required and proceed with the measurement After each measurement step you have several options Continue with the next measurement Continue softkey Finishes the current measurement and begins with the next measurement by showing the necessary preparations Repeat the current measurement Repeat Meas softkey Repeats the current measurement e g if the results don t match your expectations and you want to validate the results Interrupt the measurement set sequence Interrupt Wizard softkey Interrupting the sequence of measurements may become necessary if the measurement doesn t yield the expected results e g violated limit lines In that case you can interrupt the measurement sequence and try to find the origin of the problem by using different settings or measurements than those defined in the wizard When you interrupt the wizard sequence the complete functionality is available as if you would not use the wizard When you interrupt a measurement sequence the R amp S FSH keeps the results of measurements you have already performed When you are finished reconfiguring the measurement press the WIZARD key and resume the measurement sequence with the Resume Sequence softkey BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23
194. ement provides special markers labeled P1 to Px The R amp S FSH activates and positions these special markers automatically after displaying the trace Each of these markers marks the peak level in each SEM subrange Thus the number of markers depends on the number of subranges defined for the Spectrum Emission Mask and in turn depends on the standard you are measuring against The numerical marker information frequency and level for these markers is part of the SEM list Markers P1 to Px are fix and always remain on the peak level of the corresponding subrange If you d like to analyze other locations on the trace use normal marker and deltamarker functionality For more information see Using Markers and Deltamarkers on page 107 3 1 6 1 Selecting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard
195. ement results are the most accurate for signals whose frequency you know Note that the R amp S FSH maintains the center frequency that you have set in another operating mode In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor frequency If you want to perform measurements on another known signal you can change the power sensor frequency manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq softkey An input field to define the frequency opens Enter the frequency of the signal The R amp S FSH transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings Zeroing the power sensor Offset voltages and currents have most effect on the power readout when measuring low powers You can compensate for these offsets by zeroing the power sensor Do not apply power during the zeroing process as the power sensor cannot distinguish between external powers and internal offsets Press the Zero softkey The R amp S FSH asks you not to apply any signals to the power sensor during Before zeroing the Power Sensor please the zeroing process remova all signals from the sensor input Press Continue to start zeroing gt Disconnect the power sensor from any signal sources Press the Continue softkey to start zeroing Press Cancel to abort zeroing for example if you cannot disconnect the signal source The R amp S FSH immediately starts power sensor zeroing R amp S FSH shows t
196. en 1 and 4 of the channel bandwidth This ensures that the occupied bandwidth is measured with high accuracy e the video bandwidth must be at least three times the resolution bandwidth This prevents incorrect results due to the compression of signal peaks by the video filter e you use the RMS detector if possible This ensures that the power measurement is always correct irrespective of the waveform being investigated e the sweep time must be set so that the result is stable If you increase the sweep time the R amp S FSH also increases the integration time for the RMS detector and thus ensures more stable measured values BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 48 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 2 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal bandwidth it is still possible to overload the R amp S FSH even if the trace is within the measurement diagram To prevent an overload perform the measurement with the largest resolution bandwidth possible using the peak detector If you set these parameters it is not possible for the trace to exceed the reference level To simplify opera
197. ence signal overview contains the power and EVM for each antenna The number of results depends on the number of antennas you are measuring 1 2 or 4 In addition the R amp S FSH shows the Time Alignment Error vor each antenna The Time Alignment Error is the deviation of an antenna from the reference antenna The reference antenna is antenna 1 The power values are normalized to one resource element or one subcarrier respectively The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes If you know the cell ID you can synchronize the R amp S FSH with the reference signal Synchronizing with the reference signal gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Reference Signal menu item The R amp S FSH synchronizes itself with the reference signal Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 271 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer eet Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 2 The Constellation Diagram If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the constellation diagram becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Constellation Diagram menu item The R amp S FSH starts the constellation diagram Screen layout of the constellation diagram Ref 20 0 dBm Sweep Single Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB Preamp Off Raf Offset 0 0 dB AF Channel Pwr 4 02 dim Overall EVM s9 Cell
198. ency offset that arithmetically shifts the center frequency to higher or lower frequencies Thus the R amp S FSH displays the input frequency of the DUT Positive frequency offset is possible in the range from 1 Hz to 100 GHz in steps of 1 Hz The maximum negative frequency offset depends on the start frequency you have set The start frequency taking into account the frequency offset is always 2 0 Hz Press the FREQ key gt Press the Freq Offset softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the frequency offset gt Enter the frequency offset you need The R amp S FSH adds the frequency offset to the center frequency you have set A red dot at the center frequency display indicates that a frequency offset has been set BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 86 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 1 4 Defining a Start and Stop Frequency Defining a start an stop frequency is best suited for example for measurements on harmonics or signals whose exact frequency is unknown gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Start Freq softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the start frequency gt Enter the start frequency you need gt Seta stop frequency with the Stop Freq softkey The R amp S FSH adjusts the horizontal axis according to your input beginning with the start frequency and ending with the stop frequency If you have entered a stop frequency that
199. ens an input field to select an ID gt Enter a number between 0 and 2 to select an ID The R amp S FSH now shows the results to that cell identity gt You can always return to automatic detection by selecting the Auto menu item 9 8 5 4 Selecting the Subframe Configuration for TDD Signals According to the standard the R amp S FSH provides 7 configurations that each covers a complete LTE frame and consists of 10 subframes gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the UL DL Configuration menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains the configurations gt Select the TDD configuration you need Each configuration is made up out of 10 of the following abbreviations e D stands for a downlink subframe e U stands for a uplink subframe e S stands for a special subframe A configuration for a frame therefore would be e g DSUUU DSUUU Note that this is available with option R amp S FSH K51 TDD measurements only AA AA A O A ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 277 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Fee Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 5 5 Selecting the Synchronization Signal The synchronization signal selects the way the R amp S FSH synchronizes to the LTE signal By default the R amp S FSH automatically determines the type of synchronization signal to use Alternatively you can select the synchroniztaion signal manually You can either synchronize to the PSY
200. ent is able to locate faults in a cable accurately To keep this accuracy the R amp S FSH also accounts for any attenuation that occurs over distance in a Cable If you are measuring the cable only make sure to terminate the other end into a load gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the DTF menu item The R amp S FSH calculates the distance to cable faults The figure shows the results of a DTF measurement The peaks that the trace shows at the marker positions are possible faults Depending on the distance you can also get an idea of Laf TED Ak A i Start l 20 Center 1 18053 GHz the component that is defective MESETA econ Transmission Teen p 311 521 Cable Loss Marker 1 for example shows a defect in the cable Marker 2 shows a fault at the end of the cable probably a bad or loose connection 7 1 3 Spectrum Measurements The spectrum measurement provides an overview of the spectrum of the DUT without the necessity to change the operating mode This measurement is well suited for a quick check if there are any interfering signals that may impair results before you start the actual measurement gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrum menu item The R amp S FSH shows the current spectrum Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 185 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EA AAA AAA AAA Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 4 Selecting the Measurement
201. equency Error on page 251 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet Peak to Average Shows the difference between the peak power and the average power of the signal crest factor PN Found The PN offset found during auto PN offset operation Tau Tau is specified in the CDMA2000 standard It shows the timing error of the signal The maximum offset is specified at 10 us Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data 9 6 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results specific to one or more channels The table contains e the absolute channel power in dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB e the channel power in relation to the pilot channel in dB for the pilot channel PICH the MAC channel and the data channel The absolute and relative channel power is an average over the time the channel is active in the measured slot In addition to the powers of the channels the channel results also show quality parameters for the pilot channel PICH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 249 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals EVM Error vector magnitude EVM of the pilot channel in The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideal reference signal An EVM of 0 means a perfect signal Rho Quality parameter Rho of the pilot
202. er level in the selected unit Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 46 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth The proper operation of a transmission network requires that all transmitters adhere to the bandwidths assigned to them The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth that contains a specified percentage of the entire power of the transmitter Numerous standards require a occupied bandwidth of 99 Therefore this is the default setting If you need another percentage for the occupied bandwidth you can set values from 10 to 99 9 After entering the channel bandwidth the R amp S FSH automatically selects the measurement parameters so that you can attain the best result gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Occupied BW menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the occupied bandwidth Two vertical lines show the occupied bandwidth Screen layout for the occupied bandwidth 13711710 O a Ref 2 2 dom RBW 30 kHz SWT 22 Trace Clear Write vw Att 20 dB VEW 300 kHz Top Free Run Detect AMS O 4 166667 DU ET geg SC B E R E F 2 2 e Ss d F a 3 Pai Pa Lef F Lenger GHz Span 25 MHz Standard Adjust BW 1 Standard 2 Occupied bandwidth numerical 3 Channel bandwidth 4 Power percentage 5 Occupied bandwidth graphical blu
203. er sensor model Reference for relative power measurements Power offset Measurement time Readout of the measured power Analog readout of the measured power Measurement frequency Power sensor softkey menu 0 JO OU PS Go b i Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 125 R amp S FSH Power Sensors EE Using a Power Sensor 4 1 1 Connecting a Power Sensor The R amp S FSH controls and powers the power sensors via a special interface on the top of the instrument You can also connect a power sensor via the USB interface on the right If you are using the R amp S FSH Z1 and Z18 power sensors connect the power sensor cable to the power sensor interface and screw it into position Power sensors of the R amp S NRP product line are controlled via the USB interface with a passive USB adapter After connecting the power sensor to the R amp S FSH you can connect the DUT to the N connector of the power sensor Risk of damage to the power sensor Before you start to work with the power sensor make sure that the continuous power applied to the input of the power sensor does not exceed a certain level Refer to the documentation of the power sensor for more information on the maximum input power If the R amp S FSH recognizes a power sensor it sets up a connection via the interface and after a few seconds shows the measured power lt displays the type of the power sensor in the display header If no power sensor has been connecte
204. erating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 89 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 2 2 Setting a Display Range The display range determines the scaling or resolution of the vertical axis In the default state the display range is a logarithmic scaling over a 100 dB This corresponds to 10 dB per grid division The R amp S FSH provides other display ranges that either increase or decrease the resolution of the vertical axis However increasing resolution does not increase the accuracy of for example the marker level readout but only makes it easier to read values off the trace You can also select a linear scale for the vertical axis In that case the power levels are expressed as a percentage of the reference level Linear scaling is useful to display AM modulated carriers in the time domain for example gt Press the AMPT key Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the display range gt Select the display range you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly 3 2 2 3 Selecting the Display Unit By default the vertical axis and therefore the reference level is scaled in dBm However the units dBmV dBuV Watt and Volt are also available Selecting the right unit is relevant for the marker level display because the unit of the marker level is the same as that of the reference level gt Press the AMPT key Press the Unit softkey
205. es increase the level negative values reduce it To ensure that the trace is always within the diagram the R amp S FSH adjusts the reference level accordingly The reference level is shifted by the maximum transducer value in the positive or negative direction 3 4 3 Frequency Range of Transducer If the set frequency range is wider than the span in which a transducer is defined the R amp S FSH assumes the transducer values outside the defined range to be zero 3 4 4 Data Sets Containing Transducer Factors The R amp S FSH stores data sets together with any transducer factors that may have been active for the measurement in question When such a dataset is recalled the associated transducer factor s are switched on as well Transducer factors recalled as part of a data set do however not appear in the list of transducer factors Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 123 R amp S FSH Power Sensors Using a Power Sensor 4 Power Sensors For highly accurate power measurements you can connect a power sensor to the R amp S FSH and perform measurements 4 1 Using a Power Sensor A power sensor measures the power in the frequency range defined in the data sheet of the power sensor This means that you can measure both sine signals and modulated signals precisely over a large dynamic range The R amp S FSH supports the following power sensors The information in brackets indicates if the power sensor is connected via the power sensor port or
206. es the R amp S FSH displays in the diagram depends in addition to the signal constellation itself on the base spreading factor you have set gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey Select either the 64 or 128 menu item The R amp S FSH applies the corresponding spreading factor to the measurement A base spreading factor of 64 results in a display of 64 codes on the x axis 0 to 63 a base spreading factor of 128 in a display of 128 codes on the x axis 0 to 127 In the code domain analyzer result display the number of displayed codes changes accordingly Ret 0 0 dom Hadamard Swap Single Am 2048 Preamp OH Trg F En Canter Frequency I GHz A bal re Piles Beni D doe Hadamard Sw Single z Aer 2048 Freame Of Trig HE GHI Pilot Power Rad te Pilet Canter Ieegu p e Channel Number Syne Power Hel va Pier Channel Band Paga Power Fal ep Piles Carrer Freg Error NIE 124 HI ec 50 Chancel Huasbg Swe Por Rel te Pier Channel Band Pago Power Ral to Piles Caner Free Ener Channel Power EED dim GE Ag B KT WE ST KT KE WE tha WE 259 KE KT 430 BT Take care of setting the base spreading factor of the code domain to either 64 or 128 If you set the base spreading factor to 64 for channels with a base spreading factor of 128 code class 7 an alias power may be displayed in the Code Domain Power result display because of the ambiguity of the Hadamard Matrix An alias power is
207. ess expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product Is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product 10 For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage 1175 6590 12 02 Page iii R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions 11 Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock 12 Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries 13 Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury 14 Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply ne
208. ess the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Set K Manually menu item gt Enter the maximum number of allowed users Performing a search for the current number of users If you don t know the number of users currently served the R amp S FSH is able to determine the supported number of users by itself gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item in the Maximum Users K category With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the supported maximum number of users Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 264 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 6 4 Defining the Switching Point A TD SCDMA subframe contains two switching points where the signal switches from downlink to uplink or vice versa The first switching point is fix after the guard period of the special time slot the second switching point is arbitrary and is between one of the last six time slots The switch point is thus a number between 0 and 6 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Set Switch Point Manually menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter the switching point gt Enter the number of the time slot after which the switching point occurs 9 7 6 5 Selecting a Time Slot In the several result result displays the R amp S FSH shows the power of a particular tim
209. et softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the wizard defintion file gt Select the file that contains the Wizard measurement set that you require Measurement Definition VSWR Test i U gt Confirm the selection with the REES Select softkey gp Comments The R amp S FSH returns to the Cable Definition for Antenna amp Cable Test Use Wizard Cable Settings No measurement wizard dialog box It Cable Model now displays information about the Gen measurement set you have just Calibration Settings load ed Use Stored Calibrations Yas S P Meas Set Meas Set Manager Wizard The dialog box contains the following information e Measurement Definition Name of the wizard definition file currently in use Pressing the ENTER key on this field has the same effect as the Load Meas Set softkey e Measurement Description Short description of the measurement task This is a read only field that shows the description as defined with the R amp S FSH4View software e User Name of the person that performs the measurement e Number of Sequence Steps to Perform Number of individual measurements in the measurement sequence The field allows you to reduce the number of individual measurements and perform only those measurements that are really necessary If you reduce the number of measurements the R amp S FSH omits the last measurements in the sequence You can edit this field only if you have turned on
210. f 10 digits When you enter the wrong PIN three times in a row you have to enter the Master PIN to unlock the R amp S FSH By default the Master PIN is the same as the OEM Master PIN but you can define a User Master PIN If you unlock the R amp S FSH with the User Master PIN the PIN is automatically reset to its default value 0000 e OEM Master PIN code made up out of 10 digits If you have defined a User Master PIN and enter the wrong User Master PIN five times in a row or have not defined a User Master PIN and enter the wrong PIN three times in a row the only remaining way to unlock the R amp S FSH is with the OEM Master PIN The OEM Master PIN is a fix PIN that you receive upon delivery of your R amp S FSH You cannot change the OEM Master PIN OEM Master PIN Make sure not to lose the OEM Master PIN that is delivered with the R amp S FSH and keep it in a safe place away from the instrument itself If you use PIN protection and forget the User PINs the OEM Master PIN is the only way you can unlock and use the R amp S FSH If you unlock the R amp S FSH with the OEM Master PIN the PIN and if defined the User Master PIN are automatically reset to their default values 0000 PIN and 0000000000 User Master PIN If you fail to unlock the R amp S FSH with the OEM Master PIN the R amp S FSH will force a reboot of the software until you enter the correct OEM Master PIN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12
211. f Harmonics By default the R amp S FSH shows the signal and its first harmonic Each harmonic is indicated by a marker that the R amp S FSH places on the harmonic here M1 and M2 Note that all of the markers that have been set are normal markers that show the absolute frequency of the harmonic At the same time the R amp S FSH also calculates the values for the total harmonic distortion THD and shows the results in a box above the trace diagram The values are output in as well as dB If you want to see more than one harmonic the R amp S FSH can show up to six harmonics gt Press the MEAS key Press the Harmonics softkey gt Enter the number of harmonics you d like to see 3 1 7 2 Optimizing the Display of Harmonics The R amp S FSH places the markers on the other harmonics even if they are outside of the display range gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level frequency and span in order to display all harmonics 3 1 7 3 Activating the Harmonics List To see the exact frequency of the harmonic you can activate the marker list that shows the value for each harmonic or marker Press the MKR key gt Press the View List softkey The R amp S FSH displays the marker list that contains the values for each harmonic Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 68 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectru
212. f frequency scans the R amp S FSH performs one measurement on each receive frequency in the scan range over the measurement time and stops when it has measured all frequencies that are part of the scan range 8 2 4 Working with Traces In Receiver mode the R amp S FSH provides several ways to configure the trace display like the trace mode or trace mathematics For more information see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Working with a Second Trace on page 105 Working with Memory Traces on page 106 Using Trace Mathematics on page 106 Performing Frequency Scans on page 200 8 2 5 Using Transducers For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 121 8 2 6 Using Limit Lines For more information see Using Limit Lines on page 117 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 205 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 9 Digital Modulation Analyzer In digital modulation analyzer operating mode the R amp S FSH is able to demodulate signals of several telecommunications technologies Thus it can provide results for modulation characteristics channel characteristics or information about the signal quality The digital modulation analyzer consists of several firmware options Each option covers a specific telecommunications standard with functionality especially designed for that technology Measurements on GSM Signals on page 215 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals
213. f the PN code in the vicinity of the PN offset you have entered If you are using the automatic PN Offset the R amp S FSH performs a full search for the PN offset and reports the PN found For a free run situation the R amp S FSH searches for the start of the PN sequence over the entire signal length The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements over one slot as well as measurements on specific channels It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or with an optional GPS receiver SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 247 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 1 The Result Summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table Rel Levet 200 dBm Chaanek 1 Rel Offset To de Trigger Free Run Band cdmaik AWS Att Do dB Preamp Of PN Offset Auto ors Lat 48 ran Long 11 36 43 295 AN SOLE m SETETE Total Power 35 00 dEm Peak to Average 1235 dB Carrier Freq Error 1 4365 kHz PN Found 2 Tom 15 23 ps Traffic Activity ema Pwr Absolute Buer Bei to Total Par Rel te Pilot EVM ben
214. g n 194 display mode EE 46 Average detector oocccccccnncncccoconcnnccnanonnconancnnononenononanos 203 reference level cennin 44 Average WACO TEEN 102 SDa A An 45 Averaging Ur ti di 128 SAO po O O PP A 44 A 207 a EE 46 A RN 94 nn eee ee enter ee 196 19 8 110 a Pe EEE 94 Channel SPACING mi dE eegen 58 e E e ae ene EA E E 95 Channel table 120 176 Base station t8St n n 215 222 235 247 252 267 Channels Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 311 R amp S FSH Index ASA Er E E ES 249 CDMA2000 EE 238 242 A nn wise sedate 270 TER A eta gon aeeeaeaditeicscasoeereacae 259 WO EE 231 NEE 225 CISPR Dandwidih E 204 Clear WES serios 102 210 Clear spectrograms aseinani eea 75 Code domain channel table 230 241 258 Code domain power E e 239 TO SOI ueno di nner reer See eee en ee 256 Ee 227 Code ee 244 Color map constellation diagram EE 272 resource allocations ENEE 275 Color schemes ETE stra O eee 275 alos e EE eo 17 Constellation Diagram 272 274 CONTINUOUS SWEEP ccccccncccccnncnnnnncccnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnonnnnanancennnnonnos 98 CONVON IONS cooooccccnncccnnoncnnnconnnanonnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnononanenos 9 dolido elijo po 10 eee OM Un atte eee eee eer ton eee ears 152 Or EE 225 Ier 13 Eege EE 276 Data management E 21 DADIN E 255 Bai APP PP 99 eu 107 DOIE CIOT sarene E 103 Digital modulation nevosinarnaraiaaa 206 DEDO pala ree eee nee a ee ae eee 247 ER AA E 235 EE 215 E ae yes a
215. g and Cancelling Entries Depending on the input you have made there are several ways to confirm entries e Values without unit or values that have a fixed unit that you enter in an input field can be confirmed with the ENTER key or by pressing the center of the rotary knob Alternatively you can confirm such an entry by pressing the softkey that has opened the input field in question e Values that have flexible units like frequency or time can be confirmed with one of the unit keys If you confirm a such a value with the ENTER key the R amp S FSH always uses the smallest possible unit e g Hz e lf you have opened a submenu or input field by accident you can close it without making any changes with the CANCEL key 1 2 3 Using the Rotary Knob Using the rotary knob you can do several things e The rotary knob works like a cursor key in dialog boxes or softkey submenus In that case you can navigate to one of the items with the rotary knob If the dialog box covers more than one screen page it also scrolls through the dialog box Turning it to the right corresponds to a downward movement Moving it to the left to an upward movement e The rotary knob increases or decreases any kind of numeric value if an input field is active Turning it to the right corresponds to an increase turning it to the left to a decrease of a numeric value In most cases the rotary knob changes numeric values with a fixed step size Operat
216. g instructions to avoid personal injury and to prevent the power sensor from being destroyed Risk of skin burns and or damage to the R amp S FSH Measuring high powers may lead to skin burns and or damage to the R amp S FSH You can avoid it by e Never exceeding the permissible continuous power The permissible continuous power is indicated on a diagram on the back of the power sensor e Turning off the the RF power when connecting the power sensor e Connecting the RF connectors tightly Defining the center frequency To get the most accurate results you should synchronize the frequency to that of the signal Note that the R amp S FSH maintains the center frequency that you have set in another operating mode In that case it uses that frequency as the power sensor frequency If you want to perform measurements on another known signal you can change the power sensor frequency manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Freq softkey An input field to define the frequency opens Enter the frequency of the signal The R amp S FSH transfers the new frequency to the power sensor which then corrects the measured power readings Zeroing the power sensor For more information see Zeroing the power sensor H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 132 R amp S FSH Power Sensors AAA AA A ATA Using a Directional Power Sensor Setting the power measurement weighting mode For forward power display the R amp S FSH
217. geegsengeagegbeeengdegegee gesent 57 W DNIA ea E E 224 Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR e 54 Carrier to Interference ooococccccnooocccnnccnonnnoconncnononcnoncnnnonos 137 Adjust level Carrier to Noise cccccccccccceceeeeessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeess 136 channel DOW ege eege 44 CEMA ZOO ancient dedica 235 OCC PISA Be Ee e EEN 49 carrier frequency erfor nnne 245 TDMA E 53 CONS 010 EE 244 Adjust settings BN cc ayer eset cease pe eect ee 237 254 AM modulation dert 70 PINOSO E 246 carrier to interference AEN 137 Eege 237 eu ge Ee 136 FOSUIE SUMIMANY E 236 VE ue Lee Eet 68 PANO EE 237 Re Ee EI e iscncacaannisccdieninntamenasoneniadansacastencnisenoansants 115 SVMCMlONIZ eenegen ue gebei 237 AM modulation dert 69 EI BEE 238 elen e E 70 ET Meer 276 ITESO ME 70 Center frequency 0cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 85 127 132 191 207 PUT OWS aniston laa 89 174 EE 85 Antenna diversity cnica 233 Channel bandwidth Attenuation ccccecceeceecceceeeceeeceeceeeeeeees 91 134 194 209 AGER E 58 Audio demodulation channel GWOT ees 45 A 115 Teleton eecees ss eeeacsecceceee oe 276 NOVI E 115 occupied bandwidth wiisscsassdevcasvedosddaskdcerssvadencatencucasdeaeueaes 49 Audio demodulator 115 ia Ra file 207 Auto low noise distortion ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeeeeees 91 Channel DO WEN enee Eder eegene 43 AWG AA o PA 103 A e A 44 AMO SAN area adria 191 channel bandhwidth AAA 45 Automatic ecalm
218. ger Screen layout of the burst power result display 12 40 Ref 20 0 dBm Acc 0dB Sweep Single Ref DR 0 0 dE Preamp Off TSC Auto Trace Clears Vite Trg Free Aun AF Channel Power Burst Power TSG Found 342 TEA 31 2 E KT 1 0 50 0 Center 1 GHz e Display Current type of result display Currently selected standard Global results Diagram area Modulation type for each slot GSM softkey menu OO OO P Go h Global results For more information on the general results shown above the diagram area see Global Results on page 217 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 220 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer AAA ee Measurements on GSM Signals Diagram area The diagram area contains the graphical representation of the power over time When you display the complete frame the result display also contains information about the modulation or burst type applied to the slots that are displayed This information is shown in colored bars one for each slot at the bottom of the diagram area The R amp S FSH supports detection of the following burst types 8PSK normal burst EDGE Dummy burst Frequency correction burst Idle burst no modulation NB normal burst GMSk Synchronization burst 9 3 3 Configuring the Measurement 9 3 3 1 Selecting the Training Sequence The training sequence or midamble is a known bit sequence required to synchronize the user equipment and the base station
219. gnment Error to Amtenna 1 1 B123 dim HEX H T 00 2 23 7 dim 115 25 54 na 267 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 5 Global results 6 Allocation summary or reference signal overview 7 LTE softkey menu ROWDY 9 8 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard Ch BW Shows the current base channel bandwidth and number of resource blocks RB For more information see Selecting the Channel Bandwidth on page 276 UL DL Shows the configuration of the subframes in a radio frame for TDD systems For more information see Selecting the Subframe Configuration for TDD Signals on page 277 Cell Grp ID Shows the identity of the radio cell that is tested If you enter a specific cell identity the numbers in brackets show the group the cell identity belongs to and the ID in that group For more information see Selecting the Cell Identity on page 276 Cyclic Prefix Shows the type of cyclic prefix in use For more information see Selecting the Cyclic Prefix on page 276 Antenna Shows the current antenna configuration For more inf
220. h the results for lengths beyond the actual cable length are obsolete because they are caused by multiple reflections gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Cable Length softkey gt Enter the length of the cable The range is from 3 m to 1500 m about 10 ft to 5000 ft If you do not know the exact length of the cable define a length that is about 20 to 50 larger than the best estimate The maximum cable length that is suitable for measurements depends on the cable attenuation Since the test signal must be routed twice through the cable the signal reflected at the cable end arrives with twice the cable attenuation in attenuated form at the input of the power divider Dynamic range decreases with increasing cable length If the cable attenuation exceeds 10 dB the R amp S FSH displays a warning indicating that the cable attenuation is too high It also indicates the maximum recommended cable length to get accurate results BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 192 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SSS PSSST TAL EN NN eae Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis The amplitude menu contains all settings related to the level display 7 2 3 1 Adjusting the Scale of the Diagram The R amp S FSH provides several options to improve the vertical scaling of the measurement diagram The unit of the level axis is dB Setting the reference value The reference value d
221. hannel power By default the 3GPP WCDMA standard is active Two vertical lines show the channel bandwidth Screen layout for channel power measurements 1 18 11 10 16 36 Ref 0 0 dam RBW D0 kHz SWT 100ms Trace Clear Write Att 20 de VEW 200 kHz Treg Free Fun Detect AMS Channel BW 2 3 04 MHz Center 1 GHz Span 4 608 MHz 3 Mode Standard Adjust Standard Channel bandwidth Channel power numerical Channel bandwidth graphical blue lines Channel power measurement softkey menu O SS Go h Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 43 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 2 1 Selecting the Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory However you can create new configurations to perform measurements on other standards as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard If the measurement is not according to the selected standard anymore e g if you make changes t
222. hat you have saved the spectrogram you can replay it any time you want The number of spectrograms that you can store on the R amp S FSH internal memory depends on the other datasets that are currently on the R amp S FSH e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 79 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 5 Playback of a Spectrogram If you have recorded a spectrogram and have saved it in internal memory a memory stick or the SD card you can view the results of that measurement at a later time gt Press the Playback softkey or Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Playback menu item Recalling a previously stored spectrogram gt Press the Recall Spectrogram softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a file that contains the spectrogram data The file extension for spectrogram data is spm gt Select the file you need gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the spectrogram and shows the data in the display In general you can do the same things on a recalled spectrogram as in the spectrogram recording mode e g customize the display to your needs In addition to that functionality it is possible to view not only the spectrum that belongs to the currently selected spectrogram frame but also the spectrums of all frames that are in the memory of the R amp S FSH Working with time lines in playback mode To find
223. he Spectrum Analyzer This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in spectrum analyzer mode 10 2 1 Measurement Selection The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement The spectrogram is available only if you have installed option R amp S ZVH K14 H es ee A ClearWrite Max Hold IL Channel Pwr Hz Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Occupied Bandwith Sort on Name Sort on Date Time Sort on Size Show Combatible Show all Files TDMA Power Spectrum Emission Mask pan Par ee bel bet be Spurious Emission Zur Sar Harmonic Distortion Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Spectrogram Fa Fa Spectrogram Reference Level Spectrogram Level Range Spectrogram Auto Range Spectrogram Color Table Spectrogram Full Screen Green Yellow Spectrogram Playback Green Yellow Red Purple Blue Black Spectrogram Reference Level 10 2 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram 0 1 x Span Select Downlink Select Uplink Set to Downlink Set to Uplink 10 2 3 Span Selection The SPAN key opens the span menu that contains fu
224. he codes is relative either to the total power of the signal or relative to the power of the pilot channel PICH gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Power Settings softkey gt Select either the Code Power Relative To Pilot or Code Power Relative To Total menu item By default the R amp S FSH displays the power in the unit dBm 9 5 5 4 Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSH and that of the device under test If the frequency error is more than 1 KHz the R amp S FSH is not able to synchronize with the signal If possible you should synchronize the receiver and the transmitter The carrier frequency error can have the unit Hz or ppm gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Hz or ppm menu item The R amp S FSH shows the carrier frequency error in the unit you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 245 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 5 5 Changing the PN Offset The standard uses the PN Offset to distinguish between base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multiples of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Each signal is spread with a Walsh code of a length of 64 or 128 and a pseudo random noise code PN code of a length of 215 Each BTS sector in the netwo
225. he functionality to control limit lines Audio Beep Load From File Threshold Load From File 10 3 9 Markers The MARKER and MKR gt keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All N dB Down 3 0 dB Nom Lin Magn Phase Rho Ref Impedance 50 Ohm Functions of the Network Analyzer Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Selected Markers Center Marker Freq Level Marker Level Search Range Off Search Range 1 Search Range 2 Search Range Off Search Range Upper Limit Upper Limit Functions of the Power Meter 10 4 Functions of the Power Meter This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in power meter mode 10 4 1 Power Meter Measurements The MEAS key opens a menu that contains the functionality to configure measurements with the power meter Power Meter Directional Power Meter Curs 7 Af kal dB Return Loss 10 4 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens a menu that contains the functionality to set the frequency 10 4 3 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key contains functionality to configure level parameters a kend ben keng ken ken 10 4 4 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains functionality to configure the sweep LEN ell bel Feel been en eg Operating Manual 178 6275 12 28 S R
226. he message Zeroing power sensor please wait When zeroing is over the R amp S FSH shows the message Bower Sensor Zero OK and switches back to the softkey menu for the power sensor Please Wait Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 127 R amp S FSH Power Sensors AAA AAA AA TA Using a Power Sensor Selecting the unit for the power readout The R amp S FSH can display measured power in relative units dBm or in absolute units W mW uW nW and pW It is also possible to set a reference level in dB gt Press the Unit softkey A submenu to select the unit opens gt Select the unit you want The R amp S FSH adjusts the result display accordingly Setting the reference level If you have selected the unit dB Rel the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the reference level The R amp S FSH shows the currently set reference level in the diagram header gt Enter the reference level you want Alternatively you can set the current level readout as the reference level gt Press the gt Ref softkey The R amp S FSH sets the current result as the reference level lt then displays the measured level relative to the reference level in dB The unit is automatically set to dB Rel Setting the averaging time The averaging time determines the length of the measurement The longer the averaging time the more stable the display particularly if signals have low power or are noisy The averaging time is
227. he signal The code domain channel table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result display 010611 08 18 Als Center Bi 9675 MHE Hei Level 25 0 dim Tip Cont VW Channel H Bei Offset 0 0 dE Trigger Free Run Band cdmazk JTACS Att a 6 0 dB Base SF 128 Preamp On PN ORE Amig GPS Lat 48 SIN Leng 11 WISE AR 5756m Global Results AF Change Power 25 45 dBm Cemposi yM 217 PiiFoend N A Chanel Waoleh Symi Rate AC Staten Abaaiete Rel to AF Chan Type Ch SF kp Par dm Per dB LF d i Active 32 550 SYNC r 1 2 DT Active WEI 12 87 PCH 1 54 18 3 amu Active rh cb D CHAN 17 12 28 A 35 Active 35 31 4 73 CHAN 18 32 284 38 Active 35 16 AER CHAN 19 32 34 863 6 Active WK ke CHAN Ek 384 35 Active 3523 Ok CHAN 3564 LE 3 5 Aste 307 DF KHAN 4 54 Ok 3 5 Active 38 21 Dk 7 E Display Settings Adjust Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Channel table 6 CDMA2000 softkey menu RON Wu 9 5 3 1 Header Table The header table contains various settings already discussed in the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 236 9 5 3 2 Global Results The global results contain various settings already discussed in
228. he type of cyclic prefix gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select either the Normal Extended or Auto menu item 9 8 5 3 Selecting the Cell Identity The cell ID cell identity group and physical layer identity are interdependent parameters In combination they are responsible for synchronization between network and user equipment The LTE standard defines 504 unique physical layer cell identities These are split in 168 cell identity groups with 3 unique identities per group In the default state the R amp S FSH automatically detects the cell identity its group and ID If you need results for a specific identity you can also select it manually Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 276 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Setting the cell ID gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Cell Identity menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the cell identity gt Enter a number between 0 and 503 to set the cell identity Setting the cell group and the cell ID gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt First select the Group menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select a cell group gt Enter a number between 0 and 167 to select a cell identity group gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the ID menu item The R amp S FSH op
229. he vector voltmeter you can measure the reflection on port 1 and the transmission in reverse direction The example included here is based on a transmission measurement of a two port filter The filter works in the frequency from of 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz Select the type of reflection measurement gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflection measurements on port 1 or the Transmission Rev Port 2 1 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 179 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Vector Voltmeter R amp S FSH K45 6 5 2 1 Performing Transmission Measurements Calibrate the measurement for transmission measurements gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Transmission Rev Es RBW 10kHz SWT 15 TE GES Ar O dB Port D gt 1 IR menu item Trig Free Run Detect Sample gt Perform calibration For more Magnitude Phase information see Performing Calibration 1 94 dB GER gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the characteristics of the DUT magnitude and phase as numerical values Span Zero Span
230. hich component is affected and determine the location of the fault you need to perform further analysis using other measurements BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 184 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EA AAA AAA Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 2 Distance to Fault Measurements The distance to fault DTF measurement determines the exact location of possible faults in a transmission system If you connect the end of the cable to the R amp S FSH the DIF measurement shows you the exact distance to the fault in meter or feet regardless by what the fault is caused In addition the measurement shows the degree of the fault in dB From this information you can determine the component that has the fault and its seriousness In order to determine the distance to a cable fault the R amp S FSH measures the reflections of the cable under test in the frequency domain The R amp S FSH first determines the magnitude of the reflections for a particular frequency by comparing the phase of the reflected signal and a reference signal created by the tracking generator lt then performs inverse fast fourier transformation IFFT on the signal that has been received In combination with the characteristics of the cable model the R amp S FSH is able to determine the distance the reflections have been travelling Because of its sensitivity by first measuring in the frequency domain and subsequent IFFT the measurem
231. higher frequency parts of the voltage from the signal Video voltage is the DC voltage that results from the IF signal passing through the envelope detector which removes the IF components and outputs the envelope only This output is also known as the video signal The figure below shows that process on an AM modulated signal in the time domain In case of an AM modulated signal the envelope or video signal contains a DC component that corresponds to the level of the carrier The video signal also contains an AC component whose frequency is the same as the AM frequency Envelope Signal AM RF Signal video voltage Amplitude ur Ampiitude DC voltage from carrier AC voltage fram modulation IF Signal a Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 95 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If the bandwidth of the video filter is less than the frequency of the AC component it is suppressed depending on its maximum frequency If the AM component should be displayed truly the cutoff frequency of the filter has to be greater than the modulation frequency If there is noise on the sine signal the modulation signal can be thought of as noise If the video bandwidth is reduced the high frequency noise components above the cutoff frequency of the video filter will be rejected The smaller the video bandwidth the smaller the noise amplitude at the video filter output The R amp S FSH provides video
232. his information includes for example GPS coordinates the time of the measurement or level that has been measured You can evaluate the geotag information directly on site or save the information for later evaluation With the geotagging functionality you can mark locations where you have performed a measurement Thus you are able to analyze the geographical distribution of the received signal strength This allows you to analyze for example the coverage conditions around a base station s coverage area In the map display a geotag is displayed as a dot with a number Option R amp S FSH K15 also shows a straight line The straight line represents the direction you are facing You can create a geotag in several ways Creating geotags manually You can create a geotag of your current position which requires a GPS receiver or create a geotag of any other position that you would like to create gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Current Position menu item The R amp S FSH creates a geotag of your current position A geotag created this way is based on the coordinates of the GPS receiver and includes the azimuth If required you can assign a different azimuth for the GPS coordinates gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Azimuth Only menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to change the azimuth the GPS data itself is not changed Note that the azimuth line is updated in re
233. hows the amplitude for each frequency by mapping different colors to every power level The result is therefore a two dimensional diagram The color the R amp S FSH assigns to a power level that was measured depends on e the color table you have selected e the spectrogram reference level e the spectrogram level range The spectrogram consists of horizontal lines each one pixel high that are called frames In the default state a frame is added to the spectrogram after each sweep This means that the amount of data in a frame depends on the sweep time As the spectrogram in the R amp S FSH runs from top to bottom the outdated time line s move down one position so that the present frame is always on top of the diagram Therefore the sequence of frames is chronological gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Spectrogram menu item The R amp S FSH starts the spectrogram result display Screen layout for the spectrogram Ref 20 0 dBm RAW 100kHz SWT 20 ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB VB 1 MHZ Trig Free Run Detect RMS 947 544 MHz 70 1 dBm D2 otasi E EN CN Center 48 MHz Spanc3 64 MHz Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 74 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Result display Marker and time line information Spectrum result display optional Marker delta marker vertical lines Spectrogram Time lines T1 and T2 horizontal lines Sc
234. hows the Reference Signal Received Quality RSRQ The RSRQ is the ratio of the RSRP and the RSSI UO Offset Shows the power at spectral line 0 normalized to the total transmitted power The UO offset may be an indicator for a baseband DC offset or for carrier leakage 9 8 1 3 Allocation Summary The allocation summary becomes active when you have set the MIMO settings to a specific antenna connected by cable The allocation summary contains the results for specific aspects of the signal like channels and modulation For each value the R amp S FSH shows the power in dBm and the average error vector magnitude EVM For more information see Configuring EVM Results on page 279 All results in the allocation summary are normalized to one resource element or one subcarrier respectively E Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 270 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals Ref Signal Power and EVM of the reference signal The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes QPSK 16QAM 64QAM Power and EVM of the data channels PDSCH that you are measuring The R amp S FSH evaluates the results over all resource blocks and subframes of the respective modulation P SYNC S SYNC PBCH PCFICH Power and EVM of the corresponding channel 9 8 1 4 Reference Signal Overview The reference signal overview becomes active when you perform over the air MIMO measurements The refer
235. hs Therefore the VBW should be at least three times the resolution bandwidth If the VBW is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto VBW function the VBW is calculated as follows VBW 2 3 x RBW The R amp S FSH then selects the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size e Selecting the detector It is best to use the RMS detector This detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula with si linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Dous power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 56 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 5 1 Selec
236. iempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informac
237. ignal and an ideal reference signal This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode Avg RCDE 64QAM Shows the Average Relative Code Domain Error of the signal Note that only channels with a 64QAM modulation are considered in this measurement This value is valid only when the R amp S FSH is in channel search mode 9 4 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results that are specific to one or more channels P CPICH Power Shows the power of the P CPICH in dBm P CPICH Ec lo Shows the ratio of the power of the pilot channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal SEENEN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 225 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals P CPICH Symbol EVM rms Shows the averaged root mean square EVM on symbol level of the P CPICH P CCPCH Power Shows the power of the P CCPCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the power in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH P CCPCH Ec lo Shows the ratio of the power of the control channel to the total power of the signal Therefore this value shows the usable part of the signal P CCPCH Symbol EVM rms Shows the averaged root mean square EVM on symbol level of the P CCPCH P SCH Power Shows the power of the P SCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the po
238. ing Manual 1173 6275 12 23 12 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Means of Input e The rotary knob moves markers around Again the step size is fixed e Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect as pressing the ENTER key as it confirms an entry or selection 1 2 4 Using the Cursor Keys Using the cursor keys you can do several things e The cursor keys navigate through dialog boxes or softkey submenus e The up and down keys increase or decrease any kind of numeric value if an input field is active The cursor keys change numeric values with a fixed step size e The up and down keys move markers around The step size is fixed e The left and right keys move the cursor in an input field in the corresponding direction 1 2 5 Remote Operation Remote operation is a way to control the R amp S FSH from another device like a PC To use the R amp S FSH this way you have to establish a connection between both devices via the LAN or USB interfaces of the R amp S FSH The product range of the R amp S FSH provides several tools for remote operation Remote control with R amp S FSH K40 The R amp S FSH K40 is a firmware option to control the R amp S FSH with remote control commands that are compatible to the SCPI standard You can download the user manual for the R amp S FSH K40 from the R amp S website Remote desktop with R amp S FSH4View The remote desktop is an application provided by the R amp S FSH4View software Yo
239. ing over the air OTA signals you can use the BTS scanner to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its Cell ID The BTS Scanner shows the Cell ID for every base station it has detected For every base Station it also shows the power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram The table also shows the power of the S SYNC or P SYNC of the basestation Trace modes Note that the BTS Scanner supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars depicting the Cell ID may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 273 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer EEE El Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 4 The Resource Allocations Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K50E or K51E the resource allocations result display becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Resource Allocations menu item The R amp S FSH shows the resource allocation Screen layout of the resource allocations result display Sweep Single Trace Clear Write Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB RF Channel Pear 312 45m
240. ing the measurement The table contains the following information e Peak Shows the peak the results refer to e Distance Shows the distance from the measurement plane to the peak e Return Loss Shows the magnitude of the peak To limit the information in the list you can define a threshold for the DTF list so that only peaks above a certain level are included in the list gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the DTF Settings softkey gt Press the DTF List Threshold softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a threshold in dB gt Enter the threshold you want The R amp S FSH now only shows the peaks that are above the level you have entered Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 190 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SS PSSST AAA AA aT Configuring Cable and Antenna Tests 7 2 2 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to define frequency and distance parameters when performing cable measurements The contents of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement 7 2 2 1 Setting the Frequency Range for DTF Measurements In the default setting the R amp S FSH automatically selects a center frequency of 1 8 GHz R amp S FSH4 or 4 GHz R amp S FSH8 and a distance of 20 m The R amp S FSH optimizes the settings for the best resolution if you change the cable length If you have to keep the current frequency settings it is best to define a manual
241. ing the Results Zooming the Smith chart To take a better look at the results you can zoom and enlarge a particular part of the Smitch chart 04 01 11 14 58 LE R amp S FSH provides a 2X 4x and D RBW 10 kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write 8x zoom Art 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample Press the TRACE key Press the Zoom softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to control the zoom function It also draws a rectangle on the display that corresponds to the Loe fs parts of the display about to be SE zoomed in Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz MoveX Move Factor Active The size of the rectangle depends on the zoom factor i ii 04 01 11 15 01 2 Press the Zoom Factor softkey RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Write Att 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample gt Select the menu item with the zoom factor you want The R amp S FSH adjusts the size of the rectangle By default the position of the rectangle is the area in the center of the display You can also change the position of w Lg bk 08 ee e F the rectangle Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Move x Move Factor Active The magnitude of the shift is a percentage and ranges from 50 to 50 for both vertical and horizontal directions The zero point 0 in vertical and horizontal direction is the center of the Smith diagram gt Press the Move X softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field gt Enter a value betw
242. ingly and moves the triangle to the new position ee S Ret 0 0 dE REW 10 kHz SWT 38 ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Aun Detect Sample 04 071 11 15 35 Ref 0 0 dB REW 10 kHz SWT 38 me Trace Clear Write Att 0 dE Trig Free Aun Detect Sample l e e e Center 1 95 GHz l Span 130 MHz Center 1 85 GHz span 130 MHz Calibration m m m Tn PEE Format Ref Range Unit Ref Pos Mode Amp Imp Attenuation Display Changing the display range The display range is the value range the vertical axis covers The default display range depends on the measurement format For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 167 When you change the display range the reference value and position remain the same Merely the scale of the vertical axis is compressed or expanded gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the display range you need from the submenu The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 175 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Automatic scaling of the vertical axis All measurement formats except the Smith chart feature an automatic scale function If you use automatic scaling the R amp S FSH automatically sets the display range in a way that the trace best fits on the display gt Inthe Range submenu select the Auto Scale menu item For the SWR measurement format instead
243. instead of single frequencies you can also load a channel table and measure the channel power gt Press the Channel Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a channel table For measurements based upon a channel table you can select a single channel instead of a single receive frequency gt Press the Channel softkey gt Enter a channel number 8 1 1 2 Customizing the Bargraph Aspects The bargraph is a graphical representation of the power level with one dimension the power level of the receive freugency The R amp S FSH provides several ways to customize the aspects of the bargraph Selecting the Unit By default the unit the R amp S FSH uses in receiver mode for the measured power levels in general is dBuV In addition to dBuV the receiver mode provides other units as well gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Unit softkey Select the unit you need Defining the Bargraph Scale The scale of the bargraph is defined by the reference level and the level range The reference level is the maximum power level that the bargraph displays You should set the reference level in a way that the signal level does not exceed the reference level and high enough so that the signal does not disappear in the inherent noise Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 198 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 selecting the Measurement Mode gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Level softkey gt
244. ion standard at the reference plane usually the output of the RF measurement cable During calibration the R amp S FSH removes systematic errors from the measurement This process is based on correction data it gets while performing the calibration The correction data for transmission measurements is based on the results of comparing the transmission characteristics of the test setup to the frequency response of the tracking generator The correction data for reflection measurements is based on the results of a reflection measurement at a short and an open on the bridge Calibration remains valid after turning off the R amp S FSH or changing into another operating mode as calibration data is saved in the internal memory of the R amp S FSH H you save the measurement in a dataset calibration data is part of that dataset When you restore the dataset and perform the same measurement again you do not have to recalibrate the R amp S FSH 6 1 1 1 Calibration States The R amp S FSH features several calibration states It displays the current state in the status line The possible states depend on the calibration type see below e fcal The R amp S FSH uses factory calibration Factory calibration is restored after a preset or self alignment The R amp S FSH also uses factory calibration if you change a frequency parameter span start stop or center frequency to a value outside the calibrated frequency range or if you measure another s pa
245. iones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores S mbolos y definiciones de seguridad 8 o Cuidado Elementos Ver documen Peligro de Advertencia Conexi n a o Conexi n a o Conexi n a de construcci n con taci n de golpe de Superficie conductor l masa tierra peligro de carga producto corriente caliente protector conductora electroest tica 1175 6590 17 02 Page i R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o danos por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deberan tenerse en cuenta todas las demas informaciones de seguridad como p ej Las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Palabras de se al y su significado 4 PELIGRO PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que provocar muerte o lesiones graves si n
246. is outside the maximum frequency range the R amp S FSH sets the stop frequency to the possible maximum The label of the horizontal axis changes from Center and Span to Start and Stop 3 2 1 5 Setting the Span The span is the frequency range around the center frequency that a spectrum analyzer displays on the screen The span you should select depends on the signal and the measurement that you are performing A rule of thumb is that it should be at least twice the bandwidth occupied by the signal The available span for frequency domain measurements depends on the instrument model R amp S FSH4 10 Hz to 3 6 GHz R amp S FSH8 10 Hz to 8 GHz R amp S FSH13 10 Hz to 13 6 GHz R amp S FSH20 10 Hz to 20 GHz If you set a span of 0 Hz zero span the R amp S FSH performs measurements in the time domain gt Press the SPAN key When you press the SPAN key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the span If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Manual Span softkey gt Enter the span you need The R amp S FSH adjusts the span of the horizontal axis Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 87 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements If you have to switch between full span and a smaller span you can do so without having to enter the numeric values gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the Full Span softkey The R amp S FSH displays the spectrum over
247. isplay Color Scheme Key Click Volume system Beeper Volume on Power Overload Power Battery Low Level Battery Low Level Beep Self Alignment Self Alignment Calibration Kit PIN Code Protection New PIN Code Master PIN Code Power New User Master PIN Reset to Factory Settings site Name User Comments F1 User Key Label F1 User Key Dataset F2 User Key Label F2 User Key Dataset F3 User Key Label F3 User Key Dataset F4 User Key Label F4 User Key Dataset F5 User Key Label F5 User Key Dataset F6 User Key Label F6 User Key Dataset Preset Mode Preset Dataset Using Working Directory Working Directory Save on Event Event Source Time Interval Distance Interval Limits Save Mode Recording Storage User Keys P1 Fo Working Directory Save on Event Capture Screen Capture Dataset Capture GPX Default Filename Filename Counter Starts At Capture Screen Format Default Dataset Name Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 280 General Functions 10 1 2 File Management The SAVE RECALL key opens the file manager that contains functionality to manage datasets and other files fesse ir cs cs kel Fei kees 10 1 3 Operating Mode Selection The MODE key opens the mode menu that contains functionality to select the operating mode of the R amp S FSH Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 Functions of t
248. itude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram Primary Transducer 150 dB 15 0 dB Div Secondary Transducer 130 dB 13 0 dB Div Select Primary Transducer Select Secondary Transducer Manual 0 d Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise 0d8 75 Q RAM 75 5 RAZ 75 9 FSH Z38 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Free Run Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths mr ki kel ki elitr exten Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces Ten Geauge Trace Memory Average 10 Memory Trace Min Hold Max Hold Max Peak Min Peak Functions of the Receiver Mode 10 6 8 Markers The MARKER and MKR gt keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkeys in the Marker Menu Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Frequency Count of Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Search Limits On Off KE All Markers Center Level Marker Center Marker Freq Level Marker Level R amp S FSH Menu and Softkey Overview Functions of the I
249. k Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span Enter a span of 50 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Calibrate the measurement for scalar transmission measurements Scalar measurements provide normalization only Normalization is not as accurate as a full calibration but yields pretty accurate results In addition normalization needs one calibration standard only and therefore is faster than a full calibration gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item Ref 0 0 dB RBW 1MHz SWT 100ms Trace Clear Write normalization on one or two s Art 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample ports gt Perform normalization For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of the scalar reflection measurement Center 2 08 GH Soan 50 MH on the filter a E pan z Format Mode Calibrate Display You can change the measurement configuration e g select another sweep time or detector without affecting the accuracy of the measurement except the frequency parameters and attenuation a Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 161 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 6 3 Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K42 vector measurements be
250. k detector the R amp S FSH automatically select a 6 dB filter bandwidth depending on the measurement frequency If you select a 3 dB bandwidth while using the quasi peak detector the R amp S FSH deactivates the quasi peak detector SEENEN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 203 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode gt Press the TRACE key Press the Detector softkey gt Select the detector you want to use For more information on detectors in general see Selecting the Detector on page 103 Selecting the trace mode and working with memory traces For more information on trace modes and memory traces see Selecting the Trace Mode and Working with Memory Traces on pages 102 and 106 8 2 2 Selecting the Measurement Bandwidths for EMI Measurements The receiver mode adds 6 dB resolution bandwidths to the 3 dB resolution bandwidths already available in other operating modes The 6 dB bandwidths are special bandwidths that are necessary for measurements according to CISPR16 If automatic selection of the CISPR bandwidth is on the R amp S FSH selects an appropriate CISPR bandwidth depending on the receive frequency Frequencies lt 150 kHz 200 Hz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies from 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies from 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz CISPR bandwidth Frequencies gt 1 GHz 1 MHz CISPR bandwidth You can also select a 3 dB or 6 dB bandwidth man
251. l Lowest Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels The outer right hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the upper adjacent channels 3 1 5 6 Setting and Checking the Limits Limit checks in ACLR measurement mode are independent of limit line handling You can define a limit for each of the adjacent channels Limits for adjacent channels can be set either in absolute or relative terms Defining relative limits gt gt Press the MEAS key Channel Limit Relative Press the Channel Settings softkey o Are 0 006 Select the Channel Limit Relative 4it6 0 0d8 s c AktG 0 0 dB menu item GA 0 0d8 o ARE 0 048 1 E Ane 0 0d68 The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box ae a to define the relative limits foreach Alt 0 0dB adjacent channel Select the channel you want to define a limit for Select Activate the input by pressing the Select softkey The channel turns green and the check box in the first column is marked Enter the limit value you need The R amp S FSH automatically activates the check flag so that the limit is included in future limit checks To deactivate the limit check for a specific channel move the cursor to the channel in question with the rotary knob or the cursor keys and deselect it with the Select softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 61 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum
252. l enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos 1175 6590 17 02 Page iii R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad 7 En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Uer gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n corte protector aislamiento etc 8 Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso 9 A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto 10 En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de p
253. l not change gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Detector softkey gt Select the detector you want to use If you automatic detector selection is active the corresponding menu item is marked by an X 3 2 5 3 Working with a Second Trace In spectrum mode you can use two traces Both traces are based on the same settings except the trace settings like the trace mode or the detector You can use the second trace to compare for example two different detector settings In the default state only trace 1 is active Press the TRACE key gt Press the Show softkey gt Select the Trace 2 menu item The R amp S FSH shows the second Ree 200 d RBW 100 KHz SWT 20 me Tracey Mia hold trace The second trace is ina SE A SES different color To show that the second trace is active the R amp S FSH labels the Trace 2 menu item with an X After you have activated the second trace this is also the active one All actions like changing the detector or trace mathematics apply to the active trace Center 1 GHz ce 1 Span 6 MHz ss SESE Mode Detector Trace The trace indicator shows the currently active trace with a white background Trace 1 gt Press the Select Trace softkey Trace 1 becomes the active trace You can put both traces into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH and restore them later Note that the memory trace 1 and memory trace 2 have the same color i e white B
254. lation S Synchronization burst BSIC Found Shows the Base Station Identity Code The BSIC is a code that uniquely identifies a base station It is made up out of two separate numbers e The first number is the network color code NCC e The second number is the base station color code BCC This number is the same as the training sequence TSC Traffic Activity Percentage of traffic slots with data 9 3 1 3 Modulation Accuracy Modulation accuracy results contain various results that are specific to a modulation type GMSK and 8PSK Slot Analyzed Shows the currently analyzed GMSK or 8PSK time slot The currently analyzed time slot is always the first time slot the R amp S FSH could find for the corresponding modulation type If the frame contains no slots with a GMSK or 8PSK modulation the R amp S FSH shows no results for that modulation type Phase Error GMSK modulated slots only Shows the phase error of the analyzed time slot in degree The R amp S FSH calculates the phase error over the useful part of the burst The useful part of a burst is defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 A possible residual frequency error resulting from a mismatch between the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH and the base station is compensated Mag nitude Error GMSK modulated slots only Shows the magnitude error of the analyzed time slot in The R amp S FSH calculates the magnitude error over the useful part of the burst The useful par
255. lation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals PN Found The PN offset found during auto PN offset operation Tau According to the CDMA2000 standard Tau shows the timing error of the signal The maximum offset is specified at 10 us Active Channels Number of currently active channels 9 5 1 3 Channel Results Channel results contain various results specific to one or more channels The table contains e the absolute channel power in dBm e the channel power in relation to the total signal power in dB e the channel power in relation to the pilot channel in dB for the pilot channel PICH and the synchronization channel SYNC The pilot channel always occupies code 0 and the synchronization channel always occupies code number 32 AAA AAA A A A a ENN SESS SESS SSS SSS st Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 238 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout of the code domain power result display 01 06 11 03 17 DE Ref 25 0 dom Bit Reverse Sweep Cont Base SF 128 Att 5 dB Preamp On Trg Free Run PN Offset Auto GPS Lat 46 7 38 760 N Long 17 36 43 338 E Alt 575 9 m
256. ld conclusive results You can select a second transducer factor with the Select Secondary Transducer menu item The secondary transducer factor in that case is added to the first The unit of the second transducer factor must always be the relative unit dB as otherwise an addition would not be useful When you select a secondary transducer factor the dialog box shows only those transducer factors that have dB as their unit 3 4 1 Unit for Measurements with Transducers If the unit of the transducer is dB the units dBm dBmV or dBuV remain unchanged The linear units Volt and Watt are not permissible They are deactivated in the units menu If the unit of the transducer is dBuV m or dBuA m this unit is also used for the R amp S FSH level display This means that both the level axis of the diagram and the level at the marker position are assigned the unit of the transducer If dBuV m is selected as the transducer unit a switch to absolute level indication in V m is possible gt Press the AMPT key Press the Unit softkey gt Select the V olt menu item If you are using a transducer with the unit dBuA m it is not possible to select another unit Level indication is entirely in dBuA m SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 122 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Using Transducer Factors 3 4 2 Setting the Reference Level The transducer shifts the trace by its value as a function of frequency Positive transducer valu
257. level in order to prevent an overload of the signal path of the analyzer and to keep the signal within the display range If you are measuring the spectrum of a composite signal make sure that the reference level is high enough to cover all signals and that all signals are within the measurement diagram gt Press the AMPT key When you press the AMPT key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the center frequency If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Ref Level softkey gt Enter the reference level you require If you change the reference level the R amp S FSH adjusts the position of the trace as you make the changes By default the reference level corresponds to the grid line at the top of the diagram You can also change the position of the reference level to another grid line if you have a signal that would otherwise overlap with the top of the diagram area The R amp S FSH indicates the current reference level position with a triangle at the corresponding grid line on the vertical axis if gt Press the AMPT key Press the Range Ref Pos softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the Ref Position 10 menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the reference position gt Enter the number of the grid line you want the reference level at The range is from 0 to 10 0 corresponds to the lowest grid line 10 corresponds to highest grid line Op
258. ll detectors in this mode e Max Hold The trace shows the maximum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a max hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the max hold trace mode is a good way to detect intermittent signals or the maximum values of fluctuating signals for example Using the max hold trace mode automatically activates the max peak detector e Min Hold The trace shows the minimum power levels that have been measured at each pixel To overwrite a min hold trace change a parameter in a way that the results can not be compared any more e g the span Using the min hold trace mode is a good way to highlight signals within noise or suppress intermittent signals Using the min hold trace mode automatically activates the min peak detector e View The view trace mode freezes the current trace and aborts the measurement Using the view trace mode is a good way to evaluate the trace for example with markers BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 102 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Press the TRACE key gt Press the Trace Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the trace mode gt Select the trace mode you want to work with If you have selected the average trace mode Average 10 menu item the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the number of sweeps the
259. lor map while the Maximum menu item defines the upper threshold of the color map The threshold is the minimum or maximum signal level that is included in the color map The application also allows you to select the color scheme gt Press the Display Settings softkey gt Select the Color Table menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the color scheme you want I Na dn NNN ESS NS SSIS SSNS SSNS SNES etiam Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 275 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer AAA ap Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 5 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 8 5 1 Selecting the Channel Bandwidth The LTE standard specifies the following bandwidths with the appropriate number of resource blocks gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Channel Bandwidth menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the bandwidth gt Select one of the bandwidths available in the menu The R amp S FSH sets the bandwidth you have entered and calculates the corresponding number of resource blocks according to the standard 9 8 5 2 Selecting the Cyclic Prefix The cyclic prefix serves as a guard interval between OFDM symbols to avoid interferences The cyclic prefix is either Normal slot contains 7 OFDM symbols Extended slot contains 6 OFDM symbols or Auto the application automatically detects t
260. lt Mode R amp S FSH K41 on page 182 Receiver Mode on page 196 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 on page 135 Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 206 You can use the wizard for measurements in all operating modes Note that it is necessary to install and use the R amp S FSH4View software package to use the full functionality of the measurement wizard Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 32 Installing Firmware Options 2 1 1 Preparing the Measurement Before you can use the measurement wizard you have to define a measurement set with the R amp S FSH4View software package and transfer it to the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH4View software package is delivered with the R amp S FSH The latest version is also available for download on the R amp S FSH website at http www2 rohde schwarz com product fsh html 2 1 1 1 Creating a Measurement Set A measurement set consists of several datasets A dataset is a file that contains the settings of a specific R amp S FSH configuration for example frequency scaling etc To get hold of a dataset set up the R amp S FSH as you need and save the configuration or use one of the predefined datasets For more information on datasets see Saving Datasets on page 22 gt Start the R amp S FSH4View software on your PC gt Select the Wizard Set Editor with the EI button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog that provides all functionality to manage measurement sets 1 Measurement Set Name
261. lts you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the two markers Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 136 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 AAA IA AA A S Measuring the Spectrum 5 1 2 Measuring the Carrier to Interference Ratio The Carrier to Interference C I measurement is a tool to determine if a signal is affected by interference from neighboring channels In case of the carrier to interference measurement the R amp S FSH determines the distance between the level of the carrier and the second strongest level gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Carrier to Interference menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the carrier to noise ratio After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places two markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second marker is positioned on the second strongest level that has been measured Next Peak Based on the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the difference between the two signal levels and returns the result as the Carrier to Interference ratio Optimizing the Settings In order to get the bes
262. m BIC NCC BCC 16 Carrier Freq Error 231 91 Hr Traffic Activity en pg 5 a Eat 15 68 dp 6 Aodulation Accuracy Slot Analyzed Slot Analyzed Phase Error 13 Slot EVM 116 Se Mag Errar La H Peak EVM 10 Offect Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Global results Channel results Synchronization state green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 7 GSM softkey menu oor Go h 9 3 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard For more information on each type of parameter see Configuring the Measurement on page 232 Trigger Shows the current trigger mode For more information see Working with Trigger Functionality on page 98 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 216 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals BSIC NCC BCC Shows the way you have selected to determine the training sequence In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the training sequence In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label For more information see Selecting the Training Sequence on page 221 Slot Shows the way you have selected to determine the slot that is analyzed In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the
263. m Measurements 3 1 8 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth The AM Modulation Depth measurement analyzes AM modulated signals and calculates the modulation depth of the signal using the measurement results Note that the measurement works properly only if you apply an AM modulated signal gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the AM Modulation Depth menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the AM modulation depth After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places three markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second and third markers are delta markers These are placed symmetrically on the adjacent peak values to the left and right of the carrier Screen layout for the AM modulation depth measurement 14 01710 15 27 Ref 20 0 d m REW 100 Hz SWT 2 55 Trace Clear Wirte ate 0 dB VBW 100 Hr Trig Free Run Detect Auto Peak Mi 1 Walser MHz 27 2 dBm 1 kHz 12 1 dB 1 kHz 12 0 de 03 Mod Depth 40 97 1 Threshold 80 0 dBm SH Et TT al A Canter 100 MHz Marker list Modulation depth Trace Threshold line Markers blue lines AM modulation depth softkey menu OO P Go h By default delta marker 2 is active for editing If you move the delta marker to another position the other delta marker will be move
264. m the new PIN The R amp S FSH changes the PIN accordingly BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 16 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Configuring the Instrument You can define a User Master PIN the same way By default the User Master PIN is the OEM Master PIN as shown in the Instrument Settings dialog box gt Select the Master PIN Code menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define a User Master PIN Master PIN Code User Master MI gt Enter a 10 digit number for the User Master PIN The R amp S FSH opens an input field to confirm the User Master PIN gt Confirm the PIN The R amp S FSH shows a message if the change was successful or not gt Alternatively select the User Master PIN Code menu item and enter a 10 digit PIN in the input field that opens New User Master PIN Code User Master o BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 17 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Taking Screenshots 1 6 Taking Screenshots You can take and store a screenshot of the current screen anytime with the W key gt Press the gy key The R amp S FSH takes a screenshot If available the R amp S FSH stores the screenshot on an external storage device USB memory stick or SD card If both are connected the R amp S FSH uses the SD card If no external device is available the R amp S FSH stores the screenshot in its internal memory if there is enough left In that case you can transfer
265. me time the unit of the transducer is assigned to the level axis When field strength measurements are performed with the aid of antennas for instance the electrical field strength is directly indicated in dBuV m on the R amp S FSH A transducer factor can also be used to correct a frequency dependent attenuation e g of a cable between DUT and RF input of the R amp S FSH You can create and edit transducer factor with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH Each transducer factor may consist of up to 1000 reference values For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Interpolation between the values is performed with the aid of a modified spline algorithm Even if only relatively few values such as maxima minima and turning points are available this algorithm can easily simulate the correction factors of common transducers Two transducers can be switched on at a time The second transducer must be assigned the unit dB The R amp S FSH adds the two transducers to a total transducer Units supported for transducer factors dB dBuv m dBuA m W m2 The unit dB does not change the unit set on the R amp S FSH It can be used for instance to compensate for frequency dependent loss and gain at the input of the R amp S FSH The units dBuV m and dBuA m convert the output power of an antenna into electric or magnetic field strength The unit W m2 is used to calculate
266. measured values which are represented by a single pixel The peak detector determines and displays the maximum measured value The Auto Peak detector takes the maximum and minimum and displays them together The two values are joined by a vertical line segment This gives a good indication of the level variation over the measured values represented by a single pixel The RMS detector is used by the spectrum analyzer to determine the RMS value of the measured values It is therefore a measure of the spectral power represented by a pixel The sample detector takes an arbitrary measurement value and displays it in the Fig above the first The other measured values are ignored El Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 309 R amp S FSH How a Spectrum Analyzer Works Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer On the basis of the operating principles of detectors a few recommendations can be made as to their use e Itis best to use the Auto Peak detector or the peak detector for spectrum analysis over large frequency ranges This ensures that all signals are displayed e The RMS detector is recommended for power measurements on modulated signals However the display range should be chosen so as not to exceed 100 times the bandwidth of the signal or the resolution bandwidth whichever is larger e The sample detector or the RMS detector preferred should be used for noise measurements Only these two detectors are capable of measuring noise power
267. mp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 3 Deleting Datasets If you have to delete a dataset you can do so with the file manager gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the File Manager softkey The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt In order to delete a single dataset press the Select Action softkey Select Delete and the dataset currently selected is deleted after your confirmation In order to delete multiple data sets the respective datasets have to be marked first gt Press the Mark softkey to mark files for deletion gt Select the dataset you d like to delete gt Mark the data sets with the ENTER key The selected data sets should be checked in the Status column Repeat the selection by moving the cursor with the rotary knob or the cursor key and marking more data sets with the ENTER key gt Press the Select Action softkey gt Select the Delete menu item and confirm with the ENTER key or the Select Action softkey Before deleting the data set the R amp S FSH shows a warning message that you need to confirm After confirming the deletion process the R amp S FSH deletes the selected data sets from its memory BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 30 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH ee Updating the Firmware 1 9 Updating the Firmware You can download new firmware versions from the R amp S FSH website http www rohde schwarz com product fsh html The website also provides rel
268. n TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 4 The Sync ID Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the Sync ID result display becomes available If you are measuring over the air OTA signals you can use the Sync ID result display to identify base stations in the area Every base station is identified by its synchronization ID The Sync ID result display shows the ID for every base station it has detected For every base station it shows its power graphically each yellow bar represents an active and detected base station and numerically in a table above the diagram In addition the R amp S FSH evaluates the delay of the synchronization IDs relative to the first one Trace modes Note that the Sync ID result display supports several trace modes If you are using a trace mode other than Clear Write the bars showing the ID may turn grey A grey bar is shown in case of base stations that have been detected in the past but are not currently detected For more information on the trace modes see Selecting the Trace Mode on page 102 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 260 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer eege Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 5 The Time Domain Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the Time Domain Power result display becomes available The Time Domain Power result display shows the power of the signal over one TD SCDMA subframe 5 42 ms or 7 time
269. n method you can also select another result display Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 166 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 6 4 Evaluating the Results 6 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Format Depending on the measurement mode scalar or vector and result display reflection or transmission you can select one of several measurement formats Each of the measurement formats shows a different aspect of the measurement results Note that some of the measurement formats become available only after you have calibrated the measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Format softkey gt Select the measurement format from the menu The R amp S FSH displays the results in the new measurement format and adjusts the trace and the scale of the vertical axis accordingly The current measurement format is part of the status line information EXNMENEOFTAS Magnitude dB Mag Shows the magnitude of the transmission or reflection in dB The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range The magnitude format is the default format for all measurements Available for all measurements Phase Shows the phase characteristics of the DUT in degrees The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range In the default state the R amp S FSH shows the phase onl
270. n the right side of the spectrogram indicate the position of the spectrogram part currently displayed on the screen e Asingle down arrow in the right lower corner of the spectrogram indicates that the uppermost frame still represents the most recently recorded trace e Two arrows one up one down indicate that the spectrogram area displayed is somewhere in the middle of the available history e A single up arrow in the upper right corner of the spectrogram indicates that the lowest line of the spectrogram represents the end of the history buffer Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 76 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 3 Configuring the Display As colors are an important part of the spectrogram the R amp S FSH offers various ways to customize the display for best viewing results The first and most obvious way to configure the display is to select a different color scheme Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Color Table menu The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains several color schemes Default Green Yellow Green Blue Black White Red Purple Blue Black The following examples are based on the green yellow color scheme gt Select the color scheme you are most comfortable with The R amp S FSH adjusts the screen colors according to your selection lt is possible that the color distribution is not ideal in the current configuration You ha
271. nal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH starts recording the signal you have applied It records an amount of data that makes sure that at eight GSM time slots are captured The signal analysis itself contains exactly eight time slots The R amp S FSH performs various general measurements based on the complete frame as well as measurements based on an individual slot It then shows the results in tabular form in the Result Summary display or graphically in various diagrams To get highest measurement accuracy it is necessary to synchronize the reference frequency of the R amp S FSH with the base station via the EXT REF IN input or the external GPS frequency reference The GSM option provides several result displays to display the measurement results e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 215 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 1 The Result Summary The default result display is the result summary The result summary shows various measurement results and hardware settings in numerical form gt Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Result Summary menu item The R amp S FSH shows the numerical results in a table 337 8 MHz Rel Level 500 dBm Sweep hasngt Ref Offset 00 AB Trigger Free Rua land Ant 00 dB HCCOTSCH Amo Preamp On slobal Resulta AF Channel Power 61597 dEm Burst Types gl EEEN Burst Power 53 4 dE
272. nc ID TOR RI EE 260 Synchronization cece eee e sees 21 209 237 246 251 271 Synchronization E Te Te CN 269 Tau DE DO nt 249 CONA EE 238 RB We TE 51 adjust level A o e 53 burst TS 0 1 a PORO E o neat 52 reference level 53 cl AAA e 52 po A 252 carrier frequency error E 266 code domain CI OF aan 254 Gain imbalariC E rica 254 GEES E 254 POWE APP 254 CESHE SUNIA sossarna aieea iiia 252 SC FA MOM Bee 255 Scrambling COAG ccccccccsecsescesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseess 263 TD SCDMA POWS uscar ad 255 Re PPP on AAA 68 Threshold AM modulation dent 70 Time AO Ce E 51 88 98 dl A A 80 Total harmonic detortion rtnn 68 Total power PA nt ene erento eee ee 249 ER AE 237 E 217 AA T AET 269 TOS ER EE 254 RSC VA ee 224 iio A A one 102 Trace fsecond 105 Trace average A 102 210 Trace mathematics EEN 106 TAGS MEMON EE 106 Traco MOda asi 102 210 212 Trace Selec ON EERE ae 105 Tracking oenerator AE 151 Tracking generator power ccooocccccnncccnconnncnncnnnnnccncnnnnnnnnas 194 Ere MIG ACUI tege 218 249 270 Training sequence scsi 217 e atelier E 93 121 BEE PEA no A E A A E AE 122 Transmission channel 57 UTA GCE AA A PP 98 246 251 iodo AAA e OE EA 99 o An 100 e eae 90 channel power mission 46 directional power Sensor 133 POWE SENSON isso 128 o A 122 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 315 gl ene 10 le EE 224 User TAN e 264 ee ul ANY E 223 NEE 95 SCIAIMDING COAG cusmosotaciscn
273. nctionality to set the span Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 4 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram 10 2 5 Sweep Configuration 100 dB 10 0 dB Div 50 dB 5 0 dB Div 30 dB 3 0 dB Div 120 dB 12 0 dB Div 20 dB 2 0 dB Div 5 dB 0 5 dB Div l 10 dB 1 0 dB Div a Scale Adjust Primary Transducer 150 dB 15 0 dB Div Secondary Transducer 130 dB 13 0 dB Div dE Select Primary Transducer Select Secondary Transducer Manual O dB Auto Low Distortion Auto Low Noise PreampOn Preamp Off 75 0 RAM 75 Q RAZ 75 Q FSH Z38 The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep 10 2 6 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths Ca r A rie ki kd Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer 10 2 7 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces DE 10 2 8 Display and Limit Lines The LINES key opens a menu that contains the functionality to control display and limit lines Threshold Audio Beep Unselect Limit Threshold Unselect Limit 10 2 9 Markers The MARKER and MKR gt keys open a menus to contr
274. nd screen output are program code distinguished by their font Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Other conventions e Remote commands Remote commands may include abbreviations to simplify input In the description of such commands all parts that have to be entered are written in capital letters Additional text in lower case characters is for information only BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 9 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH screen Layout and Elements 1 Operating the R amp S FSH This chapter provides information about basic functionality and about the user interface of the R amp S FSH 1 1 Screen Layout and Elements The following figure shows the screen layout in cable and antenna test operating mode It shows all elements that are the same for all operating modes of the R amp S FSH Screen layouts that show specifics for each operating mode or measurement are provided in the corresponding sections of this manual g ORo NNO 20 0 dE REW 300 kHz SWT 20 ma Trace Clears Write Ode VEW 3 MHZ Trig Free Run Detect RMS Bn T 37 3574 N Long 17 36 403926 E Ah 553 7 m 1 GHz 31 5 dBm 7 1 733333 MHz 07 dB e CT t Do 1 0 CP mer GHz l Gat Settings MHz Bre ai Sweep 123 Trigger ira SV 9 Invalid trace indicator and overload information 11 Marker 23 Unavail
275. nd shows the results You can perform a Harmonic Distortion measurement in frequency sweep span gt 0 and zero span mode span 0 When starting the measurement the R amp S FSH looks for the first harmonic of the signal the highest signal in the defined frequency range lt then adjusts the frequency axis so that all harmonics are visible In zero span mode the center frequency remains the same gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Harmonic Distortion menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the harmonic distortion The search for harmonics starts as soon as you enter the Harmonic Distortion measurement Upon entering the measurement the R amp S FSH automatically adjusts the settings in order to display the selected number of harmonics default 2 on the screen Screen layout for the harmonic distortion measurement 14 01 10 15 30 ABW 3MHz SWT 20 ms Trace Clears Write VE 3 MHz Trig Free Run Detect AMS 14 Gm 5 200 3532 MHz EBJ dem 300 3783 MHz 745 dBm 500 73579 MHz 81 4 dEm CR ua af 400 5661 MHz H08 dim gt AAG GE 9 Harmonics list Total harmonic distortion in Total harmonic distortion in dB Trace Markers indicating harmonics blue lines Harmonic distortion softkey menu OO PS Go bi Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 67 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode ee EE Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 7 1 Defining the Number o
276. ne 132 5 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 occoccocccccccccococoonoss 135 5 1 NIESEN 136 SEENEN Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 2 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 5 1 1 Measuring the CGameriohoseHato 136 5 1 2 Measuring the Carrier to Interference Ratio nn0nnnnannnnnennnnnannnoennnnnnnnnsnnnnnsnneenennne 137 5 1 3 Analyzing Interference Measurements cccooooooccccnccccnnnnonnccnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnanncinnncnnns 137 9 2 WOTKING WIR Maps coria 138 S21 Taming WV urls aaa 138 5922 IEN eegen 138 S29 WICASUMIAG RE 143 5 2 4 Gathering Geographic Data 146 329 ANAIYZING Geographie Dala ninia 149 6 Network Analyzer Mode ccccsssccsesseesesseeeeseeseeneeeeeneeeeeseenenseeneass 150 6 1 Calibrating Measurements suicida dd 152 6 2 Performing Scalar MeasurementS ooooonnccccccnnnncconnnonononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnannnnnrrrrennanaaanannnns 158 6 2 1 Measuring the fransmission 158 6 2 2 Measuring the Reflection REENEN 160 6 3 Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 cccccsesseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeeees 162 6 3 1 Measuring the fransmsesion 163 6 3 2 Measuring the Reflection REENEN 165 6 4 Evaluating the E CC 167 6 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Format 167 6 4 2 Configuring the Vertical Avis 174 OAS 511g 610 0 2 EEN 176 6 4 4 Working with Channel Tables cccccccconnconccccoocccnnconnonccnncnonancnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnannnnnconenaress 176 oes AM e A aa 177 6 4 6 Using Trace
277. nel Channel Type Type of code channel All code channels that the R amp S FSH is able to recognize are shown with the correct channel type and spreading factor Channels with the label CHAN are active code channels whose type could not be detected Codes that are inactive are not shown Chan SF Code channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Symb Rate ksps Symbol rate that the code channel is transmitted with 7 5 ksps to 960 ksps T Offs chips Shows the timing offset of the code channel in chips Pilot Bits Shows the number of pilot bits the code channel contains Status Status display of the code channel Power Abs dBm Absolute power of the code channel in dBm Power Rel to CPICH dB Relative power of the code channel in dB The reference channel is the C PICH or the total signal depending on the reference power you have selected Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 231 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 4 Configuring the Measurement Some of the results depend on the measurement configuration 9 4 4 1 Specifying the Scrambling Code To demodulate a 3GPP signal you have to know the primary and secondary scrambling codes of the base station you are testing You can enter the scrambling code manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically find the right scrambling code s Defining the scrambling code manually
278. nsforms gpx files into kmz files required by Google Earth It also contains a plug in that illustrates the signal levels measured at the GPS coordinates that you have added to the gpx file gt Start the R amp S FSH4View software gt Select Tools Geotag Mapping The software opens a dialog box to select a gpx file gt Select or remove one or more gpx files with the Add or Remove button In the pane on the right the software shows a list of individual GPS coordinates You can include or exclude individual locations by adding or removing the checkmark in the Enabled column gt Press the Save as KMZ button gt Define a name and location where you want to save the file to When you press Save the R amp S FSH4View saves the file and at the same time opens Google Earth to show the data Each GPS coordinate is represented by a colored dot The color of the dot represents the signal level that has been measured at the corresponding coordinate The color map is displayed in the Google Earth window You can change the color map in R amp S FSH4View gt Select Tools Geotag Mapping Press the Settings button gt Inthe Color Settings pane select a color and assign a signal level to the color EH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 149 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Working with Maps 6 Network Analyzer Mode The network analyzer mode provides the functionality to characterize ne
279. nt you should define the frequency parameters to avoid interpolation of the results Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 1950 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span gt Entera span of 130 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 165 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 Calibrate the measurement for vector reflection measurements Vector measurements provide the full range of calibration methods for more accurate results Most full calibration methods require more than one calibration standard gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item calibration on one or two ports gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT 04 01 11 14 25 2B The R amp S FSH shows the results of Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Dea Wie the vector reflection measurement See E on the filter You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or detector or format e g view phase characteristics without affecting the accuracy of the measurement For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 167 Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz SESE Mode Calibration Format LTL Depending on the calibratio
280. ntains the measurement results in graphic form It shows the power of all codes in the signal In the graph each bar represents one code channel A complete channel may consist of more than one code The displayed codes have different colors The color of the code depends on the state of the channel it belongs to e Yellow active code channels e Turquoise inactive code channels e Red currently selected code channel The power of the codes is a relative value The reference power is the power of the pilot channel You can also display the absolute powers of the code channels For more information see Changing the Code Power on page 234 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 229 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K44E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of the signal The code domain channel table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result display AM ster 21672 GHz Hei Level 30 0 dm Zvwwecn Cont Ki Channel Bei Offset 0 0 dE ntenna Dic Neng Band Att 60 dB P CPICH Slot E Tranad Preamp On Ch Search On Ser Code Uno Glebal He aus RF Channel o 5783 dBm Active Chansela 36 gr ESA Pilot Statue LL pe kapa chips Bits dBm
281. nterference Analyzer Map Mode 10 7 Functions of the Interference Analyzer Map Mode This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in the Maps mode of the interference analyzer Map mode functionality is available only with options R amp S FSH K15 and or K16 10 7 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Triangulation Geotagging Auta Select Go To Current Position Show GPS Information Trace Current Position Show Compass Information Save Current Position Antenna Save Manual Position GPS Show Saved Positions Compass Disabled GPS Position List Current Position Color Go To Triangulation Position saved Positions Color HE300 Top Triangulate Trinagulation Color Save Triangulation Show Power Bar Show Power Result Show Hardware Settings Squelch Level Tone Threshold Tone Gain Tone Volume Tone 10 7 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram GE ml bel be et bel bm 10 7 3 Amplitude Parameters The AMPT key opens the amplitude menu that contains functionality to set up the vertical axis of the measurement diagram H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 299 Functions of the Inte
282. o Apps Lot 48 T ILEIN Long 1136 43 296 E AN GOLE m Global Result AF Chasnel F 26 49 dim Peak to Average BH dE Alo a7 PN Found NA Composite EVM SEI Sa Tauc NA Carrier Frog Error 11 9 Hz Active Chamnols OU Channel Results Absolute Pr Dei te AF Chan Pav Bel to Pilot Pwr Pilot Code 0 3252 d n 7 03 de 0 00 dB Syne Code 32 28 A1 dom 1253 de 589 dB e pla O TR Display Settings Current type of result display Currently selected standard General settings Synchronization state and GPS information green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed Global results 6 Channel results 7 CDMA2000 softkey menu ROWND al 9 5 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard PN Offset Shows the current Pseudo Noise PN Offset of the base station For more information see Changing the PN Offset on page 246 The PN Offset only takes effect in combination with an external or GPS trigger Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 236 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals Trigger Shows the current trigger mode For more information see Working with Trigger Functionality on page 98 In addition to the trigger also available with the base unit the application also feature a GPS Sync trigger
283. o a parameter the R amp S FSH puts a red dot in front of the standard display A You can create and edit standards with the R S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 2 2 Setting the Reference Level The reference level is the power level that the R amp S FSH expects at the RF input When selecting the reference level make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH by applying a signal whose power exeeds the maximum reference level As the power is measured with a small resolution bandwidth compared to the signal bandwidth it is still possible to overload the R amp S FSH even if the trace is within the measurement diagram To prevent an overload perform the measurement with the largest resolution bandwidth possible using the peak detector If you set these parameters it is not possible for the trace to exceed the reference level To simplify operation and to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the Adjusting Level for Measurement optimal reference level Please Wait It uses a resolution bandwidth of
284. o define Spectrum Emission Masks refer to the R amp S FSH4View manual gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Spectrum Emission Mask menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the spectrum emission mask Note that the frequency range of the actual measurement depends on the start and stop frequency you have set on the R amp S FSH Correct measurement results are therefore only possible if the frequency ranges of the SEM are inside the current span of the R amp S FSH Screen Layout for the SEM measurement SVT 142 ms Trace Clears Write VEW S00 kHz Trigo Free Hun Detect AMS 27 1 000607143 GHz 521 dBm Tx Power 30 6 dBm Tx Bw 5 MHz Range Hz REW Hz Peak Freq Hz Power Aba Power Rel A Limit 12 750 M 5 500 M 1M 1 489 500000 M WJ dim D167 dE 5 500 M T 500 Mi iM 2 997 390476 Mi 300 dim 55 34 dB 1 500 M 1500 M 1M 3 905 750000 M 0000 dEm 63 79 di 2 500 M wk RAM A dam 2E de Standard Marker information SEM list Limit check result Spectrum emission mask red line Trace yellow line Peak P lt x gt and normal markers M lt x gt and D lt x gt blue line SEM softkey menu 0 JO Om PS Go M Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 63 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Markers in the SEM measurement In addition to the normal marker functionality of the R amp S FSH the SEM measur
285. o one of the softkeys gt Press the SETUP key The R amp S FSH opens the setup menu gt Press the User Preference softkey The R amp S FSH opens the User Preference Setup menu In this menu you can customize the name of one of the softkeys F1 to F6 and assign a dataset to a specific softkey for quick access to that dataset By default the name of the label is User Pref 1 to User Pref 6 gt Select one of the User Key Labels F1 to F6 gt Customize the name of the softkey by entering a new one with the alphanumeric keys e g user label 1 The first word of the key label is displayed in the first row of the label the rest in the second row If a label is too long to be displayed it is truncated If you enter no label the softkey will be inactive gt Select the User Key Dataset corresponding to the customized User Key Label F1 to F6 The R amp S FSH opens the file manager and displays a list of available datasets gt Select the dataset you want to assign to the softkey The R amp S FSH returns to the User Preference Setup menu The dataset is now assigned to the softkey Recalling a dataset gt Press the USER key gt Press one of the softkeys F1 to F6 in the menu Note that the label of the softkeys depends on the settings made in the User Preference Setup menu The R amp S FSH immediately activates the dataset assigned to that softkey ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 29 R amp S FSH Operating the R a
286. o se evita ADVERTENCIA identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de provocar muerte o lesiones graves si no se evita ATENCI N identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar lesiones leves o moderadas si no se evita AVISO indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y como consecuencia da arlo En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO Las palabras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el area econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de se al en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia da os en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
287. o the 3 5 mm headphone jack on the top of the R amp S FSH When demodulating an AM modulated signal the R amp S FSH turns the video voltage into an audible sound You should therefore set the reference level to about the level of the signal that you are demodulating If you perform measurements in the time domain the R amp S FSH demodulates continuously In the frequency domain you can define a time period the R amp S FSH demodulates the signal at the marker frequency The frequency sweep then stops at the marker frequency for that time before finishing the sweep gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the demodulation scheme you require from the menu The R amp S FSH starts to demodulate the signal Demodulating signals If you turn on the demodulator the R amp S FSH automatically turns off the noise marker or the frequency counter Defining the demodulation time period gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the Time menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the demodulation time gt Enter the demodulation time you need The range is from 100 ms to 500 s In time domain the R amp S FSH demodulates continuously i e the demodulation time is not relevant Controlling the volume gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Function softkey gt Select the Volume menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to
288. ode Evaluating the Results Screen layout in dual trace mode ABV 10 kHz SWT 38 ms Trace Clear Write Trig Free Run Detect Sample TT ON 36 0 ET dl ER Center 1 95 GHz ae m l Span 130 MHz Marker T Mar ker Marker Moda Result display trace 1 Result display trace 2 Measurement mode Trace window 1 Trace information trace 1 S matrix calibration status measurement format 6 Trace window 2 7 Measurement format trace 2 8 Active trace indicator After activating the second trace trace 1 is always the active trace Only the active trace can be configured while the other is passive NdLhONDN gt To activate trace 2 press the Select Trace softkey in the trace menu When pressing the Select Trace softkey the R amp S FSH switches between trace 1 and 2 The trace indicator shows the currently active trace Trace After selecting trace 2 you can set the measurement parameters for trace 2 while the first trace is passive Note that you can display all four S parameters at the same time in dual trace mode by displaying the transmission measurement in both directions in one window and displaying the reflection measurement on both ports in the other window For more information see Performing Scalar Measurements on page 158 You can also use the trace memory using the Show softkey in the Trace menu Restoring a saved trace is possible only for the currently active trace i e screen 1
289. of 130 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 163 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 Calibrate the measurement for vector transmission measurements Vector measurements provide the full range of calibration methods for more accurate results Most full calibration methods require more than one calibration standard gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the appropriate menu item calibration on two ports gt Perform calibration For more information see Performing Calibration gt Reconnect the DUT The R amp S FSH shows the results of the vector transmission measurement on the filter 0401 11 14 13 The R amp S FSH shows the results of Ref 0 0 dB RBW 10kHz SWT 38ms Trace Clear Wiite the vector transmission s Arc 0 dB Trig Free Run Detect Sample measurement and therefore the filter characteristics You can change the measurement configuration e g the sweep time or detector or format e g view phase characteristics without affecting the accuracy of the measurement Center 1 95 GHz Span 130 MHz Mode Calibration eer Format trace For more information see Selecting the Measurement Format on page 167 Note that for calibration to remain valid frequency parameters bandwidth and attenuation have to remain the same Depending on the calibration method you can also select other result displays e g
290. of selecting one of the predefined ranges you can also define the exact top and bottom values of the vertical axis gt Press the AMPT key Press the Range softkey gt Select the Scale Max or Scale Min menu items to define the top or bottom values of the vertical axis The R amp S FSH adjusts the vertical axis accordingly 6 4 3 Using Markers The network analyzer mode also features markers The functionality is similar to that of the spectrum analyzer For more information see Using Markers on page 107 6 4 4 Working with Channel Tables The R amp S FSH allows you to use channel tables in network analyzer mode gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Channel Table softkey The R amp S FSH opens the list of channel tables loaded into the R amp S FSH via R amp S FSH4View gt Select the channel table you need The R amp S FSH scans the channel table for the channels with the lowest and highest frequencies and sets those as the start and stop frequency The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use without doing anything If you want to test telecommunications standards that are not listed you can also build channel tables manually with the Channel Table Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH To use one of those you just have to copy the channel table to the R amp S FSH el Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 176 R amp S FS
291. of the menu depend on the currently selected measurement Usually the horizontal axis contains frequency information in spectrum mode You can specify the frequency in terms of the center frequency or by defining a start and stop frequency for a particular span If you know the frequency of the signal you are measuring it is best to match the center frequency to the signal s frequency If you are investigating signals e g harmonics that are within a particular frequency range the best option is to enter a start and stop frequency to define the span 3 2 1 1 Defining the Center Frequency The center frequency represents the frequency at the center of the horizontal axis in the diagram area gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens the frequency menu When you press the FREQ key the R amp S FSH automatically opens an input field to define the center frequency If the input field is inactive you can open it with the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the center frequency you need The frequency you have entered becomes the new center frequency While adjusting the center frequency you may obtain a value that is outside the R amp S FSH maximum span If this happens the R amp S FSH automatically reduces the span 3 2 1 2 Defining a Frequency Step Size If you set the center frequency with the rotary knob or the cursor keys the distance of each step that you take depends on the span With the rotary knob the smallest possible s
292. ol markers and use marker functions Softkey in the Marker Menu Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Frequency Count N dB Down N dB 3 0 dB ee 30 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Search Limits On Off Center Level Marker Center Marker Freq Level Marker Level Selected Markers All Markers R amp S FSH Menu and Softkey Overview Functions of the Network Analyzer 10 3 Functions of the Network Analyzer This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in network analyzer mode Vector network analyzer functionality is available only with option R amp S FSH K42 10 3 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Menu Texts es Standard Transmission Rev Port 211 5 Parameters Scalar Wector Vector Voltmeter Reflection Port 2 Reflection Port 1 and Port 2 Transmission Fwd and Rev Show Trace 2 Depending on measurement mode Depending on measurement mode Normalize Full Two Port Magnitude Full Two Port High Accuracy Reflection Port 1 Magnitude Phase Normalize Transmission Fwd Port 1 2 Normalize Transmission Rev Port 21 Reflection Port 2 Short Normalize Reflection Port 1 Short Normalize Reflection Port 2 Short Select Calkit Electric
293. olor of those as follows AAA AAA AAA Ee Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 141 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 Deel Working with Maps gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Triangulation Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected Color of previous positions R amp S FSH K16 In Geotagging mode R amp S FSH K15 you can distinguish between your current position and positions that you have visited or saved earlier The color a geotag gets in this mode depends on the signal strength that has been measured at the corresponding geotag In addition to the color itself you can also define the signal levels associated with a particular color a separate color for good coverage one for average coverage and one for bad coverage Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Good Coverage Color Average Coverage Color or Bad Coverage Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected The R amp S FSH has default values that characterize good average and bad coverage If required you can change the signal levels associated with these terms gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Good Coverage Level
294. on The imaginary component is converted to inductance or capacitance Marker frequency and sign are taken into account G jB Shows the real and imaginary components of the admittance at the marker position The imaginary component is converted to inductance or capacintance Marker frequency and sign are taken into account R jX Z0 Shows the real and imaginary components of the standardized impedance G jB ZO Shows the real and imaginary components of the standardized admittance Press the MARKER key The R amp S FSH activates a marker and opens the marker softkey menu Like usual traces you can move the marker around with the rotary knob or the cursor keys or enter a specific marker position e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 171 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results In its default state the marker position is specified by the marker frequency and complex resistance in QO The complex resistance in that case is calculated according to real component j imaginary component gt Press the Marker Mode softkey ROW tw SWI 30 me Trace Genie Trig Fraa Aun Detect Sample ji 7 18860317 GHz 2 83 15 00 gt Select one of the marker formats The R amp S FSH adjusts the marker information accordingly Selecting the reference impedance The default reference impedance the matching point in the center of the Smith chart is 50 Q It is however also possible to perform reflecti
295. on measurements on networks with another impedance gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the Marker Mode softkey gt Select the Ref Impedance menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to select the reference impedance gt Enter the reference impedance you need The value range is from 1 mQ to 10 KQ 6 4 1 2 Working with the Dual Trace Mode When performing vector measurements it is possible to perform and display two measurements simultaneously After activating this function the R amp S FSH shows the two traces on two separate screens This allows you to view any combination of two vector measurement formats on the display Note that the Magnitude Phase measurement format is an exception to this rule This format counts as one trace To display the magnitude and phase as two separate traces assign the Phase format to trace 1 and the Magnitude format to trace 2 Press the MEAS key Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Show Trace 2 menu item The R amp S FSH splits the screen The upper screen shows trace 1 the bottom screen shows trace 2 You can configure both screens as you like An X in front of the Show Trace 2 menu item indicates that the dual trace mode is active In addition the menu of the Result Display softkey expands It now shows the available measurement formats that can be applied to trace 2 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 172 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer M
296. or screen 2 For more information see Working with Memory Traces on page 106 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 173 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results 6 4 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis some results may not fit in the diagram area as it is configured in the default state of the R amp S FSH for example measurements on amplifiers If you are performing measurements on an amplifier you most likely have to change the scaling of the vertical axis in order to see the complete transmission function The R amp S FSH provides several ways to adjust the scaling of the vertical axis Changing the reference value Changing the reference value works like an attenuation or gain in that it moves the trace to another level The R amp S FSH adjusts the scale of the vertical axis accordingly The R amp S FSH indicates the value and position of the current reference value with a triangle at the vertical axis PHP In the default state it is O dB and its position is the grid line at the top of the diagram The reference value only changes the O dB reference without actually attenuating or amplifying the signal level When changing the reference value make sure that you do not overload the R amp S FSH As long as the trace is completely within the diagram area and the reference position at the top of the diagram the risk of an overload is eliminated gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref softkey The R amp S FS
297. or providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems a disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 3 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cable on a regular basis to ensure that it is in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable you can ensure that the cable will not be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 4 The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fused with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies 5 Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur 6 Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks 7 For measurements in circuits with voltages Vim gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fusing current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards 8 Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 or IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case 9 Unl
298. ormation see Selecting the MIMO Configuration on page 278 Subframes Shows the number of subframes the R amp S FSH records and analyzes during a single Sweep e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 268 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on LTE Signals 9 8 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one frame The global results also contain information about the quality of the measured signal of up to one frame The exact amount of data that is analyzed depends on the number of selected subframes RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the currently measured LTE signal The channel power includes all subcarriers covered by the channel bandwidth Signal power outside the channel bandwidth is not included in the total power even if it is visible in the spectrum overview In case of over the air measuremenis the total power includes all received signals in the channel bandwidth Overall EVM Shows the overall EVM of the signal The overall EVM includes all signal components regardless of the modulation or channel type Carrier Freq Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 278 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to
299. orms a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the three markers 3 1 8 3 Activating the Marker List To see the exact frequency of the carrier and its sidebands you can activate the marker list that shows the value for each marker gt Press the MKR key gt Press the View List softkey The R amp S FSH displays the marker list that contains the values for carrier and sideband e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 70 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 9 Measuring Spurious Emissions The Spurious Emission measurement is a tool to monitor unwanted emissions in the frequency spectrum outside of an assigned channel carrier When performing a Spurious Emission measurement the R amp S FSH checks the spectrum that you have defined against a limit line to see whether the signal complies with a specific standard or not Spurious Emission measurements are usually performed over a wide frequency spectrum To avoid long measurement times the spectrum is split into several smaller ranges Each of those ranges has a different configuration for example a different RBW The Spurious Emission measurement available on the R amp S FSH is designed for measurements on category A 3GPP base stations with the appropriate configuration in each measurement range gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the 3GPP BTS Spurio
300. osibles da os 11 Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico 12 No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones 13 Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas 14 Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptit
301. oss NA 168 carrier to interference AEN 137 elle teil TC 136 channel DOWO arsenal 43 directional power Sensor 132 Gistance tO fault cc cecccecsssesseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseees 185 electrical et E 169 frequency COUMO E 113 alge lege Vey ArI EE E A E TEATA ET 168 harmonic distortion sra 67 ISO WODIC AIM Eu A issii 83 W Tea Kr 167 DOB E 114 NOISE power density occcccccooccccnccccnnocccnnnnnnnnnnanccinonnnnnnnos 112 occupied bandwidth ccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeees 47 Index EE 167 cs ed 127 Ci A 184 reflection VV A AA 180 reflection Coefficient 168 reflection Ee EE 160 FETISCHON ei e 165 ET EE 158 e Mit WG ol UV EE 168 Reen AAPP 74 spectrum analyzer csi 42 spectrum emission MASK AAA 63 Spurious SIMISSIONS xien snossanscnanrdunsieerdiesnaniansdentaimeiaeercentes 71 TOMA DOW E 51 Elle VV EE 180 transmission scalar ccs ceicde EEN ENNEN ir 158 transmission vechor 163 EEN 162 vector voltmeter xcdeacscncdecestecesinsteacueavdecsetvedonenecedees 178 181 Eeer 168 Measurement format 167 181 186 Measurement Setup 14 Measurement wizard 32 e E 33 EY A AU ON e ni O 41 measurement TEEN 33 MOaSsuUreMeNES c ccoccccoccnconconnonconnoncnncnnonnonnonnonnonennonioninnennes 38 Memory Areler 106 173 Mendo iento sio srt acacia 280 DT astro tea 293 301 E incida 280 A A E eeedeanseseceeees secon 299 network analyzer ENEE 288 power MELO sarsies aaas 292 Lei E 296 spectrum
302. ow the scrambling code of the base station you are testing You can enter the scrambling code manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically find the right scrambling code s Defining the scrambling code manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Set Code Manually menu item gt Enter the scrambling code of the base station you are testing Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 263 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals Performing a search for the scrambling code If you don t know the scrambling code the R amp S FSH is able to determine the scrambling code of one or more 3GPP base stations by itself gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Signal Settings softkey gt Select the Auto menu item in the Scrambling Code category With each sweep the R amp S FSH starts a search for the scrambling code If it finds the code the synchronization will be successful If not the synchronization fails 9 7 6 3 Selecting the Maximum Number of Users The TD SCDMA standard allows the assignment of resources to a variable number of users 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 or 16 The maximum number of users is determined by the number of midamble shifts K in a particular time slot You can enter the number of midamble shifts manually or let the R amp S FSH automatically determine the number of midamble shifts Defining the number of users manually gt Pr
303. p S FSH measures the power level of a particular frequency or a customized set of frequencies instead of sweeping over parts of the frequency spectrum The R amp S FSH shows the scan results in result displays that have been designed for just such measurement tasks The receiver mode also adds the necessary functions like bandwidths or detectors to perform measurements according to CISPR By default the R amp S FSH is in the operating mode you have been in last after you have turned it on To switch to the receiver mode from another operating mode proceed as follows gt Press the MODE key Press the Receiver Mode softkey The R amp S FSH starts the receiver mode in single frequency measurement mode BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 196 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 selecting the Measurement Mode 8 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode In receiver mode the R amp S FSH features two measurement modes e Fixed Frequency Channel e Frequency Scan Channel Scan Fixed measurement mode is designed for measurements on single frequencies Scan measurement mode performs scans on a defined set of frequencies 8 1 1 Performing Single Frequency Measurements The R amp S FSH shows the result of the single frequency measurement in a result display that contains three main elements e Measurement or receive frequency e Power level measured at the receive frequency e Horizontal bargraph that graphically rep
304. pectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 Spectrum Analyzer Mode The default operating mode of the R amp S FSH is the spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer provides the functionality to perform measurements in the frequency domain e g to identify the power of signals 3 1 Performing Spectrum Measurements In addition to basic spectrum measurements the R amp S FSH provides several specific measurements These measurements also in combination with one of the available accessories allow you to perform advanced and more complex measurement tasks 3 1 1 Measuring Basic Signal Characteristics Basic spectrum measurements determine the spectrum of a signal in the frequency domain or keep track of a signal in the time domain They provide a basic overview of the input signal characteristics Frequency domain In the frequency domain the R amp S FSH analyzes the input signal characteristics over a particular soan You can use it for example to obtain basic measurement results like peak levels and the shape of the spectrum The horizontal axis shows the frequency the vertical axis shows the signal levels The measurement in the frequency domain is the default measurement mode Time domain In the time domain the R amp S FSH analyzes the characteristics of a signal at a particular frequency over time The span during time domain measurements is O zero span mode You can use time domain measurements for example to
305. pends on the subrange 1 ms to 10 ms 100 us 10 ms to 100 ms 1 ms gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trigger Delay menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay Enter the delay time you need BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 99 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Defining the Trigger Level When you are using the video trigger you have to define a trigger level The trigger level is a percentage of the reference level A trigger level of 100 is the same as the reference level A trigger level of e g 50 corresponds to the middle of the vertical axis The R amp S FSH indicates the video trigger level with a triangle gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Trace Video menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger level gt Enter the trigger level The R amp S FSH shows the trigger level by adding a horizontal line to the diagram area Performing Gated Sweeps When the external trigger is active it is possible to perform a gated sweep gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Trigger softkey gt Activate an external trigger Now that the external trigger is active the Gated Trigger menu item becomes available gt Press the Trigger softkey again gt Select the Gated Trigger menu item In order to get appropriate res
306. possible to protect the contents of measurement sets with a password from unauthorized access If you protect a measurement set you are able to edit the contents of the measurement set only after you have entered the correct password Password protection for measurement sets In addition you can control who is using the measurement sets by limiting its access to a particular set of R amp S FSH serial numbers only All other devices will not be able to process these wizard files 2 1 1 2 Uploading Measurement Sets In order to perform the actual measurements you have to upload the wizard definition file that contains the set of measurements to the R amp S FSH gt Select the Wizard Set Control function with the button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the measurement set s to upload gt Select the measurement set you want to upload gt Copy the files with the lt lt button BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 35 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA E Installing Firmware Options 2 1 2 Using the Measurement Wizard Now that the measurement set is available on the R amp S FSH you can start performing measurements 2 1 2 1 Starting the Measurement Wizard gt Press the USER key gt Press the Wizard softkey The R amp S FSH opens the wizard dialog box The dialog box contains information that you may later use for documentation purposes gt Press the Load Meas S
307. presario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde amp Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Baterias y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones
308. products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed E 1175 6590 12 02 Page vi R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad Es imprescindible leer y observar las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde A Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al dia con los estandares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el maximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segun las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garantia de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad adjunto de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde Schwarz est s
309. provides both average power and peak envelope power gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Fwrd Pwr Display softkey gt Select the weighting mode you require The R amp S FSH indicates the weighting mode at the Forward Power heading Forward power AVG average power Forward power PEP peak envelope power Selecting the unit for the power readout When using a directional power sensor the R amp S FSH displays the forward power as a logarithmic level value in dBm relative value or as a linear value in W or mW absolute value In addition you can define a reference level relative to which the R amp S FSH indicates the level difference in dB Load matching is indicated as return loss in dB or as voltage standing wave ratio VSWR In addition the absolutely reflected power can be displayed in W or the reflected level in dBm For more information see Selecting the unit for the power readout Setting the reference level If you have selected the unit dB Rel for the forward power the R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the reference level The R amp S FSH shows the currently set reference level in the diagram header For more information see Setting the reference level Selecting a standard To ensure that true results are output when measuring modulated signals the R amp S FSH offers the possibility of taking correction values into account for a number of common telecommunications standards gt Press the
310. r Le EE 248 962 THS Ke oerrinnende da cias 250 9 6 3 The Burst Power Result Display ooocccooocccccoccnccccoccccccnonnnocononcnconannononananononnnnnnos 250 9 6 4 Configuring the Measurement enaannneoneannrnsrennnensrnnnrnnrrnrrrnsrnnrresnnnrrersnnrereennenee 251 9 7 Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesneeeeeeeeeons 252 9 7 1 The Result SUMMA nissan sie davesacdeevedeadcesisedeee 252 9 7 2 The Code Domain Anahvzer 256 9 7 3 The Code Domain Channel Table A 258 974 The Syne ID Result DIS Olay ocinssnniaan ricas 260 9 7 5 The Time Domain Power Result Display 261 9 7 6 Configuring the Measurement oocccccccccnncnncccnonncononononnnnnonononnnnnononannnnnononanennnononanennnoss 263 9 8 Measurements on LTE SIGMAl Siuuncicesriaiini erre 267 390 1 Die Result y EE 267 9 8 2 The Constellation Diagram geseent n ge 272 oo ee MN CC Ee Te EE 273 9 8 4 The Resource Allocations Result Display 274 9 8 5 Configuring the Measurement enaannnnnnennnrnsrennnensrnrnrensnnrrrnsrnneresnnnrrrrsrnrerensnnenee 276 10 Menu and Softkey Overview ccccsseccssseesssneesesseeeeeseseeneeseees 280 101 General PUNO TE 280 10 11 General AGS FSSD rec 280 101 2 Ele Managemen tanatorios cba 281 10 1 3 Operating Mode Selection scort cdta 281 10 2 Functions of the Spectrum Analyzer cccssssseecesseesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeseeeeenenaseeesenenans 282 10 2 1 Measurement Sel
311. r Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements gt Confirm the delta marker position with the ENTER key The delta marker input field closes gt To add more markers press the New Marker softkey several times until you have the number of markers you want in the display 3 2 6 4 Selecting the Marker Type When you add new markers they will be delta markers by default Their coordinates are relative to the first marker M1 You can turn delta markers into normal markers if you need absolute information about the marker position gt Press the MARKER key gt Select the delta marker you want to convert with the Select Marker softkey The corresponding marker symbol turns red and the marker input field opens gt Press the Marker Type softkey The delta marker turns into a normal marker lts label changes accordingly e g D2 to M2 and its coordinates are now absolute values 3 2 6 5 Automatic Positioning of Markers The R amp S FSH offers functions that make setting the markers easier or allow to make instrument settings on the basis of the current marker position e Set to Peak The Peak function places the active marker or the delta marker on the highest level value of the trace e Set to Next Peak The Next Peak function places the active marker or delta marker on the next highest level value of the trace relative to its current position e Set to Minimum The Minimum function places the active marker or delta m
312. r R amp S FSH Z44 a directional coupler or an attenuator has to be connected ahead of the power sensor In such cases the coupling attenuation of the directional coupler or the attenuation value of the attenuator are to be entered as positive dB values see above into the R amp S FSH to ensure true measured power readout In both cases a termination or an attenuator of sufficient power handling capacity has to be connected to the power sensor at the load end The matching readout is irrelevant in such case since it is likewise corrected by taking into account the attenuation value of the termination or attenuator H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 134 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 AAA EE Using a Directional Power Sensor 5 Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 In wireless systems interference causes low data rates dropped calls and poor voice quality often making it impossible to establish or maintain a connection Equipped with option R amp S FSH K15 order no 1309 7488 02 and or option R amp S FSH K16 order no 1309 7494 02 you can track down the source of interferences with your R amp S FSH These options provide tools and means to make the search for interferers as comfortable as possible To measure interferences you ll also need a directional antenna like the R amp S HL300 order no 4097 3005 02 For more information refer to the Quick Start Guide The interference analyzer pro
313. r format This shows the results as numerical values and is the default format 6 5 3 2 Comparing Results If you perform measurements on different DUTs whose results you d like to compare you can save the current results as reference values gt Press the MEAS key 04 01 11 17 10 9 gt Press the gt Ref softkey RBW 10kHz SWT 1s Trace Clear Write Bae 0 de Trig Free Run Detect Sample The R amp S ZVH saves the results that it got prior to pressing the Magnitude Phase softkey as the reference result for future measurements 13 221 15 66 83 Ref 1 94 dB Ref 5 84 The results show the difference of the current measurement and the reference measurement The unit for reference measurements is ETRE O oE always dB Calibration Format Option The reference measurement results are always displayed below the current measurement results for better orientation Note that reference measurements are only available for the Vector Voltmeter measurement format 6 5 3 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis If you are using one of the graphical measurement formats all except the Vector Voltmeter format and the Smith Chart you can configure the vertical axis just like with scalar and vector measurements For more information see Configuring the Vertical Axis on page 174 BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 181 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 SII AAA AAA AAA AAA Vector
314. r level display Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 129 R amp S FSH Power Sensors Using a Directional Power Sensor 4 2 Using a Directional Power Sensor For power measurements in both directions forward and reverse you can connect directional power sensors to the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH supports the following directional power sensors e R amp S FSH 214 R amp S FSH Z44 With a directional power sensor the R amp S FSH measures the power of a signal from source to load forward power and from load to source reverse power The ratio of forward and reverse power is a measure of the load matching The R amp S FSH displays the results as the return loss or the standing wave ratio gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Power Meter softkey The R amp S FSH activates the mode for power measurements Screen layout of the power meter mode with a directional power sensor 070110 1100 G T Ret 0 0 dBm 4 Ofset 0048 IA 6932 11 ET Pi 7 Mu 6 Reflected Power iii T 20 5 30 35 dim Freq E 200 MHz ECK GE Freq Une b Ref Standard Connected power sensor model Selected transmission standard Reference for relative power measurements Power offset Readout of the forward power Analog readout of the forward power Readout of the matching value Analog readout of the matching value Measurement frequency O Directional power sensor softkey menu 00 JO Om PS Go M Operating Manual 1173 6275 12
315. r more information on setting the number of sweeps included in a single sweep see Selecting the Trace Mode Average gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Single Sweep softkey The R amp S FSH activates single sweep mode gt Press the Cont Sweep softkey The R amp S FSH again starts to measure continuously 3 2 4 3 Working with Trigger Functionality If you have to perform measurements according to certain signal conditions you can use a trigger A trigger responds to certain events If a trigger is active the R amp S FSH starts to measure if the trigger conditions are met The trigger can be generated either externally or internally The R amp S FSH provides the following trigger functions e Free Run A new sweep starts on completion of the previous sweep This is the default state of the R amp S FSH e Video Trigger A sweep starts when the video voltage exceeds a particular level The video trigger is available only in the time domain span 0 In the frequency domain the R amp S FSH would never start a measurement with the video trigger because there is no guarantee that there is a signal that generates video voltage present at the start frequency e External Trigger rising or falling slope A sweep starts on the rising edge RISE or on the falling edge FALL of an external trigger signal The external trigger signal is fed in via the BNC connector Ext Trigger The switching threshold is 1 4 V i e a TT
316. r spectrum measurements 10 5 5 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep E A AA kd 10 5 6 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths CC z n r ben ken be Fe Functions of the Distance to Fault Mode 10 5 7 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces i inane 10 5 8 Markers The MARKER and MKR keys open a menus to control markers and use marker functions Softkey in the Marker Menu Delete Selected Delete All Delta Delete All Softkeys in the Marker To Menu Functions of the Receiver Mode 10 6 Functions of the Receiver Mode This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in receiver mode Receiver functionality is available with option R amp S FSH K43 10 6 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement Single frequency measurements Channel scans Iso Direction Isotropic Antenna 10 6 2 Frequency Parameters The FREQ key opens the frequency menu that contains functionality to set up the horizontal axis of the measurement diagram CSC eg ii 10 6 3 Span Selection 10 6 4 10 6 5 10 6 6 10 6 7 Functions of the Receiver Mode Ampl
317. rameter than the one the R amp S FSH is calibrated for The calibration data for the factory calibration is already in the memory of the R amp S FSH when it is delivered The factory calibration is a full two port calibration BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 152 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements You can restore the factory calibration manually any time Press the Calibration softkey Select the User Calibration Off menu item e fcal The R amp S FSH uses factory calibration However the calibration is not accurate because the power of the tracking generator and the attenuation at the RF input are not in line with the default settings In that case you should repeat calibration e cal The R amp S FSH uses user calibration To get that state you have to perform either a full 1 port or a full 2 port calibration e cal The R amp S FSH uses user calibration However the calibration is not accurate because the TG power and receiver attenuation are not in line with the settings at the time it has been calibrated In that case you should repeat calibration e norm network analysis only The R amp S FSH uses normalization To get that state you have to normalize the transmission e norm network analysis only The R amp S FSH uses normalization However the normalization is not accurate because the TG power and receiver attenuation are not in line with the settings at
318. rameters ccccccsssssecccceeeeeceecceeeeeceessaaseeeeeesaaseeeesseaeeeesssaaeeeessesaaaess 304 Sweep Configuration cccccccoooconnnccnnnccnccnononcnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanas 304 LACS FUNCIONI E 305 How a Spectrum Analyzer Works c ccccssseeseeseeseeseeeeneeseeneeees 306 Je E 311 SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 7 R amp S FSH Documentation Overview Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSH is divided as follows Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide provides basic information on the instrument s functions It covers the following topics overview of all elements of the front and rear panels basic information on how to set up the R amp S FSH information on how to operate the R amp S FSH in a network instructions on how to perform measurements Operating Manual The Operating Manual provides a detailed description on the instrument s functions It covers the following topics e instructions on how to set up and operate the R amp S FSH in its various operating modes instructions on how to perform measurements with the R amp S FSH instructions on how to work with the available software options and applications Service Manual The Service Manual provides information on maintenance It covers the following topics e instructions on how to perform a performance test e instructions on how to repair the R amp S FSH including a spare parts list
319. rator with the E button The R amp S FSH opens a dialog that provides all functionality to manage measurement sets Datasets on PC Report Output o Folder GSM900_1 6 4 Ly Cr Show General Information Name Time E Report Show Marker Data IM 1_ 45deg set 2 20 2012 12 31 t_ 45deq set Show Measurement Results dt _ 45deg set 2 20 2012 12 31 di_ 45deq set D _ 4069 se O t_A5deg set Y Show Measurement Settings L d A5deg set 2 20 2012 12 31 dtf_ 45deg set Show R amp S logo in footer 1 dtf_ 45deg set 2 20 2012 12 31 isolation set EI Show Company logo L isolation set 2 20 2012 12 31 Select Company logo por HTML RTF Open after save o Definition Source folder of the datasets Preview of a particular dataset Measurement data to be included in the report Selection of the included information on each report page Selection of the output format Save load a report OO P Go bi With the report editor you can create measurement reports for the full measurement set or a selection of dataset only You can also perform simple tasks like activating or deactivating markers that have been set during the measurement gt Add the results you want to include in the report by setting a checkmark or removing the checkmark in the report pane gt Select the report format you would like gt Create the report with the Save button Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 41 R amp S FSH S
320. reflection measurements without having to recalibrate the R amp S FSH Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 164 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Vector Measurements R amp S FSH K42 6 3 2 Measuring the Reflection The example included here is based on a reflection measurement of the two port filter that was also used for the transmission measurement You can skip the preset vector measurement selection and frequency settings if you have already set up the R amp S FSH for the measurement You can also skip the calibration if you have performed the appropriate calibration already Preset the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start vector measurements gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Vector menu item Select the type of reflection measurement Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflection measurements on port 1 or the Reflection Port 2 menu item for reflection measurements on port 2 gt Select the Reflection on Port 1 and Port 2 menu item for simulatenous display of the reflection on both ports For more information see Performing Scalar Measurements on page 158 Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measureme
321. rence values Display of the antenna directions An isotropic antenna consists of three orthogonal elements Each of these elements measures the field strength from a different direction x y and Z axis Decrease of measurement speed Because the R amp S FSH performs a measurement on each of the three antenna axes the update rate of the results decreases slightly You can select to display different aspects of the measurement Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Iso Direction menu item The R amp S FSH opens a new menu to select the measurement aspect e Auto Shows the total field strength over all three antenna axes The displayed result is a combination of the results for each antenna element After measuring each of the three directions individually the R amp S FSH calculates the total field strength E based on the results for each antenna element E 4 E2 E E e x Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s x axis only e Y Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s y axis only e Z Shows the field strength measured on the antenna s z axis only BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 84 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 1 Configuring the Horizontal Axis The FREQ key contains all necessary functions to configure the horizontal axis for spectrum measurements The contents
322. resents the currently measured power level In the default state the R amp S FSH performs the measurement on a single receive frequency If it instead shows the result display for a frequency scan you can access the single frequency result display manually gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Fixed Freq softkey The R amp S FSH shows the result display for single frequency measurements Screen layout of the bargraph result display S Raf 47 0 Gi 3 RBW 1MHz MT 100ma Trace Clear Write Att Ode Trig Free Run Detect Max Peak Freq 105 610 MHz d Level 30 0 AT IAM 1 i I i L i i 2 0 230 10 30 50 370 390 410 410 p 1 Measurement mode 2 Operating mode 3 Header table 4 Receive frequency and corresponding power level numerical 5 Bargraph 6 Receiver softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 197 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 selecting the Measurement Mode 8 1 1 1 Defining the Receive Frequency In single frequency measurement mode the R amp S FSH determines the power level of a single frequency only The available frequency range depends on the R amp S FSH model you are using gt Press the FREQ key Press the Freq softkey Enter the frequency you want to measure For a quick change of frequencies with the rotary knob define a frequency stepsize gt Press the Freq Stepsize softkey Enter a frequency stepsize For measurements on systems that use channels
323. resolution bandwidth The R amp S FSH has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz The bandlimited IF is passed to the envelope detector The envelope detector removes the IF from the signal and outputs its envelope The output signal from the envelope detector is referred to as the video signal As it has been demodulated it only contains amplitude information The phase information is lost With RF sine signals the video signal is a DC voltage With AM signals the video signal contains a DC component whose amplitude corresponds to the carrier power and an AC component whose frequency is equal to the modulation frequency provided the modulation frequency is inside the resolution bandwidth i Amplitude Amplitude MAI A IF signal AM ae Envelope signal Time The video filter comes after the envelope detector The filter is a lowpass with an adjustable cutoff frequency which limits the bandwidth of the video signal It is particularly useful when sine signals are to be measured in the vicinity of the spectrum analyzer s intrinsic noise The sine signal produces a video signal that is a DC voltage At the IF however the noise is distributed over the whole bandwidth or in the case of the video signal over half the bandwidth of the resolution filter By selecting a narrow video bandwidth relative to the resolution bandwidth the noise can be suppressed while the sine signal to be measured DC is not affected The figures b
324. ress ENTER to add the term to site LIEU the file name 5 Se 708 VSWR B Bb The current file name is displayed oa gen we in the line above the table Seq i Rs A ir TD 3 CDMA So if you perform for example an ACLR measurement of an uplink LTE signal at a certain location you might want that information in the file name Site_LTE_UL_ACLR Insert REI Space Table Item Export Press the OK softkey to exit the quick naming table After you have exited the table the file name appears in the Save as field in the Save Dataset dialog box If necessary you can then add additional characters Note that by default the R amp S FSH adds a term without separators between each term If you need a separator between the term you can add a blank space or an underscore gt After having added a term press the _ softkey or the Space softkey Or to add a separator automatically upon adding a term gt gt Press the Auto Insert softkey Select the Off menu item to add no separator the _ menu item to add an underscore or the Space menu item to add a blank space AAA AA A A en EN NSS SSIS SSS SS SONOS Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 25 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets Designing a quick naming table The firmware of the R amp S FSH already has some basic mobile communication terms in the table However you can add up to 120 terms to the table
325. results by these characteristics The transducer factors for each of the supported isotropic antennas are provided with the R amp S FSH The factors contain typical correction values for all three antenna elements as well as the correction values for the cable gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Transducer softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the transducer factor gt Select the Primary Transducer menu item gt Select the transducer factor The file you have to select depends on the antenna you are using The file type of transducer factors for isotropic antennas is isotrd gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 83 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements If you are using the extension cable R amp S TS EMFZ2 you have to take this into account as a secondary transducer gt Press the Transducer softkey gt Select the Select Secondary Transducer menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select transducer factors with the unit dB Select the transducer factor for the extension cable gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey For more information see Using Transducer Factors on page 121 You can create and edit transducer factor with the R amp S FSH4View software package and then transfer them into the internal memory of the R amp S FSH Each transducer factor may consist of up to 1000 refe
326. rference Analyzer Map Mode Manual 0 dB i 15 0 FSH 238 10 7 4 Sweep Configuration The SWEEP key opens a menu that contains all functionality to configure the sweep Sl m kel bei kel kd 10 7 5 Bandwidth Selection The BW key opens a menu that contains all functionality to set the bandwidths CD M el ben en el Fe 10 7 6 Trace Functionality The TRACE key opens the trace menu that contains functionality to set up the traces ben el el Fe Max Peak Min Peak Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 10 8 Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer This section contains all softkeys and menus that are available in digital modulation mode Digital modulation functionality is available only with one of the corresponding options 10 8 1 Measurement Configuration The MEAS key opens the measurement menu that contains functionality to select and configure the measurement GSM Spectrum Overview Burst Power Result Summary Carrier Freg Error 3GPP WCDMA Limits Relative to CPICH ne H Zb ay Primary Code Slot Number DL OA a emm Secondary Code reiege Result Summary Mode IX Auto Channel Search Off Fast Channel Search On Normal Functions of the Digital Modulation Analyzer CDMA2000 Code Power Relative to Pilot Code Power Relative to Total 1xEV DO
327. rk is assigned a PN offset in steps of 64 chips If you use an external or GPS sync trigger you have to adjust the PN Offset according to the base station sector you are measuring gt gt gt gt Press the MEAS key Press the Signal Settings softkey Select the PN OFFSET menu Enter the PN Offset you need between 0 and 511 9 5 5 6 Synchronizing to a Base Station Using a GPS Receiver If you use a GPS receiver while performing measurements on a base station you can synchronize the sweep via the GPS receiver gt gt gt Press the SWEEP key Press the Trigger softkey Select GPS Sync menu item The R amp S FSH now synchronizes the sweep to the signal using the GPS receiver Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 246 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals 9 6 Measurements on 1xEV DO Signals Equipped with the software application R amp S FSH K47 you can perform measurements on downlink 1xEV DO signals in accordance to the 3GPP2 standard with your R amp S FSH gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Dig Mod Analyzer softkey gt Select the 1xEVDO BTS menu item The R amp S FSH starts the signal analysis After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH first records a section of the signal that lasts approximately 27 ms or about 1 Sync Frame Period If the instrument is in a triggered mode external or GPS trigger it then searches for the start o
328. rking with the Spectrogram Result Display R amp S FSH K14 K15 on page 74 These measurements work the same and yield the same results as in Spectrum mode You can configure the measurements just as in Spectrum mode For more information see Configuring Spectrum Measurements on page 85 In addition the R amp S FSH K15 provides several dedicated measurements 5 1 1 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio The Carrier to Noise C N measurement is a tool to determine if a signal has sufficient power compared to the spectrum surrounding it In case of the carrier to noise measurement the R amp S FSH determines the distance between the level of the carrier and the lowest signal level that has been measured usually the noise floor gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Meas Mode softkey The R amp S FSH opens the measurement menu gt Select the Carrier to Noise menu item The R amp S FSH starts to measure the carrier to noise ratio After you have started the measurement the R amp S FSH places two markers on the trace The first marker is placed on the peak power level The R amp S FSH assumes that position as the level of the carrier The second marker is positioned on the lowest level that has been measured Min Peak Based on the markers the R amp S FSH then calculates the difference between the two signal levels and returns the result as the Carrier to Noise ratio Optimizing the Settings In order to get the best resu
329. rload the R amp S FSH as the power is measured with a resolution bandwidth that is small in comparison with the signal bandwidth As with Channel Power measurements automatically set the reference to an optimal level with the Level Adjust softkey e Setting the span The frequency span must at least cover the carriers and the adjacent channels plus a measurement margin of about 10 to get valid results If the span is automatically calculated by the R amp S FSH with the Auto Span function the span is calculated as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin with the measurement margin being approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth Selecting the frequency span O If the frequency span is too large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adjacent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are available per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consideration when selecting the frequency span e Setting the resolution bandwidth The RBW should not be too high or too small to get both an acceptable measurement speed and a suppression of spectral components outside the channels As a
330. roll direction Spectrogram softkey menu CON OORWN By default the spectrogram result display consists of two windows The upper window shows the measured spectrum as a trace line The lower window shows the measurement results in a spectrogram The chronological information in the spectrogram Is restricted by the internal memory of the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH stores 1024 frames or spectrums that have been measured in its memory As the height of the display is smaller some of the data becomes invisible after a time 3 1 10 1 Controlling the Spectrogram Update The spectrogram starts running as soon as you enter the spectrogram mode if you are in continuous Sweep mode If you are in single sweep mode the R amp S FSH does not add a line to the spectrogram until you initiate the next single sweep You can stop the update of the spectrogram in continuous sweep mode gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Hold softkey Note that in continuous sweep mode the measurement in the spectrum result display does not stop The trace in the upper window still updates continuously Only the spectrogram view stops Press the Hold softkey again The R amp S FSH resumes updating the spectrogram The spectrogram result display is filled with results until you change a measurement setting As soon as a setting is changed the spectrogram clears and starts to fill again You can also clear the spectrogram manually gt Press the MEAS ke
331. rrently selected code channel in relation to the pilot channel or the RF channel power The numbers in the C lt x gt element and the walsh code Ch SF depend on the currently selected channel For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 245 9 5 2 2 Diagram Area The Code Domain Power result display contains the measurement results in graphic form lt shows the power of all codes in the signal In the graph each bar represents one Walsh code The displayed codes have different colors The color of the code depends on the state of the channel it belongs to e Yellow active code channels e Turquoise inactive code channels The number of codes that are displayed depends on the base spreading factor For more information see Setting the Base Spreading Factor on page 244 The order the R amp S FSH displays the codes in depends on the code order For more information see Changing the Code Order on page 244 The power of the codes is a relative value The reference power is either the total power of the signal or the power of the pilot channel For more information see Changing the Reference Power on page 245 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 240 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K46E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of t
332. s 12 EN geen 11 o 12 MD EE 11 Instrument setup pri 15 ISOMODIC nt ln 83 digital MOGUIAN OM EE 213 Key AMPLICA A RE 193 AMPLIA asta dieta E 174 AMOS clara 89 A o eo ee E se sees 94 A A T EET SE EE T 152 187 Freg GAN ni 191 PGC eege 85 VE TE 107 WS DOTE Mesias 184 Meas EE 152 158 162 167 Mesas LEE 127 132 Meas SA A A E o eee a 42 MKR iaa 107 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 312 R amp S FSH e o 97 co AMA o Geter ene ee 102 Es A EE E A E A A 88 A e o E OE a 118 AGR tea 61 tan V ll 117 177 EN EE EE E science eos E sie eae eee 267 carrier frequency error cccceeeeeseeeeceeneeeeceeaeeeeseaaaees 278 cl sion 276 channel bandwidth A 276 CVG Dl AP een 2 6 EVN E 279 A 278 q PA A 269 CECI ET 271 subframe configuration E 277 SIMCO Te 271 VE 249 Manual SD usas 191 E raso 107 176 automatic POSITIONING ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 109 delta Meester 108 ele 114 el E 171 Tele 112 cn APP 108 MOS uan cantata 171 EE 108 113 6211010 A ell E E eeen rie ener metres 110 Saco MMM ere 111 E AA 109 SONITONO Ree ner rios 171 elo E P 80 EE eege 109 Marker list AM modulation dent 70 harmonic GISIOMO E 68 SO SCI OGL Mireia ida 80 MAN GS ste cconteteente cc tates setuaedseatitcutensmenscaaieetaspeescuese 106 Max OIG EE 102 210 ee 103 203 Measures 97 O es ie eee 54 AM modulation dent 69 audio demodulation ooooocccccccnononcconnccnonnnnccnnnnnnonaninnnos 115 cable l
333. s always dB The delta marker frequency is always relative to the main marker in other words the delta marker frequency is the frequency difference between the frequency at the point marked by the main marker and the frequency at the point marked by the delta marker To measure complex signals you can activate up to six markers Marker 1 is always a normal marker and the reference of all delta markers Markers 2 to 6 are either markers or delta markers depending on your set up Screen Layout with Active Markers 1308 70 00 21 MEN amp Ref 0 0 d BW kHz SWT 113 ms 7 s n dB Trig Free Run Gj 4 6970254 GHz 76 19 dm y gt 1893214 MHz 3264 dBm A A 24 30 d m De m 50 o Marker list Marker label M x Delta marker label D x Active marker label red label Delta marker blue dotted line Marker blue line Marker input field Marker menu 0 JO Om bh Go M Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 107 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 2 Positioning Markers gt Press the MARKER key The marker menu opens If as yet no marker has been activated the R amp S FSH automatically activates the main marker and positions it on the maximum level that has been measured In addition the marker frequency input field opens You can perform the following actions e Position the marker with the cursor keys When positioning the marker with the cursor keys the step si
334. s are essentially equivalent because applying the Fourier transform to any signal converts it into its spectral components Depending on the signal characteristic to be measured one method is usually more appropriate than the other With an oscilloscope it is possible to tell whether a signal is a sine wave a square wave with a certain on off ratio or a sawtooth wave However detecting superimposed low level signals or monitoring the harmonic content of the signal is easier with a spectrum or signal analyzer Figure 11 1 shows the theoretical basis of the two measurement methods In the time domain an oscilloscope would for example show a section of the signal that is a square wave The same signal when viewed with a spectrum analyzer would show a line spectrum the fundamental and its harmonics Frequency Amplitude _ WN DAN A dp Seen domain a Time domain Time Figure 11 1 Visualization of time domain and frequency domain Applying the Fourier transform to the periodic square wave transforms it into the frequency domain The spectrum analyzer would show the fundamental or frequency of the square wave and its harmonics The spectrum analyzer uses a narrow bandpass filter for measurements in the frequency domain Only at frequencies containing a signal there is a reading that gives the amplitude of the frequency component Figure 11 2 shows the basic principle of how a spectrum analyzer works O A AA AAA AAA AA
335. s are only possible with models that feature tracking generator and VSWR bridge In addition to be able to determine the magnitude and phase characteristics of a DUT the option also features additional calibration methods and measurement functionality and formats e g group delay or phase gt Press the MODE key Press the Network Analyzer softkey The R amp S FSH turns on the tracking generator Frequency and level settings are inherited from the previous operating mode Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 150 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Working with Maps Defining the output level of the tracking generator The tracking generator generates a signal at the current R amp S FSH frequency The nominal output level of the signal is adjustable from O dBm to 40 dBm in steps of 1 dB gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the TG Output Attenuation softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the output level The output level is an attenuation between 0 dB and 40 dB that corresponds to the output level If you e g set an attenuation of O dB the output level is O dBm If you set an attenuation of 40 dB the output level is 40 dBm Screen layout of the network analyzer 4 09 09 1002 Ala Ref 0 0 d REW 10 kHz SVT 63 ms Trace Clear Write A s n 0dB Trig Free Run Detect Sampla d Center 3 5 GHz Span 500 MHz M le Calibrate aula Format Trace Option 1 Result display 2 Measurement mode 3
336. s available in map mode you will need a GPS receiver and an antenna for example R amp S HL300 which already contains a GPS receiver 5 2 1 Transferring Maps Before you can use any features based on maps you have to download and install the maps on the R amp S FSH The R amp S FSH supports the map material supplied by the Open Street Maps project htto www openstreetmaps org The easiest way for you to transfer the maps to the R amp S FSH is to use the R amp S Open Street Map Wizard OSM Wizard The OSM Wizard is available for download on the R amp S FSH product homepage http www rohde schwarz com product fsh html The OSM wizard establishes a connection to the Open Street Maps database and thus needs a connection to the internet The tool allows you to select the area that you need for your measurements and download the corresponding maps For more information on how to download and save maps refer to the documentation of the OSM Wizard The documentation is part of the software 5 2 2 Displaying Maps After you have downloaded the maps you need save them to an SD card which you can use with the R amp S FSH Enter the Maps mode A Ta ee Al VW 87 0 AIS HS TET a i i Lai k offe pu an z Gell e Ke d 3 BS ke og I En K ln 2 Ss L a j Ke ad L A F gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Map softkey The R amp S FSH opens a menu that contains all maps that you have stored on the S
337. s for Geotags For more information on geotags in general see Gathering Geographic Data on page 146 By default all geotags including all the labels associated with that geotag have the same color black Depending on the type of geotag you can assign different colors to the geotags Note that changing the color of a geotag in the interference analyzer R amp S FSH K15 also changes the color of the azimuth line Color of your current position To emphasize your current position you can define a different color to that geotag gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Current Position Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected Color of previous positions R amp S FSH K15 In the Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 you can distinguish between your current position and positions that you have visited or saved earlier gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Saved Position Color menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu to select the color gt Select one of the colors available in the submenu The R amp S FSH applies the color as selected In addition to the geotag you can also define a custom color for the triangulation results The R amp S FSH displays triangulation results as circle with a dot in the middle By default the circles and dot are blue You can change the c
338. s only if the signal exceeds the limit line If the signal level is the same as the limit value the limit check passes R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Working with Channel Tables 3 3 Working with Channel Tables Almost all transmission systems divide their assigned frequency ranges into channels Each channel corresponds to a specific frequency To keep the handling of such systems simple you can use channel tables instead of entering frequencies manually The R amp S FSH already comes with an assortment of channel tables that you can use without doing anything If you want to test transmission standards that are not listed you can also build channel tables manually with the Channel Table Editor of the R amp S FSH4View software package that is delivered with the R amp S FSH To use one of those you just have to copy the channel table to the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Selecting a channel table Press the FREQ key Press the Frequency Mode softkey gt Select the Channel menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a channel table gt Select one of the available channel tables After activating the channel table the R amp S FSH Is set up according to the information contained in the channel table Instead of a center frequency the R amp S FSH shows the currently active channel number including the name of the channel The center frequency of a channel is defin
339. s the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Gain menu item The R amp S FSH opens a submenu gt Select the gain setting you prefer Defining the volume of the audio signal The R amp S FSH allows you to adjust the volume of the audio signal gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the Tone Volume menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the volume gt Define a volume you are comfortable with The volume is a percentage from 0 to 100 with 100 being the loudest 5 2 3 3 Using Limits The R amp S FSH allows you to define limits within which the signal level must be in order to be recognized as a signal gt Press the LINES key Press the Upper Limit or Lower Limit softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the limits signals that are above the upper limit are ignored as well as signals that are below the lower limit Only the signal with these boundaries are actually considered in the analysis The limits you have defined are displayed in the power bar as red triangles Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 145 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps 5 2 4 Gathering Geographic Data The main application of the Maps mode is to gather geographic data The R amp S FSH provides two main applications triangulation and geotagging 5 2 4 1 Geotags A geotag is a tag for a particular location that contains information about that location T
340. see Selecting a Time Slot on page 265 RF Channel Power Shows the total power of the signal For more information see Global Results on page 254 Composite EVM Shows the composite Error Vector Magnitude EVM in For more information see Global Results on page 254 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 257 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDMA Signals 9 7 3 The Code Domain Channel Table If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K48E the code domain channel table becomes available to visualize the channel structure of the signal The code domain channel table shows various parameters and measurement results on code channel level Screen layout of the code domain channel table result display SINT AR vr Cemer 1 GHz Bei Levei 30 0 dBm TR Cont hanne Rei Offset 0 0 46 Sw Pat 3 d and DT Att S 6 0 dB Slat Number A Transd Preamp On Max Users 16 Ser Code 9 Ch Phases Fined Global ET RF Channel Power MIE dim Active Channels 4 Composite EVM KK Ser Code Found N A Code BE Bgapuzs Modulatioa Code Symbel Power abs Power rel to AF Type EVM Ss dBm Cham dB ON im iv OPSK 0 60 3 75 EC 216 Inactive Unknown nom 57 06 557 1316 inactive Linkin nan oO Eb e PO 476 Inactive Linkara DD B 28 EE qu 5 16 Active OPSK 0 55 35 80 604 616 Inactive Unknswmn aaa PS A 5564 7 16 Inactive Unkg wen BEI 50 12 8 16 Inaetvs Vakai ses PS
341. seeeeeeeeeeesnnseeeesseoes 215 9 3 1 The Result SUMMALY occccccococcnnnccnnoncnnncnnnancnononnnancnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnananenss 216 9 3 2 The Burst Power Result Display 220 9 3 3 Configuring the Measurement n eneannnnonennnnnrennnnnsrnrnrensnnrnnnnrnrrresnnnrrrnsnnrrrensnnrnee 221 9 4 Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 00ncccconcnnccnconncancccnnnnnanccnnnnnnnncnnnnnannncnrennnannnns 222 9 4 1 The Result SUMMArY occccccoccccnnncnnnoncnnnonnnnncnonononancnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnananens 223 9 4 2 The Code Domain Analvzer 227 A Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 4 R amp S FSH Table of Contents 9 43 The Code Domain Channel Table cc cccccccccceceeseseeeeeeeeeesaeeceeeeeeeeesaaaseeeeeeeeesaas 230 9 4 4 Configuring the Measurement noeannneonennernsrrnnnnnsrnrnnnnrnnrrnosrnnerennnnrrensnnrerensnnenee 232 9 5 Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals cccccssseeseeeeeeeeeeenenenseeeeeeseenensneeeeeeeenons 235 Ge Tie Result SUNMIN EE 236 9 5 2 The Code Domain Analy Zonacitas 239 9 5 3 The Code Domain Channel Table o ooccccccccoooonncccnncccncnnnonncnnnncnononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnanncnnnnnnnos 241 A a ld Een PAPA AA 243 9 5 5 Configuring the Measurement ooccccccccccncnnccononncononononnnnnonononncnnnnonannnnnononanennnnnnnanennnoss 244 9 6 Measurements on 1xEV DO SignNalS coonnccccnnnciconcnccnennanoncnnnnnonnnaanorennannrennannrrnnannos 247 96 1 The Rhesull in
342. selected slot In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label 9 3 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot RF Channel Power Total power of the signal in dBm in the 200 kHz bandwidth around the center frequency Burst Power Shows the signal power in the first time slot or burst that has been found Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH For more information see Selecting the Unit of the Carrier Frequency Error on page 221 Concerning uncertainty of the reference frequency of the GPS receiver refer to the data sheet C I BPSK modulated slots only Shows the ratio of the desired carrier power to the undesired signal power interference in dB The C l is an estimate derived from the EVM value Burst Types Shows the modulation type for each slot in the analyzed frame Each of the eight slots in the GSM frame may have a different modulation Thus the result is made up out of eight characters e g F INININI e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 217 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals The characters have the following meanings D Dummy burst E Normal burst with 8PSK modulation EDGE F Frequency correction burst I Idle burst N Normal burst with GMSK modu
343. sequence defined in the wizard If the R amp S FSH has already been calibrated with the defined routine prior to starting the wizard the R amp S FSH skips the calibration and directly starts the measurement e Measurements List of all individual measurements datasets that need to be performed for successful completion of the measurement task The list also shows the measurements that still need to be performed some parameters of the measurement setup you can still change directly on the R amp S FSH These are mainly parameters whose details may not be available when you define the measurement set or whose details may differ depending on the measurement site e g the cable length or the cable model if it is different to the one defined previously gt To change a parameter select it with the cursor keys and activate the corresponding input field with the ENTER key gt Update all parameters that are not correct for the current measurement BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 37 R amp S FSH Working with the Measurement Wizard AAA AAA AAA AAA AA E Installing Firmware Options 2 1 2 2 Performing a Sequence of Measurements Now that you have updated all parameters concerning the measurement task you can start the measurement procedure gt Press the Start Meas Set softkey If calibration of the R amp S FSH is necessary for the measurement task it asks you to perform the calibration routine The stages of the calibra
344. set when an event occurs gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Dataset item and turn it on If on the R amp S FSH saves a dataset of the current measurement if an event occurs For more information on events see Saving Events on page 19 1 8 1 2 Renaming File Names If necessary you can rename files or file directories directly on the R amp S FSH gt Enter the File Manager gt Select the file or directory you want to rename gt Press the Select Action softkey gt Select the Rename menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to change the name of the file Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 24 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 1 3 Quick Naming of Datasets The R amp S FSH provides a quick naming feature that speeds up the process of naming a file Putting together a file name Basically using the quick naming feature is a way of compiling a file name by putting one or more predefined text modules or terms together in a logical way The various terms are combined in a table each cell of which contains one term The table consists of 120 cells You can define the contents of each cell freely gt gt gt Press the SAVE RECALL key Press the Save softkey Press the Quick Naming softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box that contains the terms Select the term you want to add with the cursor keys P
345. skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde A Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Symbols and safety labels Attention Observe product Danger of Warning Hot Ground PE terminal Ground Electrostatic documen tation electric shock surface terminal sensitive devices Ed 1175 6590 12 02 Page i R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories Tags and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers A DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury amp WARNING indicates a hazardous
346. slots including the pilot time slots This measurement is useful to determine which time slots contain power Screen layout of the time domain power result display nm 14 24 A Raf 25 0 dBm At dB wW 30k Sweep Cont Ref OF 0 0 dE Preamp On Trace Clear Write Power Ef Comp EVM Slot havin Cyl Comp EVM dBm dB 56 dBm dB KA SFS 42 689 0 72 30 38 80 11 58 25 17 30 7 43 07 0 70 98 74 NA NA e D d 42 53 0 75 SR D A 44 15 0 62 90 85 1 Current type of result display 2 Currently selected standard 3 Header table 4 Result table 5 Diagram 6 TD SCDMA softkey menu The result display consists of a result table in the upper part of the display and a diagram in the lower half of the display The diagram contains a trace that shows the power of the signal over one TD SCDMA subframe The time slots in the frame are represented by blue vertical lines Each time slot is also labeled with a number A subframe consists of 7 normal time slots therefore the range of numbers is O through 6 The trace always begins with time slot 0 Note that the diagram also shows three time slots which are not numbered and have a shorter duration than the normal time slots These are the special time slots that belong to each subframe two time slots that conatin the pilot information and one time slot that serves as a guard period Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 261 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on TD SCDM
347. so adds features in accordance with EMI measurements 8 2 1 Selecting Detectors for EMI Measurements The receiver mode provides several types of detectors also available in other operating modes In addition it adds the average and quasi peak detectors e Max Peak If the max peak detector is active the R amp S FSH displays only the maximum power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e Average If the average detector is active the R amp S FSH calculates and displays the linear average power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e RMS If the RMS detector is active the R amp S FSH calculates and displays the RMS power of the signal that was measured during the measurement time e Quasi Peak If the quasi peak detector is active the R amp S FSH evaluates the signal in a way that complies to the requirements defined by CISPR16 It is designed for EMI measurements and especially useful for the evaluation of pulse shaped spurious emissions When you use the quasi peak detector the R amp S FSH uses a particular evaluation curve or bandwidth depending on the CISPR band CISPR band A frequencies lt 150 KHz 200 Hz bandwidth CISPR band B frequencies from 150 kHz to 30 MHz 9 kHz bandwidth CISPR band C D frequencies from 30 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz bandwidth Frequencies gt 1GHz 120 kHz bandwidth Bandwidth selection for the quasi peak detector If you select the quasi pea
348. softkey Select the GPS Position List menu item Select two or three geotags and display them on the map Press thze GPS Position softkey Select the Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH calculate the intersection point of the geotags you have selected The result is displayed on the map as a dot that is surrounded by a circle By default the dot and circle are blue However you can assign a different color to the triangulation results For more information see Selecting Colors for Geotags on page 141 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 148 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps Adding the triangulation result to the GPS position list gt Press the GPS Position softkey gt Select the Save Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH opens an input field to enter a name and description for the new geotag gt Enter a name and description After you have entered name and description the R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to define a name for the file that conatins the new GPS information Note that the R amp S FSH stores triangulation results in a gpx file The gpx file format is a common file format used to store GPS information gt Press the Save softkey to save the new gpx file 5 2 5 Analyzing Geographic Data The R amp S FSH4View software package provides an interface that allows you to export and review your recorded data with Google Earth This interface tra
349. softkey gt Select the Manual menu item or one of the automated attenuation modes gt Enter the attenuation of the signal at the RF input You can set an RF attenuation in the range from O dB to 40 dB in 5 GB steps Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 194 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 AAA EES Analyzing Measurement Results 7 3 Analyzing Measurement Results 7 3 1 Working with Traces For more information see Working with Traces on page 102 7 3 2 Using Markers For more information see Using Markers on page 107 When measuring the distance to fault the horizontal unit is meter or feet For all other measurements the horizontal axis is the frequency axis The unit of the vertical axis is dB for distance to fault and cable loss measurements and dBm for all others 7 3 3 Using Display and Limit Lines The display and limit line functionality in DTF mode is the same as that of the spectrum analyzer mode For more information on using the display line see Using Display Lines on page 116 For more information on using limit lines see Using Limit Lines on page 117 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 195 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Analyzing Measurement Results 8 Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Equipped with firmware option R amp S FSH K43 order no 1304 5635 02 you can perform receiver and channel measurements or scans with your R amp S FSH In receiver mode the R am
350. span Setting the frequency span When setting the frequency range it is best to first set the span and then the center frequency gt Press the SPAN key gt Press the Manual Span softkey By default the R amp S FSH automatically calculates the best span Auto Span for the best length resolution If the required span is too large for the current center frequency the R amp S FSH sets the center frequency to the smallest possible frequency gt Enter the span you need manually The R amp S FSH sets the new span Note that the maximum span you can set depends on the maximum cable distance you have defined and is never greater than the span calculated by the Auto Span function The minimum span that you can set is 10 MHz Setting the displayed frequency range After you have selected the span you can set a particular frequency range whose results the R amp S FSH displays In the default configuration the R amp S FSH adjusts the DTF start and DTF stop frequency according to the span and the center frequency The distance from center frequency to the start and stop frequency is the same Alternatively you can directly set a DIF start and DTF stop frequency gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the Center Freq softkey gt Enter the frequency that you d like to be in the center of the horizontal axis The R amp S FSH adjusts the frequency range according to span and center frequency H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12
351. ss information GPS connection quality and triangulation results 5 Power results 6 Map area including geotags 7 Power bar including noise squelch level 8 Geotagging softkey menu Adding and removing elements The result display is made up out of several elements that you can add or remove as you like gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Settings softkey gt Select the element you want to add or remove GPS receiver and antenna support gt Turn on with Antenna Compass or GPS menu item Hardware settings gt Turn on with Show Hardware Settings menu item If on the display contains the hardware settings Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 139 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 e Working with Maps GPS and compass information gt Turn on with Show GPS Information or Show Compass Information menu item If on the display contains the GPS and compass information The compass information is available with the R amp S HL300 antenna Power results gt Turn on with Show Power Results menu item If on the display contains the power results Power bar gt Turn on with Show Power Bar menu item If on the display contains the power bar In addition to the currently measured signal level the power bar also shows the squelch level for noise signals vertical yellow line 5 2 2 1 Zooming in and out of the Map If you have downloaded different zoom levels of your maps
352. ss the Continue softkey to start calibration The R amp S FSH calibrates the Load gt Disconnect the Load Next the R amp S FSH asks you to set up a Through connection from port 1 to For calibration please replace the DUT by a THROUGH connection port 2 Press Continue to start the calibration gt Firmly connect the Through connection to port 1 and port 2 gt Press the Continue softkey to start calibration The R amp S FSH calibrates the Through connection After finishing the calibration routine the R amp S FSH shows that calibration is finished for a short time Galibration donei The status line now says Cal to indicate successful calibration Selecting a calibration kit To avoid phase errors you have to define the characteristics of the calibration kit you d like to use and then select the calibration kit in use The R amp S FSH then corrects the measurement results accordingly You can either use one of the calibration kits specifically designed for use with the R amp S FSH e g the R amp S FSH Z28 and Z29 calibration kits Those provide an Open Short and Load calibration standard in one piece The characteristics of these calibration kits are already part of the R amp S FSH firmware You can create and edit calibration kits with the R S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memor
353. sult Display softkey gt Select the Transmission Fwd Port 12 menu item for transmission measurements in forward direction or Transmission Rev Port 1 2 menu item for transmission measurements in reverse direction gt Select the Transmission Fwd and Rev menu item for a simultaneous display of both forward and reverse transmission measurements In case of a simultaneous display the R amp S FSH shows two traces with a different color in the result display One for the measurement in forward direction and one for the measurement in reverse direction A label in the result display shows the direction a trace belongs to Note that the simultaneous display of both directions is only possible with a high accuracy calibration Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 158 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Performing Scalar Measurements Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid inaccurate results because of invalid calibration gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency gt Enter a frequency of 2060 MHz gt Press the SPAN key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the span Enter a span of 50 MHz to get a high resolution of the results Calibrate the measurement for scalar transmission measurements Scalar measurements provide normalization only Normalization is not as accurate as
354. surements 3 2 6 7 Using Marker Search Limits The R amp S FSH allows you to use only a limited section of the trace for the Set to Peak Set to Next Peak and Minimum functions Press the MKR gt key gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Search Limits On Off menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH activates the marker search limits An X indicates an active search limit Two vertical red lines show the lower and upper limits in the diagram By default the search limit range is over the whole span gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Lower Limit menu item gt Confirm the selection with the ENTER key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the lower limit of the search range Enter the lower limit gt Confirm the entry with one of the unit keys If the span is wide enough the R amp S FSH displays a red vertical line to indicate the lower limit gt Define the upper search limit the same way Deactivating marker search limits gt Press the Search Limits softkey gt Select the Search Limits On Off menu item gt Confirm the selection The Search Limits softkey turns grey again and in the Search Limits menu the X is no longer displayed Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 111 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 6 8 Using Marker Functions In addition to the frequency and lev
355. t contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product 8 Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling 1175 6590 12 02 Page v R amp S FSH Basic Safety Instructions Transport 1 Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage 2 If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident Waste disposal 1 If
356. t dBc Hz with marker 1 MN UL TTT being the reference e Tote Marker z Marker Marker Function Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 112 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Measuring the Frequency The R amp S FSH provides a frequency counter The frequency counter accurately measures the frequency at the marker position When calculating the horizontal position of the marker the R amp S FSH includes the current span center frequency and the frequency of the pixel the marker is on As the trace only has 631 pixels the marker position is just an approximation especially if the Span is very wide With the frequency counter however you can get a more accurate result of the horizontal marker position If the frequency counter is active the R amp S FSH stops the measurement at the marker position for a short time and measures the frequency using the internal reference frequency The accuracy of the results therefore depends only on the accuracy of the internal reference frequency TCXO The frequency counter has a resolution of 0 1 Hz and therefore provides far more accurate results Despite the accuracy the measurement is still fast because of a special algorithm for the I Q baseband signal The frequency counter only gives completely accurate readings for sine signals that are at least 20 dB above the noise floor If the S N ratio is less noise affects the results 191110 1
357. t of a burst is defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 218 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on GSM Signals Slot EVM 8PSK modulated slots only Shows the Error Vector Magnitude EVM of the analyzed slot in The EVM is defined as the ratio of the mean error power of the signal to the power of an ideal reference signal Peak EVM 8PSK modulated slots only The Peak EVM is the peak value of the EVM of all symbols in the useful part excluding tail symbols of the analyzed slot The RMS EVM is the root mean square value of the EVM of all symbols in the useful part excluding tail symbols of the analyzed slot UO Offset BPSK modulated slots only Shows the DC offset of the analyzed time slot in Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 219 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer ee a ae Measurements on GSM Signals 9 3 2 The Burst Power Result Display If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K10E the Burst Power result display becomes available The Burst Power result display shows the power of the signal over time You can choose to display the power over a single and complete GSM frame 4 615 ms or over a single timeslot about 567 us This result display is designed to check if the power and timing of the bursted signals meet the requirements of the standard In order to capture a complete frame you can apply a trigger from a GPS device or another external trig
358. t results you can use the automatic adjustment routine that the R amp S FSH offers Press the MEAS key gt Press the Adjust Settings softkey The R amp S FSH performs a sweep and repeats the peak search sequence for the 5 1 3 Analyzing Interference Measurements 5 1 3 1 Trace Mathematics Diff Mode The Interference Analyzer provides a quick way to apply trace mathematics Trace Memory Trace and thus a quick way to compare the current results with a previous one gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Diff Mode softkey When you turn on the Diff Mode the R amp S FSH saves the current trace memory trace and will subtract this trace from the live traces resulting from future sweeps For more information on general trace mathematics supported by the R amp S FSH see Using Trace Mathematics on page 106 Note that Diff Mode is only available in the Spectrum Overview result display of the Interference Analyzer Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 137 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 AAA IA AA Working with Maps 5 2 Working with Maps Options R amp S FSH K15 and K16 allow you to work with maps for example view and save the position of measurements With option R amp S FSH K16 you are also able to determine the source of interference through triangulation The options also provide several other tools that make it easier to locate interference To make full use of the function
359. t the R amp S FSH Before starting the measurement procedure preset the R amp S FSH to restore the default configuration and connect the filter between the measurement ports gt Press the PRESET key gt Connect the DUT Start scalar measurements Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Scalar menu item Select the type of reflection measurement Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Reflection Port 1 menu item for reflection measurements on port 1 or the Reflection Port 2 menu item for reflection measurements on port 2 gt Select the Reflection Port 1 and Port 2 menu item for a simultaneous display of both the reflection on port 1 and on port 2 In case of a simultaneous display the R amp S FSH shows two traces with a different color in the result display One for the measurement on port 1 and one for the measurement on port 2 A label in the result display shows the port a trace belongs to Note that the simultaneous display of both ports is only possible with a high accuracy calibration Define the frequency parameters Before calibrating the measurement you should define the frequency parameters to avoid inaccurate results because of invalid calibration gt Press the FREQ key The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the center frequency Enter a frequency of 2060 MHz Press the SPAN key Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 160 R amp S FSH Networ
360. tep is a pixel As the trace consists of 631 pixels each step is equal to 1 630 of the span With the cursor keys the step is 10 of the span or one division of the grid You can set another step size gt Press the FREQ key gt Press the CF Step Size softkey The R amp S FSH opens a submenu that contains possible step sizes BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 85 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 0 1 x Span The step size equals 10 of the span or 1 division of the horizontal axis Center The step size equals the center frequency This step size is ideal for measurements on harmonics When you increase or decrease the center frequency the center frequency automatically moves to the next harmonic Manual Define any step size you want This step size makes it easy to investigate a spectrum with frequencies at constant intervals gt Select the step size you need from the menu The R amp S FSH adjusts the step size accordingly If you set the step size to 10 of the span or to the center frequency the R amp S FSH sets the step size internally Manually defining the step size opens an input field to define the step size 3 2 1 3 Setting a Frequency Offset For measurements on frequency converters such as satellite downconverters it is often convenient to reference the results to the frequency prior to conversion For this purpose the R amp S FSH offers a frequ
361. th by a factor of 10 the displayed noise changes by 10 dB e The resolution bandwidth affects the speed of the measurement If you want to display the true spectrum the resolution filters have to settle at all frequencies that are of interest Narrow bandfilters have a longer settling time compared to wide ones Therefore the sweep time increases the smaller the resolution bandwidth gets The rule is that if you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 3 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 9 If you reduce the bandwidth by a factor of 10 the sweep time goes up by a factor of 100 The R amp S FSH has resolution bandwidths from 1 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1 3 10 sequence Additionally the R amp S FSH provides a 200 kHz resolution bandwidth that you have to select and enter manually The 200 kHz bandwidth is not coupled to the span so it will not be selected if automatic selection of the RBW is on E Setting the 200 kHz resolution bandwidth In fact you have to enter the 200 kHz resolution bandwidth with the number keys When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys the 200 kHz bandwidth will be skipped In the R amp S FSH s default state the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span i e if you change the span the R amp S FSH adjusts the resolution bandwidth Therefore you do not have to set the resolution bandwidth manually in many cases because the R amp S FSH automatically sets the resolution bandwidth if you change the span gt Press
362. th c being the velocity of light By definition the electrical length is calculated from the vacuum velocity of light and the differential group delay 7 Here the group delay is replaced by the phase delay for two reasons e An electrical length needs to be specified only for non dispersive DUTs in which phase delay and group delay match e Due to the significantly wider aperture the measurement certainty is an order of magnitude higher in the phase delay measurement than in the group delay measurement The result for the electrical length is correct only if the phase difference between two adjacent test points does not exceed 180 Available for vector measurements Delay time Shows the delay time of a cable The delay time is a numerical result that is displayed in addition to another measurement format The delay time is the propagation time of the wave or the time it takes the wave to reach its destination Available for the vector phase measurements 6 4 1 1 Working with the Smith Chart If you are displaying measurement results in a Smith chart available for vector reflection measurements the R amp S FSH provides several special functionality gt Press the MEAS key Press the Measurement Format softkey gt Select the Smith Chart menu item The R amp S FSH shows the reflection of the DUT in the Smith chart BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 169 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluat
363. the Power BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the power percentage gt Enter the power percentage you need The value you enter here is the power percentage that has to be inside the channel bandwidth relative to the power over the total span the percentage of the total power The R amp S FSH now displays the occupied bandwidth graphically in the trace window and numerically above the trace window 3 1 3 5 Changing the Span Usually the soan the R amp S FSH sets yields optimal results But sometimes you also need to see the spectrum outside the current span to detect other signal components that you need to include in the measurement Therefore you can adjust the span to up to ten times the channel bandwidth and still be able to see the spectrum outside the measurement channel gt Press the SPAN key In the default configuration Auto Span is active The R amp S FSH automatically sets the optimal span for the channel power measurement gt Press the Manual Span softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the soan manually gt Enter the span you need The largest possible span for the channel power measurement Is ten times the channel bandwidth At larger spans the result of the channel power measurement would be increasingly imprecise because too few points of the trace occur in the channel to be measured gt Press the Auto Span softkey The R amp S FSH again calculates th
364. the BW key By default the resolution bandwidth is coupled to the span E Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 94 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Press the Manual RBW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the resolution bandwidth gt Enter the resolution bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH uses the resolution bandwidth you have entered for the measurement If the resolution bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the RBW hardware setting RBW 30 kHz gt Press the Auto RBW softkey to again couple the resolution bandwidth to the span In its default mode the R amp S FSH automatically adjusts the sweep time as soon as you change the resolution bandwidth This is to make sure that the settling time required for the selected resolution filter is properly taken into account The maximum allowed sweep time is 1000 s For narrow resolution filters this value would be exceeded for large spans In order to avoid this the R amp S FSH adjusts the span automatically as soon as the maximum sweep time is reached Automatic adjustment of the sweep time 3 2 3 2 Setting the Video Bandwidth The video bandwidth VBW basically smoothes the trace by reducing the noise and therefore making power levels easier to see The noise reduction is a result of the video filter This lowpass filter defines the video bandwidth and filters the
365. the best and most accurate results you have to calibrate the measurement The R amp S ZVH provides several calibration methods You will need one of the available calibration standards R amp S FSH Z28 Z29 order no 1300 7804 03 and 1300 7504 03 or R amp S ZV Z121 order no 1164 0496 02 03 To successfully calibrate the test setup you have to connect the calibration standard at the reference plane usually the output of the RF measurement cable Calibration is performed over the R amp S FSH s entire frequency range full span This eliminates the need for recalibration when you change a parameter or select a different cable or DUT Calibration also remains valid after turning off the R amp S FSH or changing into another operating mode as calibration data is saved in the internal memory of the R amp S FSH If you save the measurement in a dataset calibration data is part of that dataset When you restore the dataset and perform the same measurement again you do not have to recalibrate the R amp S FSH 7 1 5 1 Calibration States The calibration states are the same as for the network analyzer For more information see Calibration States on page 152 7 1 5 2 Calibration Methods In distance to fault mode the calibration method is a full 1 port calibration For more information see Calibration Methods on page 154 7 1 5 3 Performing a Full 2 Port Calibration For a description of a complete calibration procedure see Performing
366. the pictures with the R amp S FSH4View software to your computer Saving screenshot and dataset at the same time Depending on the Capture settings available in the User Preference menu using the gy key also saves a dataset in addition to the screenshot For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 Screenshot file name All screenshots get a default file name Screenshot The files also get numbers in ascending order beginning with 0000 You can select a default file name and start number in the User Preference menu Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Default Filename and File Name Counter Starts At items and assign a file name and number as you wish Screenshot file format The file format of screenshots is either png or jpg depending on your configuration in the User Preference menu gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preference softkey gt Select the Capture Screen Format item to select the screenshot file format Previewing screenshots If you want to make sure if a screenshot you took contains the wanted information you can preview screenshots on the R amp S FSH gt Press the SAVE RECALL key gt Press the Recall Screenshot softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select a screenshot for the preview Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 18 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Saving Events 1
367. the sections above For more information see The Result Summary on page 236 Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 241 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on CDMA2000 Signals 9 5 3 3 Channel Table The channel table is made up out of seven columns and a number of rows that depend on the number of channels The columns show the following information Channel Type Type of channel indicates an inactive channel The following channels can be detected F SYNC Synchronization channel displayed as SYNC F PICH Pilot channel displayed as PICH All other channel types are not automatically differentiated and named as CHAN Walsh Ch SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt Symb Rate ksps Symbol rate that the channel is transmitted with 9 6 ksps to 307 2 ksps RC Radio configuration The RC is a predefined physical layer configuration for the transmit signal lt defines the physical channel configuration based upon a specific channel data rate In the current CDMA2000 Standard nine RCs are defined in the forward link Status Status display Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels Power Abs dBm Absolute power of the channel in dBm Power Rel to PICH Total dB Relative power of the channel in dB The reference channel is the PICH or the total signal depending on the reference power you have selected Operating M
368. the video voltage over time The horizontal axis becomes a time axis that starts at O s and ends at the sweep time that you selected The range of the sweep time in the time domain is from 200 us to 1000 s gt Press the SWEEP key In the default state Auto SWP Time is active gt Press the Manual SWP Time softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to set the sweep time gt Enter the sweep time you need If the video bandwidth is no longer coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth the R amp S FSH puts a red dot at the SWT hardware setting SWT 2 5 s H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 97 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements 3 2 4 2 Selecting the Sweep Mode The sweep mode is the way the R amp S FSH performs the measurement In its default state the R amp S FSH measures continuously In this mode the R amp S FSH automatically repeats the sweep in the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and updates the trace accordingly after it has finished with one sweep In some cases it may be sufficient to get the results over a single sweep only e g if a particular trigger condition is met In single sweep mode the R amp S FSH performs the sweep a certain number of times depending on the number of averages you have set over the defined range of the horizontal axis frequency or time and then stops measuring It performs another sweep only after you tell it to Fo
369. ting a Standard If you need to perform measurements that are conform to a telecommunications standard you can activate one of the predefined standards that are already stored in the R amp S FSH memory Those predefined standards have already been set up to yield the best results However the R amp S FSH provides functionality to create new configurations to perform measurements on other test setups as well gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Standard softkey The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the standard gt Select one of the available standards gt Confirm the selection with the Select softkey The R amp S FSH loads the configuration of the selected standard It automatically sets the optimal span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and detector for the standard You can create and edit standards with the R amp S FSH4View software and transfer them to the R amp S FSH via the USB or the LAN interface The number of standards the R amp S FSH can store in its memory depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 3 1 5 2 Configuring the Measurement In addition to creating and editing standards with the R amp S FSH4View software the R amp S FSH also provides functionality to set up a measurement configuration Setting the number of transmission channels gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Channel Settings softkey gt
370. tion and to prevent incorrect measurements the R amp S FSH has an automatic routine for setting the reference level gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Level Adjust softkey The R amp S FSH performs a measurement to determine the ideal reference level It uses a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz a video bandwidth of 1 MHz and the peak detector After finishing the automatic measurement the R amp S FSH sets the ideal reference level 3 1 3 3 Setting the Channel Bandwidth The channel bandwidth specifies the frequency range around the center frequency over which the R amp S FSH performs the power measurement gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Chan BW softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to specify the channel bandwidth gt Enter the channel bandwidth you need The R amp S FSH sets the appropriate span for the channel bandwidth that you have entered span 5 x channel bandwidth This ensures that no incorrect channel power measurements are made The minimum channel bandwidth that you can set is 2 kHz at a span of 1 kHz Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 49 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 3 4 Defining the Percentage of Occupied Bandwidth By default the power percentage inside the occupied bandwidth is 99 a number most standards require If you measure standards that specify another power percentage you can change that value gt Press the MEAS key gt Press
371. tion depend on the defined calibration routine For more information see Calibrating Measurements on page 152 Calibration pool The R amp S FSH adds the calibration data of each calibration you perform to a calibration pool available on its internal memory Each dataset in the calibration pool is unique for a particular calibration method and a particular measurement configuration Note that the calibration is only valid for the instrument it has been performed on Before you start a measurement sequence with the measurement wizard the R amp S FSH compares the contents of the calibration pool to the measurement configurations and required calibration methods in the measurement sequence e Ifthe R amp S FSH has already been calibrated for a particular configuration it restores that data Another calibration is not necessary e If the R amp S FSH has not been calibrated for a particular configuration yet calibration becomes necessary The new calibration data is added to the pool Therefore calibration is necessary only for calibration methods that have not been used for a particular measurement configuration before However it is recommended to perform calibration on a regular basis to keep measurements as accurate as possible You can delete obsolete calibration data from the folder Public CalibrationPool Measurement sequence After having successfully calibrated the R amp S FSH it starts to go through the measurements
372. ts Smith chart Shows the measurement results in the Smith chart The Smith chart is a circular diagram that primarily shows impedance or reflection characteristics of a DUT Available for vector reflection measurements For more information see Working with the Smith Chart on page 169 Cable loss Shows the cable loss characteristics of a DUT The cable loss is a measure to determine the attenuation of a cable in a particular frequency range The diagram is a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis that shows the cable attenuation The horizontal axis represents the measured frequency range Available for vector reflection measurements Group delay Shows the group delay characteristics of the DUT The group delay is a measure that describes the time period or delay of the signal as it goes through the DUT Available for vector measurements BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 168 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results Electrical length Shows the electrical length of a DUT The electrical length is a numerical result that displayed in addition to another measurement format As long as it is active the electrical length is displayed regardless of the currently selected format The electrical length is calculated from the phase delay AQ T Zoch with A being the phase deviation over the entire frequency range The electrical length is then derived by lo Toco wi
373. twork or battery Use a soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or siress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protection pregnant women must be protected by appropriate me
374. tworks with one or two ports To enable the features of the network analyzer mode you need at least an R amp S FSH with tracking generator or one that also has an internal VSWR bridge Scalar measurements In its basic configuration an R amp S FSH with tracking generator can only perform scalar measurements and determine the reflection or reverse transmission characteristics of the device under test DUT However scalar measurements determine the magnitude of the transmitted or reflected power only Measurements yield the best results when you calibrate the R amp S FSH to the test setup Although the accuracy of measurements Is high in the default factory calibration the R amp S FSH also provides all necessary calibration methods to correct the magnitude for these kinds of measurements and make results even more accurate If the R amp S FSH also has an internal VSWR bridge the R amp S FSH can also determine the reflection on either port or the forward transmission characteristics The VSWR bridge enables the R amp S FSH to switch the tracking generator to each of the measurement ports ports 1 and 2 and can therefore send signals from port 2 to port 1 and vice versa Vector measurements To increase the dynamic range and measurement accuracy you can equip the R amp S FSH with firmware option R amp S FSH K42 order no 1304 5629 02 This enables vector measurements for the network analyzer operating mode Note that vector measurement
375. u can use it to access and control the R amp S FSH in the R amp S FSH4View environment While the R amp S FSH is running and connected to the control computer the screen contents and control elements keys softkeys etc are displayed Thus you can operate the R amp S FSH just like the hardware itself gt Connect the R amp S FSH to the control computer gt Start the R amp S FSH4View software Press the Remote Display button sit in the user interface The software opens the remote display to operate the R amp S FSH remotely Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 13 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Presetting the R amp S FSH 1 3 Presetting the R amp S FSH Before you prepare a measurement it is recommended to preset the R amp S FSH During a preset the R amp S FSH resets all settings to their default state Restoring the default configuration has the advantage that old settings do not affect measurements The default setup is specific to the operating mode gt Press the PRESET key The R amp S FSH restores its default setup You can also define your own default settings via a dataset These are then loaded after pressing the PRESET key instead of the factory default gt Press the SETUP key gt Press the User Preferences softkey gt Select the Preset Dataset menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the dataset that contains the settings you would like to have as the preset settings
376. ually Press the BW key gt Press the Manual RBW softkey to select a 3 dB bandwidth or gt Press the Manual CISPR BW to select a 6 dB bandwidth gt Select the bandwidth you need with the rotary knob or by entering the corresping number gt Press the Auto CISPR BW to select the 6 dB bandwidth automatically according to the list above Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 204 R amp S FSH Receiver Mode R amp S FSH K43 Configuring Measurements in Receiver Mode 8 2 3 Defining the Measurement Time The measurement time is the time that the R amp S FSH collects data at each measurement frequency to calculate the results for that frequency according to the detector you have selected You can define a measurement time between 5 ms and 1000 s gt Press the SWEEP key gt Press the Meas Time softkey gt Define the measurement time you need Selecting the scan mode When you enter the receiver mode the R amp S FSH repeatedly measures the receive frequency or set of frequencies over the measurement time you have defined If you want to perform a single measurement or scan only select single scan mode gt Press the SWEEP key Press the Single Scan softkey to perform a single scan or measurement gt Press the Cont Scan softkey to perform a continuous scan or measurement When you select single scan mode the R amp S FSH performs the measurement once over the measurement time and then stops In case o
377. udes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto 2 Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte 1175 6590 17 02 Page iv R amp S FSH Informaciones Elementales de Seguridad Como con todo producto de fabricacion industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde amp Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El em
378. ults you have to set the gate delay and gate length ina way that the measurement is active during the interesting part of the signal You can also modify the sweep time in order to match the horizontal axis to the length of the signal and thus set the gate delay and gate length parameters more accurately The gate delay parameter defines the time between the trigger event and the beginning of the actual measurement The gate length defines the duration of the measurement before it is interrupted and the next gate signal is anticipated to resume the measurement gt Press the SWEEP key Press the Trigger softkey gt Select the Gate Settings menu item The R amp S FSH opens a softkey submenu to control the gate settings At the same time the R amp S FSH switches into time domain as indicated in the display gt Press the Manual SWP Time softkey and set the sweep time in a way that the portion of interest of the signal is visible on the screen H Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 100 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Configuring Spectrum Measurements Press the Gate Delay softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the trigger delay gt Enter the delay time you need The measurement now starts after the delay time has passed gt Press the Gate Length softkey The R amp S FSH opens an input field to define the gate length gt Enter the length of the gate The R amp S FSH now measures over th
379. us Emission menu item gt Press the Start Meas softkey The R amp S FSH starts the measurement Note that the frequency range of the actual measurement depends on the start and stop frequency you have set for the carrier Correct measurement results are therefore only possible if the frequency ranges of the measurement are inside the current span of the R amp S FSH Screen Layout for the Spurious Emission measurement a Raf 10 0d6m Trace tig Free Run Detect Rh Limit Line SGPP BTS Category A Range Hz REW Az Peak Freq Hi Peak Power 3 000 k 155 000 k ik 17 827 k 43 48 dEm 30 000 MA e 10 k EK HI 5 45 dBm 1 000 100 k 145 400000 M 25 67 Em 2 000 G IN 1 870000 E WA dm o 1 Result display 2 Limit check 3 List of spurious emissions 4 Limit line red line 5 Trace yellow line 6 Spurious Emission softkey menu Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 71 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements Markers in the Spurious Emission measurement In addition to the normal marker functionality of the R amp S FSH the Spurious Emission measurement provides special markers labeled P1 to Px The R amp S FSH activates and positions these special markers automatically after displaying the trace Each of these markers marks the peak level in each Spurious Emission range The numerical marker information frequency and level for these markers is part of the result table
380. ve to enter the correct values for center frequency reference level or in case of for example a WCDMA signal the correct scrambling code To indicate successful synchronization the R amp S FSH shows the sywe ox label If the synchronization was not successful the R amp S FSH shows the SYNC NOT FOUND label Position Shows the current GPS coordinates if you have connected a GPS receiver and have activated the GPS receiver If not this field stays empty For more information see the Quick Start Guide SSES Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 209 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer 9 1 2 Trace Mode Selection The digital modulation analyzer supports trace modes for various result displays available for those applications numerical and graphical e Clear Write In its default state the R amp S FSH overwrites the results after each sweep e Average The results are based on the moving average over several sweeps The R amp S FSH calculates the moving average of the power levels over a particular number of sweeps in the range from 2 to 999 1 Channel Results lf yo U are USI Ng th e ave rag em ode P CPICH 15 ksps Code 0 P CCPCH 15 ksps Code 1 the R amp S FSH adds the avg label Power 41 13 dBm avg Power Abs 4113 dBm avg Eer lo 10 01 dE avg Eclo 10 01 dE avg to numerical results Symbol EVM rms 0 39 avg Symbol EVM rms 0 43 avg P 8CH Power
381. ve two ways to set things straight By cutting the reference level you can eliminate amplitudes from the color map that are not part of the signal Example By default the spectrogram reference level is 30 dBm 01 04 10 16 46 em That means that signal parts with Ref 20 0 dBm RBW 100kHz SWT 500 ms Trace Clear Write an amplitude of 30 dBm would be yellow in the spectrogram and 40 0 80 0 Arc 0 dB YEW 1 MHz Trig Free Run Detect AMS signal parts with a very small w amplitude would be dark green iv Everything in between is a shade of the colors between As the colors are distributed over a very large range about a 150 dBm or more it is likely that you can not distinguish details In the signal you Center 952 MHz Span 3 04 MHz os ll have measured Mode Some Playback Therefore you should adjust the color map to the overall shape of the signal you are measuring Let s say for example that the signal has an amplitude range of about 30 dB with the maximum amplitude at about 60 dBm and the minimum amplitude at about 100 dBm and the Green Yellow color scheme With the default settings the spectrogram is made up exclusively of green colors and it s not easy to distinguish amplitude levels That s because the yellow color shades are completely out of range Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 77 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements To get a better result change the
382. vides several measurement modes gt Press the MODE key gt Press the Receiver Interferences softkey Interference analyzer R amp S FSH K15 gt Select the Interference Analyzer menu item The R amp S FSH enters the interference analyzer For more information see Measuring the Spectrum on page 136 Map mode gt Select the Maps menu item The R amp S FSH enters the map application Triangulation R amp S FSH K15 gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Triangulation menu item The R amp S FSH provides the triangulation measurement functions For more information see Working with Maps on page 138 Geotagging R amp S FSH K16 gt Press the MEAS key Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Geotagging menu item The R amp S FSH provides the geotagging measurement functions For more information see Working with Maps on page 138 es Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 135 R amp S FSH Interference Analyzer R amp S FSH K15 K16 Eege EES Measuring the Spectrum 5 1 Measuring the Spectrum Most spectrum measurements of the interference analyzer are also available in Spectrum mode Using these measurements allow you to locate interferences in the frequency spectrum Measuring the Channel Power of Continuously Modulated Signals on page 43 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 47 Measuring the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR on page 54 Wo
383. way that the results fit ideally on the display The R amp S FSH does this by determining the minimum and maximum trace values and scaling the vertical axis according to these values gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the Auto Scale menu item The R amp S FSH performs automatic adjustment of the vertical axis Setting the reference position The reference position defines the position of the reference line in the diagram The reference position is a linear value between 0 and 10 Each value represents one horizontal grid line of the diagram O corresponds to the top grid line and 10 corresponds to the bottom grid line When you change the reference position the R amp S FSH also shifts the position of the trace by the magnitude of the reference position change It has no effect on the reference value itself gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Ref Pos softkey gt Enter the reference position you want The R amp S FSH moves the trace accordingly 7 2 3 2 Setting the Attenuation The R amp S FSH provides functions to attenuate the signal at both the tracking generator output and the RF input gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the TG Output Attenuation softkey gt Enter the attenuation of the signal at the tracking generator output You can attenuate the signal from 0 dBm to 40 dBm An input of 10 dB for example corresponds to an attenuation of 10 dBm gt Press the RF Att Amp Imp
384. wer in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH S SCH Power Shows the power of the S SCH in dBm The abbreviation in brackets shows if it is the absolute power or the power in relation to the pilot channel P CPICH e Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 226 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer el Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 2 The Code Domain Analyzer If you equip the R amp S FSH with option R amp S FSH K44E code domain analysis becomes available to visualize the results in a diagram Press the Result Display softkey gt Select the Code Domain Power menu item The R amp S FSH starts the code domain analyzer Screen layout of the code domain power result display Ref 30 0 D sen RBW 100 kHz Sweep Cort Trace Clear Write Preamp On Ref Offset 0 0 dB Center Frequency 2 1672 GHz Band WCOMA 2 1 Code Channel 0 Slot 8 Symbol Rate 150 ksps o RF Channel Power Power HI dBm Composite EVM 40 0 50 0 Sack 0 0 ll i 180 0 110 0 120 0 Start Code O Stop Code 511 a Heab 6 Display Sattine Current type of result display Currently selected standard Header table Diagram header Diagram area WCDMA softkey menu OO P Go h 9 4 2 1 Header Table The header table contains an assortment of settings already discussed in the section about the result summary For more information see The Result Summary on page 223 In addition it contains the following information RBW
385. xample FSH4View exe csv Dataset set Dataset csv Renames the file Datset set into Dataset csv Environment variables The command line option only works if you execute the command from the installation folder of R amp S FSH4View software Otherwise you have to set a Path environment variable to the destination of the location of the exe file You can access the environment variable via the MS Windows control panel Start Menu gt Control Panel gt System gt Advanced System Settings gt Advanced tab gt Environment Variables button gt System Variables gt Path gt Add anew variable with the installation path of the software The default installation path is e C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSH4View for Windows XP Vista and 7 32 bit e C Program Files x86 Rohde Schwarz FSH4View for Windows 7 64 bit If necessary change the path as required Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 27 R amp S FSH Operating the R amp S FSH Managing Datasets 1 8 2 Restoring Datasets You can preview and load previously saved measurement results with the recall function of the R amp S FSH This function also provides easy access to previous measurement settings so that you do not have to set up the R amp S FSH again gt Press the SAVE RECALL key The R amp S FSH opens the file manager gt Select the dataset you want to use The R amp S FSH restores the configuration that the dataset contains By
386. y Press the Clear softkey Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 75 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyzer Mode Performing Spectrum Measurements 3 1 10 2 Browsing Through the Signal History There are two ways to view parts of the measurement result history that have moved outside the visible area of the spectrogram gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Spectrogram Settings softkey gt Select the Spectrogram Full Screen menu item The R amp S FSH now uses the full diagram area of the screen for the spectrogram The number of lines in the spectrogram and therefore the displayed time period more than doubles gt The Spectrogram Full Screen menu item is marked by an X lt may however be necessary that the spectrum result display is still visible to evaluate measurement results For this purpose the spectrogram has an invisible scrollbar that you can use to scroll up and down the spectrogram to the frame that you d like to see Scrolling through the spectrogram Turn the rotary knob or use the UP and DOWN cursor keys whenever you are viewing the spectrogram The R amp S FSH scrolls through the spectrogram history Note that this is only possible as long as no input field or menu is active To resume the spectrogram scroll function in this case gt Press the CANCEL key gt Use the rotary knob or the UP and DOWN cursor keys again The R amp S FSH resumes scrolling through the spectrogram history The symbols o
387. y depends on the number of other data sets stored on the R amp S FSH For more information see Managing Datasets on page 21 gt Press the MEAS key gt Press the Calibration softkey gt Select the Select Calkit menu item The R amp S FSH opens a dialog box to select the calibration kit The list of supported calibration kits covers those supported by the R amp S FSH and those that you have customized BESSER Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 156 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Calibrating Measurements gt Select the calibration kit you are using The R amp S FSH uses the characteristics specified for the calibration kit It also shows the calibration kit currently in use next to the Select Calkit menu item You can also use calibration kits other than the R amp S FSH Z28 or Z29 in combination with their characteristics However make sure that the electrical length of the calibration kit in use is similar to that of the R amp S FSH Z28 or Z29 The electrical length of the Open and Short of the R amp S FSH calibration kits is 5 27 mm If the electrical length is different it may cause additional phase error Some measurement setups may include additional cables or adapters that may have an additional electrical length To correct their phase error you can include the electrical length of additional test equipment The R amp S FSH distinguishes if the equipment is connected to port 1 or port 2 gt
388. y from 200 to 200 In that case the R amp S FSH displays measurement results correctly only if the phase difference between two adjacent test points is less than 180 You can unwrap the phase to expand the range of the phase gt Press the AMPT key gt Press the Range softkey gt Select the Phase Wrap or Phase Unwrap menu item Available for all vector measurements O Simultaneous display of magnitude and phase characteristics Selecting the Magnitude Phase format results in a split screen that shows the magnitude characteristics in the upper screen and the phase in the lower screen Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 167 R amp S FSH Network Analyzer Mode Evaluating the Results VSWR Shows the voltage standing wave ratio of the DUT The VSWR is the ratio of the maximum to the minimum voltage that occur in an electrical transmission line It is a measure of the reflected power at the input of the DUT The results are displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic vertical axis Available for vector reflection measurements Reflection coefficient Shows the reflection coefficient of the DUT The reflection coefficient is the ratio of the amplitude of a reflected wave and that of the incidental wave that occur in an electrical transmission line You can set the unit for the reflection coefficient gt Press the AMPT key Press the Unit softkey Available for vector reflection measuremen
389. y menu RON oOo ON O Ol Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 183 R amp S FSH Distance to Fault Mode R amp S FSH K41 EA AAA AAA Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements 7 1 Performing Cable and Antenna Measurements In order to get an idea about problems of a cable you can analyze several aspects of the signal 7 1 1 Reflection Measurements The reflection S11 measurement is a good way to get an idea if the transmission system works properly If unusual amounts of signal power are being reflected you can guess that there is something wrong in the system This measurement helps to find reflections by displaying the magnitude of the reflections in dB in a specified frequency range gt Press the Meas Mode softkey gt Select the Reflection menu item The R amp S FSH starts the reflection measurement over its entire frequency range The figure shows an example of a reflection measurement without any major faults in the cable or the antenna You can perform reflection aa HEE a TG Power 10 d m measurements on the complete system or on individual components of the system If you measure while two or more system components are connected the results of the reflection measurement are an aggregate over these components Therefore you can only see the aggregated magnitude of the reflected power in a specified frequency range Center 446 GHz Spam 100 MHz DTF Eiet m Fault To draw conclusions about w
390. ype of result display Currently selected standard General settings Global results Channel results Synchronization state green font synchronization OK red font synchronization failed 7 3GPP WCDMA softkey menu oor Go h Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 223 R amp S FSH Digital Modulation Analyzer Measurements on 3GPP FDD Signals 9 4 1 1 General Settings For more information see General Settings of the Digital Modulation Analyzer on page 207 In addition the application features some settings specific to the 3GPP standard For more information on each type of parameter see Configuring the Measurement on page 232 Scrambling Code Shows the way you have selected to determine the scrambling code In case of manual selection the field shows the actual number of the scrambling code In case of automatic selection the field shows an Auto label Antenna Div ersity Shows the currently selected antenna diversity P CPICH Slot Shows the slot number the results are displayed for Ch annel Search Shows the status of the channel search 9 4 1 2 Global Results Global results contain various measurement results of the composite signal These results evaluate the total signal over the period of one slot Channel Power Shows the power of the complete signal in dBm Carrier Frequency Error Shows the frequency error in relation to the current center frequency of the R amp S FSH The absolute frequency error is
391. ze is 10 of the span e Position the marker with the rotary knob When positioning the marker with the rotary knob the step size is one pixel e Enter a marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys gt Confirm the marker position with the ENTER key The marker input field closes By default the marker list above the diagram area is active The marker list shows the horizontal position of all markers and the corresponding vertical value If inactive the list shows only the coordinates of markers 1 and 2 You can turn it off and on again whenever you like gt Press the View List softkey The marker list turns off or on depending on its original state 3 2 6 3 Positioning a Delta Marker When a normal marker is already in use you can add delta markers gt Press the MARKER key gt Press the New Marker softkey The R amp S FSH activates a delta marker and positions it on the next maximum level that has been measured In addition the delta marker input field opens The R amp S FSH adds the delta marker to the marker list and shows the marker position relative to the normal marker M1 You can perform the following actions e Enter a delta marker position with the number keys and confirm the entry with one of the unit keys e Change the delta marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor keys BESSE Operating Manual 1173 6275 12 23 108 R amp S FSH Spectrum Analyze

R&S FSH Operating Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSH Operating Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSH Operating Manual